IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 |
Hello.
My name is Pual F Aubin and welcome to
| | 00:06 |
Revit Architecture, Essential Training.
Over the last decade, Revit has become the
| | 00:10 |
defacto standard computer application for
architects and building design professionals.
| | 00:15 |
In this course we'll start with basics
like wall, columns, doors and windows.
| | 00:19 |
We'll build floor slabs and roofs and
learn how these forms interact with one
| | 00:23 |
another, like the surrounding walls,
elevator shafts and even roof dormers.
| | 00:28 |
And what building would be complete
without stairs, railing, plumbing and
| | 00:31 |
lighting fixtures.
We'll even create our own custom
| | 00:34 |
components like a custom pool table.
But using Revit is not just about modeling.
| | 00:39 |
I'll show you how you can annotate your
drawings with text, dimensions, and other
| | 00:43 |
standard architectural symbols.
Revit allows us to generate live schedules
| | 00:48 |
of just about any part of our building.
We'll create construction details and
| | 00:53 |
compose sheets for printing out our
document sets.
| | 00:56 |
So if you're ready to begin your journey
into the world of Revit Architecture,
| | 00:59 |
let's get started.
| | 01:00 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:01 |
If you're a a premium member of the
lynda.com online training library, you
| | 00:03 |
have access to the exercise files used
throughout this course.
| | 00:07 |
The exercise files are located in a folder
which I've placed on my Desktop, that
| | 00:10 |
folder contains a subfolder for each of
the chapters in the course.
| | 00:15 |
You open a particular folder for a chapter
and you will find a series of Revit files
| | 00:18 |
in that folder.
In some cases, you will find some
| | 00:21 |
additional files that are not Revit
format.
| | 00:24 |
You'll be instructed on what to do with
those files in each of the movies that use them.
| | 00:29 |
There's one more folder here called Links
and it contains a single revit file called
| | 00:33 |
Building Site.
That file is referenced by the projects in
| | 00:36 |
many of the other folders.
There's really nothing for you to do in
| | 00:40 |
the Links folder.
Just keep that file there in the same
| | 00:43 |
relative location and the other projects
will find it.
| | 00:46 |
If you're a monthly or annual subscriber
to lynda.com you don't have access to the
| | 00:49 |
exercise files, but you can follow along
in your own work.
| | 00:53 |
So let's get started.
| | 00:54 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Core ConceptsIntroducing Building Information Modeling (BIM)| 00:00 |
So I know you're probably anxious to get
into Revit right away, but before we do,
| | 00:03 |
let's talk about a few high level concepts
first.
| | 00:06 |
For starters, just what is BIM?
Well, BIM stands for Building Information
| | 00:10 |
Modeling, and it's a term that was coined
a few years back by Autodesk to basically
| | 00:13 |
describe the process of creating virtual
models that represent building facilities.
| | 00:20 |
Now Revit is often heavily touted as
purpose-built for building information modelling.
| | 00:26 |
And this is true, but that often leads to
confusion that somehow Revit and Bim equal
| | 00:30 |
the same thing.
Revit and Bim are not the same thing.
| | 00:34 |
Revit is a tool to help achieve Bim.
And what Bim is a process that we follow
| | 00:40 |
to create building model data, that is two
things, coordinated and computable.
| | 00:47 |
Those are the two most important tenets of
BIM.
| | 00:50 |
If all of the parts and pieces that make
up your BIM project are fully coordinated
| | 00:53 |
with one another.
And don't require any manual updates to,
| | 00:58 |
to keep them in sync.
And if you've got a robust rich data store
| | 01:03 |
of information that can be used both
internally by the system, and exported out
| | 01:07 |
to the larger project team, to do
meaningful computations like energy analysis.
| | 01:15 |
Like structural loads.
Like lighting analysis.
| | 01:20 |
air loads.
Air cooling.
| | 01:22 |
Any of those things.
Then you've, you've got BIM.
| | 01:27 |
So there's a lot of different ways that we
can achieve BIM, and Revit is an excellent
| | 01:30 |
tool to help us achieve that, because it
does many of those things that I've just
| | 01:34 |
described natively.
Now, it's important to understand that 3D
| | 01:39 |
is not the only component of BIM.
often, when you hear BIM in the same
| | 01:43 |
sentence, you'll hear people talk about
3D.
| | 01:46 |
Now don't get me wrong, 3D is very
important.
| | 01:48 |
If your primary goal is to perform clash
detection between your structure and your
| | 01:52 |
mechanical systems, or if you want to make
sure that your stair tower fits into the
| | 01:55 |
overall architecture, 3D is pretty
important.
| | 01:59 |
If you need to do visualization to get
high quality renderings and so forth, 3D
| | 02:03 |
is pretty important.
However, 3D is not the only aspect that
| | 02:08 |
makes BIM special, 3D is just part of it.
I think that that I and BIM are more
| | 02:13 |
compelling than the M and BIM.
Think about cost estimating tests, think
| | 02:18 |
about specification writing, think about
energy load analysis, think about heating
| | 02:23 |
and cooling, think about structural loads,
all of these things require data.
| | 02:29 |
We have all this data, instead of manually
computing all the various things that we
| | 02:33 |
need, to get a proper design, why not let
the computer do what computers do best?
| | 02:39 |
Compute stuff!
So, this is what BIM is all about.
| | 02:42 |
So again, let's not focus just on the M,
let's also think about the I, and if we've
| | 02:46 |
got the two together in a fully
coordinated package.
| | 02:50 |
In, in a way that Revit will give us, then
what we got is a fully implemented BIM solution.
| | 02:56 |
So with that introduction in mind let's go
ahead and get started.
| | 02:59 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working in one model with many views| 00:00 |
So what's so special about Revit anyhow?
Well there are many possible answers to
| | 00:03 |
that question, but in this movie I'd like
to focus on one of the easiest and most
| | 00:06 |
immediate benefits of using the software.
Whether you're an architect, an interior
| | 00:11 |
designer, or draftsman you spend a lot of
your time looking at plans, sections, and elevations.
| | 00:15 |
In Revit, work that you do in plan is
immediately reflected in the elevation section.
| | 00:21 |
And vice versa.
In this movie I'll show you how Revit
| | 00:23 |
makes it easy to keep all your changes
coordinated with a first hand look at what
| | 00:26 |
I think is one of the most fundamental
benefits of building information modeling.
| | 00:31 |
The fully coordinated building model.
So, I have here on screen a file called
| | 00:34 |
Core Concepts.
It's included with the exercise files.
| | 00:36 |
Feel free to open this file and follow
along or you can open up any file of your choosing.
| | 00:41 |
Now, I have here a 3D view and a floor
plan, an elevation and even a schedule.
| | 00:45 |
And what I'd like to show you first is, if
you select any object, in any view, like
| | 00:49 |
this door here.
Let me zoom in just a little bit so we can
| | 00:53 |
get a better look at that.
Notice that that door selects in a bluish
| | 00:57 |
color here in the 3D view, and we're going
to talk more about selection in a later
| | 01:01 |
movie, and it also highlights here in the
elevation and here, in the plan view.
| | 01:07 |
So it doesn't matter which view I select
it in.
| | 01:11 |
If it's selected, it's selected in all
views.
| | 01:13 |
Now that carries through to modifications
as well.
| | 01:16 |
If I take this door, and I move it
slightly, here in the floor plan view,
| | 01:19 |
you're going to see that change
immediately take place in both the
| | 01:23 |
elevation and the 3D view.
Let me do it again and I'd like you to pay
| | 01:28 |
attention not to where I am here in the
floor plan.
| | 01:31 |
Keep your eyes focused over here in the 3D
view and in the elevation view as I make
| | 01:35 |
the change like so.
And you'll see that it doesn't matter that
| | 01:39 |
I made the change in floor plan, it's
immediately applied in the other views as well.
| | 01:43 |
Now, we're not limited to just working in
graphical views when we do this.
| | 01:47 |
A really interesting and powerful feature
of working in software like Revit is that
| | 01:51 |
schedules are actually live use as well.
I am going to focus my attention over here
| | 01:57 |
in the conference room and you could see I
have a series of doors over here in the
| | 02:01 |
conference room, door number 110, 111, and
110A and I am going to look over here the
| | 02:05 |
schedule and you will see a list of those
same doors.
| | 02:11 |
Here is door number 110, 110A, and 111.
And notice that as I select them, in the
| | 02:16 |
schedule they highlight immediately in the
floor plan as well.
| | 02:21 |
In fact, it is one in the same object.
This is door number one ten listed in
| | 02:26 |
tabular format as a list in the schedule
this is door number one ten show
| | 02:29 |
graphically in a floor plan.
If I decided I wanted to make a change to
| | 02:35 |
that door.
For example, perhaps I wanted it to be
| | 02:38 |
another type of door.
Maybe a different size.
| | 02:41 |
I could open up the list here, and drop it
down to a smaller size, and you'll see it
| | 02:45 |
get slightly smaller there in the floor
plan, and the sizes update here in
| | 02:49 |
schedule as well.
Now maybe I want something a little more
| | 02:54 |
dramatic So I'm going to choose a double
glass door.
| | 02:57 |
You can see the size gets considerably
larger.
| | 02:59 |
And you can see the graphic over here in
the floor plan has changed accordingly.
| | 03:03 |
Now maybe I want to get a better look at
that door that I just changed.
| | 03:07 |
I can do that by creating a new view to
take a look directly at that door.
| | 03:12 |
And I'm going to do that with one of my
favorite views in Revit.
| | 03:14 |
A Section view.
And, I'm going to drag a section through
| | 03:18 |
the conference room, open it up, and zoom
in slightly, and you can see that we're
| | 03:21 |
now looking directly at that double door.
Now, this is the same door, you can see
| | 03:28 |
that if I highlight it here it's
highlighted there.
| | 03:33 |
Now, when I'm in this section view I might
notice that there's trouble up on the
| | 03:36 |
second floor.
I realize that there's a door right here,
| | 03:40 |
that if we take a look in the second floor
plan isn't really in the appropriate location.
| | 03:46 |
This door really (UNKNOWN) to be over
here, in this quarter.
| | 03:49 |
Whether or not I'm in the floor plan or in
the section I can make the change And it's
| | 03:53 |
effected in both views.
In traditional architectural design and
| | 03:57 |
documentation procedures drawings are the
result of carefully reasoned thought and design.
| | 04:02 |
a process of draw, erase and redraw
eventually leads to the desired result
| | 04:05 |
which then must be replicated in all
appropriate drawings like sections and elevations.
| | 04:11 |
Each drawing conveys only a small
abstracted part of the whole and can
| | 04:13 |
easily get out of synch...
In contrast, the bim slash Revit workflow,
| | 04:18 |
all modifications are performed directly
in the model, in any view that is
| | 04:22 |
convenient to the task at hand.
Revit views are live representations of
| | 04:27 |
the model displayed through the prism of
conventional architectural drawing types
| | 04:31 |
like plans, sections, elevations.
However, since each view is really just, a
| | 04:36 |
window looking at the whole, the various
views cannot get out of sync, an therefore
| | 04:40 |
always accurately convey the current state
of the design.
| | 04:44 |
This is one of the major benefits, of
using Bin software.
| | 04:47 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding Revit element hierarchy| 00:01 |
In this movie, we'll explore some high
level concepts common to the Revit platform.
| | 00:04 |
All elements in Revit fit into a built in
hierarchy.
| | 00:07 |
The purpose of this movie is simply to
expose you to some of these high level
| | 00:10 |
concepts and give you a better
understanding of how the elements in the
| | 00:13 |
system fit into the larger frame work.
So I want to start with the broadest grouping.
| | 00:19 |
All of the elements in the software could
be grouped broadly into some major
| | 00:24 |
groupings, I like to call them buckets.
So, if you thought of model elements as
| | 00:30 |
one big bucket, and then we also have view
elements, datum elements, and annotation elements.
| | 00:37 |
What I'm going to focus on mainly in this
movie is model elements and annotation elements.
| | 00:43 |
The model elements are anything that
represent an actual thing.
| | 00:48 |
Something that's real in the building when
the building is built.
| | 00:51 |
So if you can walk up to something and put
your hand out and touch it, it's a model element.
| | 00:56 |
And the annotation elements are things
that aren't real, things that describe
| | 01:00 |
objects in a set of drawings but aren't
necessarily built in an actual building.
| | 01:05 |
So let me show you some examples.
I am here in Revit in a file called
| | 01:09 |
Hierarchy, and it is included with the
exercise files if you would like to follow
| | 01:12 |
along or you could open any Revit file
that has both model and annotation objects
| | 01:16 |
in it.
I would like to illustrate a few other
| | 01:20 |
points that we are just discussing.
For example over here, I have a wall, here
| | 01:24 |
I have door, here I have a stair and a
railing.
| | 01:27 |
Those would be considered model elements,
they're actual parts of the building, if
| | 01:31 |
the building was built you could go walk
up to those objects and you could touch,
| | 01:34 |
they're real elements.
Contrast that to things like this wall
| | 01:39 |
tag, or this door tag, or these
dimensions, or this bar scale.
| | 01:45 |
Those items are not real in the sense that
nobody's going to paint them on the floor
| | 01:48 |
of the finished building, or they're not
going to build the bar scale out in front
| | 01:51 |
of the facility.
They are representational objects that are
| | 01:56 |
meaningful for an architectural drawing,
but they're not actually physical objects.
| | 02:01 |
Now, those objects behave fundamentally
different in Revit.
| | 02:05 |
A model element, as we saw in the previous
movie, is a live object that if you change
| | 02:10 |
it in one view, such as taking this door
and moving it over here, it will be
| | 02:14 |
reflected in any other view.
If I switch to another floor plan, you can
| | 02:21 |
see that that door has already moved.
Now in this floor plan you can see, that
| | 02:26 |
the annotation is actually quite
different.
| | 02:29 |
There are no dimensions over here.
There's no bar scale.
| | 02:33 |
Some of the room tags are outside of the
rooms rather than inside.
| | 02:38 |
The door tags are not even included in the
door.
| | 02:41 |
So, there's clearly a difference between
the way the annotation appears in this
| | 02:45 |
level one furniture plan versus the way
that it appeared here in the level one
| | 02:48 |
floor plan.
So, let me show you an example of that.
| | 02:53 |
If I take this room tag here in the
furniture plan and I move it.
| | 02:58 |
Say, over to this location.
If I return to my original Level 1 floor plan.
| | 03:03 |
Notice that the corridor room tag is still
in the original location.
| | 03:08 |
And that's because each of these floor
plans maintains its own version of its annotation.
| | 03:15 |
So the annotation is what we call view
specific.
| | 03:18 |
It belongs to the view in question.
Level 1 in this case.
| | 03:21 |
Or level 1 furniture in the alternate
case.
| | 03:24 |
If we change the model as we saw it
changes everywhere, so that's a main
| | 03:28 |
distinction between the model versus the
annotation.
| | 03:33 |
Now, there's another stage of the
hierarchy that we also want to understand.
| | 03:37 |
If I highlight one of the objects you'll
see a tool tip appear on screen.
| | 03:41 |
You'll see that same tip appear down in
the lower left hand corner of the screen.
| | 03:45 |
Now, that information you can see there's
actually three bits of information there.
| | 03:50 |
Currently, the status line says walls,
then basic wall, then interior 4 and 7
| | 03:54 |
8ths partition.
If I switch over to this door, you'll see
| | 03:59 |
it says doors, then single flush, then 36
by 84.
| | 04:04 |
Now, what that is, is a three step object
hierarchy that all elements, both model,
| | 04:09 |
and annotation, share in common.
We have a category.
| | 04:15 |
We have a family.
An we have a type.
| | 04:18 |
Categories are a built in list of object
types that are available in the software.
| | 04:23 |
You and I cannot change this list.
Examples might be, doors, or walls, or
| | 04:27 |
stairs, or door tags.
Those are all categories.
| | 04:31 |
The behavior of each of those categories
is well defined, built into the software
| | 04:35 |
and we just simply use objects of those
categories.
| | 04:39 |
The next tier of the hierarchy is the
family.
| | 04:42 |
Certain families are built in, we call
those system families, and we'll discuss
| | 04:45 |
them in more detail in future movie.
And we also have what we call component
| | 04:49 |
families, which are families that you and
I actually can modify, and again we'll
| | 04:53 |
talk about that in a future movie.
But conceptually, what a family is, is
| | 04:58 |
really just a much more specific version
of some object in a particular category.
| | 05:04 |
So, if you think about doors, in general,
all a door does is cuts a hole in a wall
| | 05:07 |
and allows people to walk through.
But doors come in many shapes and sizes.
| | 05:13 |
We have single, flush, swinging doors.
We have double doors.
| | 05:17 |
We have sliding doors and revolving doors.
Each of those kinds of door would be a family.
| | 05:24 |
What it means to be a revolving door is a
little different than what it means to be
| | 05:28 |
a swinging door or a bi fold door, so we
have family to distinguish those differences.
| | 05:34 |
Now, even within the family, you might
have variations.
| | 05:37 |
The most common would be different sizes.
So in the Revit hierarchy, we call those types.
| | 05:43 |
So if that single flush door comes in a 36
inch wide type and a 30 inch type.
| | 05:49 |
We would have a type for each of those
conditions.
| | 05:51 |
If that revolving door comes in one size
or another size or one type of
| | 05:55 |
construction or another type of
construction we would make types for that.
| | 06:01 |
So, every object in the hierarchy belongs
to category, family, and type.
| | 06:06 |
And another way to look at that, would be
to say that each element in your model,
| | 06:10 |
like this door that I can select here on
screen, belongs to a type, that type is
| | 06:14 |
part of a family, and that family is part
of a category.
| | 06:20 |
And again, it doesn't matter if we're
talking about a model element or an
| | 06:23 |
annotation element for this point here.
If I look at this room tag its got the
| | 06:29 |
same three step hierarchy: category, then
family, then type.
| | 06:34 |
Or this bar scale down here which is
category, generic annotation, graphic
| | 06:39 |
scale 18 is the family and the type name
is similar.
| | 06:44 |
So every object falls into this multi-step
family type category hierarchy and all of
| | 06:49 |
the objects fit into those larger buckets.
| | 06:54 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Getting Comfortable with the Revit EnvironmentUnderstanding the different versions of Revit| 00:00 |
As you may be aware, there are a variety
of versions or flavors of Rivet out there.
| | 00:03 |
And in this movie, I'd like to talk about
some of those differences between them,
| | 00:06 |
and talk about the focus of this course.
So, for architecture, we have three options.
| | 00:12 |
There is Rivet or Autodesk Rivet which is
the full product that includes
| | 00:16 |
functionality for all disciplines.
Architecture, MEP, and structure.
| | 00:22 |
This is part of the building design suite
so, if you have one of the building design
| | 00:25 |
suites then you actually have Autodesk
Revit.
| | 00:27 |
And you'll have multiple tabs, and each
tab will include the functionality of the
| | 00:30 |
different disciplines.
There's also Revit Architecture, which
| | 00:34 |
includes only the architectural
functionality.
| | 00:37 |
The only real difference between Revit and
Revit Architecture is essentially in the
| | 00:41 |
Options dialog where you can choose which
disciplines are of interest.
| | 00:45 |
And turn on and off functionality in the
full version of Revit, in the Revit
| | 00:49 |
architecture product, it only includes the
architectural functionality to begin with.
| | 00:54 |
So, we also have Revit LT, which is a
relative new comer in the Revit portfolio.
| | 01:00 |
You can think of this as a limited version
of Revit Architecture so, it is focused on
| | 01:03 |
the architectural discipline.
And it includes a subset of functionality
| | 01:08 |
from the full architectural product.
Now, there are also flavors of Revit for
| | 01:12 |
engineering, that you might be aware of.
Again, the full version of Revit or the
| | 01:16 |
Autodesk Revit product is part of the
Building Design suite and includes all disciplines.
| | 01:21 |
Including architecture, structure and MEP,
but there's also two stand alone versions,
| | 01:26 |
Revit MEP and Revit Structure.
MEP is Mechanical Electrical Plumbing and
| | 01:30 |
then of course Revit Structure is for
Structural Engineering.
| | 01:33 |
This course is not going to focus on any
of the engineering aspects of the Revit software.
| | 01:38 |
It's going to be focused on the
architectural aspects.
| | 01:41 |
So, if you have any of the architectural
flavors of Revit, Autodesk Revit, Revit
| | 01:44 |
Archtecture or Revit LT, then you can
follow along with the lessons in this course.
| | 01:50 |
If you're using Revit LT, there are a few
movies which will not apply to you.
| | 01:55 |
So, check out the FAQ that's included here
on the course page, and you can see which
| | 01:58 |
specific movies do not apply.
Now, if haven't actually purchased a Revit
| | 02:02 |
product yet, then you might be interested
in more detail on what's difference
| | 02:05 |
between them.
So, let me just direct you to a few pages
| | 02:08 |
that are on the Autodesk website that you
can look at, to get more information on
| | 02:11 |
the differences between each of the
products.
| | 02:14 |
If you are interested in possibly going
with Revit LT, they have a comparison
| | 02:17 |
chart here which compares Revit LT to the
full version of Revit.
| | 02:22 |
And you can see that it goes feature by
feature and shows you which features are
| | 02:25 |
available and which ones are not available
comparing those two products.
| | 02:29 |
There is a similar comparison chart for
the building design suite, which compares
| | 02:33 |
the Building Designs Suite Premium with
the Building Design Suite.
| | 02:38 |
And with Revit and even with Auto CAD.
So, there is lots of information available
| | 02:41 |
on the Autodesk website.
And you can also talk to your local
| | 02:45 |
Autodesk re-seller, to get more
information on what the specifics are
| | 02:48 |
between the various flavors of the
products.
| | 02:51 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Recent Files screen and the application menu| 00:01 |
Recent file screen greets you when you
first launch Revit.
| | 00:03 |
Screen gives you quick access to the most
recently used project and family files.
| | 00:08 |
You'll also find quick links to various
resources, mostly online resources that
| | 00:11 |
may be of interest to you.
Like the user community and what's new and
| | 00:14 |
things like that.
So lets take a look.
| | 00:17 |
Here's our recent files screen as it
appears in Revit Architecture.
| | 00:20 |
I've got my projects area at the top and
my families area beneath that.
| | 00:24 |
The last four projects that you had open
are shown there with icons up to the last
| | 00:28 |
four because as you can see here with the
family area I haven't opened any families
| | 00:31 |
yet so I only see two items there.
Now, what you see on your screen may vary
| | 00:37 |
slightly, because naturally, you might
have opened different files than I have.
| | 00:41 |
So the specific items that are listed here
aren't that important.
| | 00:45 |
It's just a simply that, it's a quick way
for you to get to that file again.
| | 00:49 |
So if I was working on this project
yesterday.
| | 00:51 |
And I want to reopen it today, all I have
to do is click this icon and it will
| | 00:54 |
launch that file for me.
Now, if that's not the file that I want to
| | 00:59 |
work on, I have some options over here.
I can click the open link and that would
| | 01:03 |
take me to a browse window and I can go
out and locate the project that I want to open.
| | 01:08 |
I'm going to cancel that.
I can click this new link here and that
| | 01:12 |
will create a new project just based on
the default template, whatever that
| | 01:16 |
happens to be, okay?
And that's, a setting that we can actually
| | 01:20 |
change, or, I've got a few other template
choices that are listed here, which also
| | 01:23 |
may vary on one installation of Revit to
the next, so what you see specifically
| | 01:26 |
listed here on your screen.
Might vary slightly.
| | 01:31 |
Now the other way that we can access all
of these similar commands, new and open
| | 01:34 |
and save is in the application menu.
So I'd like to show you that now but
| | 01:38 |
before I do, I'm going to just create
using this architectural template link
| | 01:41 |
just to create a blank file to have as a
back drop The reason for that is, is as
| | 01:44 |
you'll notice many of the interface items
are not actually loaded until you have a
| | 01:48 |
project loaded.
So what I have loaded in the background is
| | 01:53 |
not really important.
But I want to focus on the application
| | 01:57 |
menu here.
And I just needed to have something open
| | 01:59 |
in the background in order to do that.
Now the application menu can best be
| | 02:03 |
described as essentially the file menu for
Revit.
| | 02:06 |
You have things like New and Open and
Save.
| | 02:09 |
Your typical commands that you would
expect to find in a File Menu.
| | 02:12 |
We have Print and of course close, all of
the sort of standard commands for file management.
| | 02:17 |
Now the way these work is if I just simply
click the item like the new item, I'll
| | 02:21 |
actually get a second project that will
load up.
| | 02:25 |
I am currently in project one but if I
would have just clicked right on new it
| | 02:28 |
would create project two.
If I hover over new, you could see that it
| | 02:32 |
loads up a menu over here, in the side of
the Application menu and gives me some options.
| | 02:38 |
So, I could create either a new project or
new family or new conceptual mass.
| | 02:42 |
So, if you want to create one of these
other types of files, then that's the way
| | 02:45 |
you do it.
You just simply pause your mouse first
| | 02:48 |
over the new item, and then that will make
the others appear.
| | 02:52 |
Let me show you that with the open item,
if I pause over Open now I can either open
| | 02:56 |
Projects, or Families, or Building
Components and so on.
| | 03:00 |
Now command like Save doesn't have any sub
options so it's just simply a command you
| | 03:04 |
would click.
Save As does have options so it's got the
| | 03:07 |
little arrow over here and again you pause
over it and you'll see the different
| | 03:11 |
options that are available.
In some cases like this Library option,
| | 03:16 |
there's a further flyout here.
This tiny little triangle is showing me that.
| | 03:20 |
And I could save as a family or group or a
view.
| | 03:23 |
So there are various options that become
evident as you hover over each one of
| | 03:27 |
these little things.
Now if I collapse all of that and take my
| | 03:31 |
Mouse off of any of those commands, at the
very top here you see two small icons, one
| | 03:35 |
that's labelled Recent Documents and
another one that's labelled Open Documents.
| | 03:42 |
Now recent documents is listing the two
files that I've previously opened in the
| | 03:46 |
last chapter, yours may vary depending on
how many previous Revit files you've had opened.
| | 03:54 |
The list can hold several items here,
there's plenty of room.
| | 03:56 |
And if there's an item that you want to
keep on the list permanetly, we have this
| | 04:00 |
little push pen feature over here.
So the way this works is if you just
| | 04:05 |
simply click this litle icon right there,
that will pen that item to the list.
| | 04:10 |
And as this list grows, what normally
happens is, the items that you've opened
| | 04:13 |
most recently stay on the list and the
ones you opened long ago will eventually
| | 04:17 |
scroll off the list when you run out of
room down here at the bottom.
| | 04:23 |
If you click the push pin, that item will
stay on the list.
| | 04:27 |
It will maintain its spot and stay on the
list and other items will scroll past it.
| | 04:31 |
So, if there's a project that you want to
make sure that you always have quick
| | 04:34 |
access to that's a great way to do it.
If you switch to this icon, this just
| | 04:38 |
shows you what you currently have open.
And you can see at the moment, all I have
| | 04:43 |
open is Project 1.
If I opened another project, like the
| | 04:47 |
Hierarchy file from the previous chapter
and then open this up.
| | 04:53 |
You can see that it now lists both items
on the list.
| | 04:56 |
So as you open additional files, they will
just simply appear there on the list.
| | 05:01 |
So the recent file screen and the
application menu, both provide quick and
| | 05:04 |
easy access to your most recently used
projects and familys in Revet.
| | 05:08 |
Use recent files to get started when you
first launch Revet.
| | 05:11 |
And you can use the application menu any
time to open and close files or create new
| | 05:15 |
files and generate output as you're
working in the software.
| | 05:19 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the ribbon and the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT)| 00:00 |
In this movie we're going to take an
overview of two very important parts of
| | 00:03 |
the Revit user interface.
The Ribbon, and the Quick Access toolbar.
| | 00:08 |
Now the Ribbon is the primary interface
for most commands in Revit and it's
| | 00:11 |
located across the top of the screen in
this location here.
| | 00:15 |
Now as you can see there are several tabs,
architecture, structure, insert and each
| | 00:18 |
of those contains different series of
buttons.
| | 00:22 |
Now right above the ribbon is the Quick
Access Toolbar or QAT.
| | 00:26 |
And this can be thought of as really like
a shortcut menu if you want to think of it
| | 00:29 |
that way.
so lets look at the Revit in a little more detail.
| | 00:35 |
So we have various tabs, now the specific
tabs that you have on your interface might
| | 00:38 |
vary slighty depending on the settings or
the exact verion of Revit you have.
| | 00:42 |
But you can see that I have architecute
and structure and insert and annotate, and
| | 00:46 |
if I click on any of these, it does change
which commands are available.
| | 00:53 |
Each ribbon tab is broken into panels, we
have got panels like build, circulation
| | 00:57 |
and model.
And these are just convenient ways to
| | 01:00 |
group the commands, which are similar to
one another or related to one another in
| | 01:04 |
some way.
And finally, on each of these panels we
| | 01:08 |
have a collection of buttons.
The buttons come in a few varieties, so
| | 01:12 |
the simplest kind of button is a button
you just simply click and it just does one thing.
| | 01:17 |
Examples would be Malian or door, you will
noticed that when I highlighted it
| | 01:21 |
highlights the single command, and if i
clicked it, it only does one thing.
| | 01:26 |
Contrast to a command like model group
Model Group when I highlight it, you'll
| | 01:30 |
notice there's a little tiny error right
here.
| | 01:34 |
And if I click it, rather than just
running a command like the door command
| | 01:37 |
would, it actually pops open a small menu.
So we call this a Drop Down Button.
| | 01:43 |
Okay so, then you go in and you choose one
of the commands of this menu.
| | 01:47 |
now most of the bottons are actually a
combination of the two.
| | 01:51 |
So we call these Split buttons.
Wall is a good example of that.
| | 01:55 |
The top portion of the wall coming in, is
just a simple push button.
| | 01:59 |
If I click it, it just runs that command.
If I click the bottom half, I get a drop
| | 02:04 |
down menu.
So the same button is actually in two
| | 02:07 |
pieces, and they call it a split button,
or I like to sometimes call it a combo button.
| | 02:12 |
Because it can do one or the other.
Here's some other examples.
| | 02:15 |
This one's oriented horizontally.
The left-hand side is the default.
| | 02:19 |
The right-hand side is the drop-down.
Floor command is the same way.
| | 02:23 |
There's the floor command.
If I just click it, or I can click the
| | 02:26 |
drop-down, an get the other commands.
Now I should point out that a lot a people
| | 02:31 |
get in the habit of using, the drop-downs
regardless of whether or not they wanted
| | 02:34 |
the default command or not.
Like for example, with the wall command Is
| | 02:39 |
there any difference between clicking here
and I get the wall command, I'm going to
| | 02:43 |
press Esc, or clicking here and choosing
this first item on the list, wall
| | 02:46 |
architectural, no, there's no difference
whatsoever, the only difference is it took
| | 02:50 |
me two clicks to the get there the second
time versus the one click.
| | 02:58 |
Now if you get in the habit of doing it
that way, that's not that big of a deal.
| | 03:01 |
Some people prefer seeing all the choices
they have available to them before they
| | 03:03 |
choose which one they want to click.
I'm just simply pointing out that if you
| | 03:07 |
know that you want the default, you can go
right to that button instead of using the
| | 03:10 |
drop down.
Now there's two other little items that i
| | 03:13 |
want to point out to you on the ribbon.
One is an expandable panel, as you can see
| | 03:18 |
here under room and area.
What this signifies when you see this
| | 03:23 |
small little icon here and it highlights
in blue, is that there are some buttons
| | 03:26 |
hidden away under this expandable portion
of the panels.
| | 03:31 |
So the panel expands out and then you can
see there's additional commands under here...
| | 03:36 |
The other interface item I have to switch
tabs to show you, I'll go over here to the
| | 03:39 |
annotate tab, and if you look at the text
panel it doesn't highlight but notice here
| | 03:43 |
there's this tiny little button that has
like a little down pointing arrow to it.
| | 03:50 |
We call these dialog launchers.
And when I click that, it brings up some
| | 03:54 |
sort of a dialog, thus the name dialog
launcher.
| | 03:58 |
So, usually when you click those little
icons it's going to be some sort of a
| | 04:02 |
dialog with settings that relate to the
commands in question on that panel.
| | 04:08 |
So, I'm just going to cancel out of there
without making any changes.
| | 04:10 |
Just be on the lookout for those very
subtle little icons there that are
| | 04:13 |
sometimes stashed away on the panel titles
themselves.
| | 04:18 |
Now let's direct our attention to the
quick access toolbar.
| | 04:21 |
You can use the ribbons exclusively to
execute all of your commands.
| | 04:25 |
You don't have to use the QAT at all.
However, the QAT is there because there's
| | 04:29 |
certain commands you use frequently and it
might be a little more convenient To go
| | 04:33 |
directly to the icon on the qat than it is
to switch tabs all the time, so, if you
| | 04:37 |
prefer, you can do that, and you can see
here that a lot of the standard commands
| | 04:40 |
are here, we've got open and save, and
undo and redo, and some of the other
| | 04:43 |
commands here.
You can simply click them and they
| | 04:50 |
function in exactly the same way they
would accessing those commands in other
| | 04:53 |
locations, like right here on my annotate
tab here's the text command.
| | 04:58 |
And there's the exact same command right
there, on the QAT, that's just an example.
| | 05:03 |
Now, at the very end of the QAT is a
little dropdown, and we can use this to
| | 05:07 |
customize the quick access toolbar.
Now, most commands that are eligible to be
| | 05:14 |
placed here are already here, you can see
new is the only one that is not included.
| | 05:18 |
And if I just simply choose that it adds
the new command to the start of the quick
| | 05:22 |
access toolbar, so that's a really easy
way that we can customize what we see there.
| | 05:28 |
Now for more customization potential what
you do is you open up that drop down and
| | 05:32 |
you come down here near the bottom and
choose this command here.
| | 05:36 |
Customize the quick access toolbar...
This brings up a dialogue that would allow
| | 05:41 |
me to select commands.
Move them up and down in the list.
| | 05:44 |
I can move it down or move it up.
I can add separators.
| | 05:47 |
I can remove command.
So if I decided I no longer wanted the new
| | 05:50 |
command to be on the QAT, I can simply
select it.
| | 05:53 |
Click this X right here, that removes it.
And when I click OK, it disappears off the list.
| | 05:58 |
The other way you can add commands to the
Q.At.T.
| | 06:02 |
is to simply right click the command on
the ribbon, and you can choose this
| | 06:05 |
command, here, add to quick access
toolbar.
| | 06:09 |
And if I do that, you'll see it will add
that icon to your Q.A.T.
| | 06:14 |
and make it available on the list.
Of course, it adds it to the end, so if
| | 06:17 |
want to move it around, then you would
return to this customized command.
| | 06:21 |
To move it around.
Now if you do that a lot and you add a lot
| | 06:23 |
of commands to the QAT, you're going to
see here, you're going to run out of room
| | 06:26 |
pretty quickly.
So the last thing I want to show you is,
| | 06:30 |
you can right click anywhere on the QAT
and you can say, show the quick access
| | 06:33 |
toolbar below the ribbon.
It will move it from here, drop it down
| | 06:38 |
here and now you have all this space to
work with.
| | 06:42 |
I'm going to right click this command
again, remove it from the QAT and I'll
| | 06:46 |
right click again over here and show it
above the ribbon just to reset myself.
| | 06:52 |
Feel free, though, to make whatever
customizations you find appropriate.
| | 06:56 |
So most of the tasks you perform in Revit
will begin with the tool either on the
| | 06:59 |
ribbon or the quick access tool bar.
We'll get into the specifics of all the
| | 07:03 |
various tools in later movies.
But I just wanted to start this off on the
| | 07:07 |
right foot by giving you a quick overview
of the critical interface items.
| | 07:11 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding context ribbons| 00:01 |
Context ribbon tabs appear on the ribbon
as you create an modify element in Revit.
| | 00:06 |
In this movie we will look at how to
identify a context ribbon, when it will
| | 00:08 |
appear, and the sorts of commands that you
can expect to find on them.
| | 00:12 |
In addition context ribbon tabs, the
options bar gives us feedbacks to options
| | 00:15 |
and commands as you execute them.
So we'll also take a look at this critical
| | 00:20 |
interface feature as well.
So I'm here in a file called Condo and
| | 00:23 |
it's available with the exercise files.
If you watched the previous movie we
| | 00:28 |
talked there about the ribbons and the QAT
and as you can see my screen has a similar
| | 00:32 |
set of ribbon tabs across the top.
The ribbon tab I want to focus on in this
| | 00:37 |
movie is the Modify tab.
So I'm going to move up here and I'm
| | 00:40 |
going to click on it...
And I want you to take a quick look at
| | 00:43 |
which panels are available here on the
modify tab to start off with.
| | 00:48 |
You can see on the far left we've got our
properties and our clip board and all the
| | 00:51 |
way over to the right we have measure and
create and so on.
| | 00:55 |
A context ribbon tacks itself onto the end
of the modify ribbon tab.
| | 01:01 |
So if I select an object on screen like
maybe this roof object right here You will
| | 01:05 |
see that the word modify changes to
include the word roofs at the end.
| | 01:11 |
It tints in this greenish color the entire
ribbon tab gets this sort of greenish tint
| | 01:15 |
to it, and there's a new panel that
appears here, in this case containing only
| | 01:19 |
a single button, Edit Footprint in this
particular case...
| | 01:26 |
Now if I select something else like this
object you can see that that is a model
| | 01:30 |
group and so now I get modify and then
model groups and then I get a Group panel
| | 01:34 |
and it has several buttons and commands
available.
| | 01:40 |
If I select a railing you'll see a similar
behavior.
| | 01:45 |
If I select this ground plane here, this
is called topography, we'll get a similar
| | 01:49 |
set of commands and so on.
A windows, doors, each one will give us
| | 01:54 |
different context buttons, but you'll
notice that the entire left hand portion
| | 01:58 |
of the ribbon tab remains the same, so we
still have properties and clipboard and
| | 02:02 |
measure and so on.
it's just the stuff at the right, the changes.
| | 02:08 |
That's what we mean by a Context Ribbon
tab.
| | 02:11 |
Now I'm showing you here in the case where
you select an existing object.
| | 02:15 |
There's another place where context ribbon
taps will appear, and that's when you
| | 02:19 |
create objects.
So I'm going to go to the architecture tab
| | 02:23 |
And I'm going to click on the wall tool,
and notice that that actually takes me
| | 02:27 |
over to the modify tab and now instead of
saying modify wall, it says modify place wall.
| | 02:34 |
And, all the rest of it still behaves the
same way that I showed you a moment ago.
| | 02:39 |
The left hand side of the ribbon tab Is
still the same but all the tools on the
| | 02:43 |
right hand side now are tools that we can
use to help us draw new walls, if I cancel
| | 02:48 |
that command may be choose a draw command
the same sort of thing occurs I now get a
| | 02:52 |
modify place door, so these are also
considered context ribbon tabs Now, the
| | 02:56 |
other item that's context sensitive that
you want to be paying equal attention to
| | 03:01 |
is the options bar.
So, right below the ribbon we have the
| | 03:09 |
options bar, and you can see right now
that it's completely empty, okay, it's
| | 03:12 |
just a big blank grey space.
If I run a command, like the wall command,
| | 03:17 |
you're going to see that options bar will
populate with several options we can
| | 03:21 |
choose from.
Int this case we could change the level of
| | 03:25 |
the wall, or the height of the wall, or
the location line.
| | 03:28 |
I'm going to cancel that command.
Choose a door command.
| | 03:31 |
And you'll see that the options bar in
this case just says modify place door, but
| | 03:35 |
there's no specific options.
So, you don't always get options that
| | 03:39 |
occur there but you want to be looking
just the same.
| | 03:43 |
If I choose a component command you'll see
rotate after placement and the level option.
| | 03:50 |
So, it really does depend on the command
not only if you will see any options occur
| | 03:54 |
there but what those specific options will
be.
| | 03:58 |
Now, in some cases when you select an
object you'll also get commands that
| | 04:02 |
appear on the options bar.
Now often it will just be the single
| | 04:06 |
button activate dimensions which we'll
look at in a future movie, but in some
| | 04:09 |
cases you'll actually see more detailed
option there as well.
| | 04:14 |
So the point is that there are several
places on the Revit screen and in the
| | 04:17 |
inter-phase that you want to be paying
attention to as you work because that's
| | 04:21 |
the feedback mechanism that Revit's using
to let you know what's going on at any
| | 04:24 |
given time So when you execute a command
or when you select an object and you
| | 04:28 |
want to know what to do next.
Then some of the most important places to
| | 04:34 |
be looking are the context ribbons or the
options bar.
| | 04:38 |
Because those are two very common places
where you'll get that kind of feedback.
| | 04:42 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Properties palette| 00:00 |
In this movie, we'll look at the
Properties pallet.
| | 00:02 |
Properties are always available for any
element you create or select in a rev it project.
| | 00:08 |
Properties are very context sensitive.
So depending on what you're doing you're
| | 00:10 |
going to see very different things on the
Properties pallet.
| | 00:13 |
So I'd like to look at a few different
scenarios with you here.
| | 00:16 |
In a file called Condo Unit, and it's
included with the exercise files but you
| | 00:18 |
can follow along in any Revit project.
There are two contexts under which you'll
| | 00:22 |
see the properties palette, one is when
you're creating objects, and another is
| | 00:25 |
when you select something that already
exists.
| | 00:29 |
So, for example if I came up here top the
Architecture tab and click on the Wall
| | 00:32 |
tool, what you'll see is, in addition to
all the context sensitive stuff that we
| | 00:35 |
covered in the previous movie about the
ribbon Tab and the Options bar.
| | 00:40 |
If we look over here on the Properties
palette, you will see various properties
| | 00:44 |
that are specific to the wall that I'm
about to create.
| | 00:48 |
So, at the very top, we have the Type
Selector and you could see that this
| | 00:51 |
particular one is defaulting to a generic
8 inch wall.
| | 00:55 |
But if I open that up, it's a rather long
list and I could choose from many
| | 00:58 |
different kinds of walls that I could
draw.
| | 01:01 |
Beneath that, I've got location line and
what level I want to draw it on and the
| | 01:05 |
height and so fourth.
And if I started to draw, it would just
| | 01:08 |
simply draw objects using those settings.
Now, notice that while I'm in the midst of
| | 01:13 |
drawing, all of the settings are grayed
out.
| | 01:16 |
So, if I wanted to change the settings, I
can do that but I have to press Esc first
| | 01:20 |
to get back to kind of get out of the
current drawing mode and get back to the property.
| | 01:26 |
So I'm still in the command.
I could made changes.
| | 01:29 |
For example, I could choose a different
kind of wall.
| | 01:32 |
And then pick up where I left off, and
you'll see that the new wall is a little
| | 01:35 |
bit thinner then the other wall.
So you can certainly interact with the
| | 01:38 |
properties as you're drawing.
And we are going to get into a lot more of
| | 01:42 |
the specifics of drawing walls in a later
movie.
| | 01:45 |
So don't worry to much about those
specifics at this time.
| | 01:48 |
I want to focus mainly on the interaction
with the Properties pallet at this time.
| | 01:51 |
So I'm going to cancel twice now, Esc
twice to get out of that command and I'm
| | 01:55 |
actually going to focus my attention now
on some of the objects that are all ready
| | 01:59 |
here in the model.
For example, here at the exterior wall, if
| | 02:04 |
I click on that, with it selected in
addition to our Modify tab we saw before,
| | 02:07 |
if we look at our Properties pallet.
Now, you can see much of the same stuff
| | 02:12 |
that we just saw when we were creating a
new wall here at the Type Selector we've
| | 02:16 |
got the same choices.
And I could open this list up and I could
| | 02:21 |
actually even choose a completely
different type of wall if I wanted to.
| | 02:25 |
Like an exterior insulation finish system
wall.
| | 02:27 |
The wall did get slightly thinner.
I don't know if you noticed that or not.
| | 02:31 |
And if we were to look at it in another
view.
| | 02:33 |
We would actually see that the finished
material has actually changed.
| | 02:36 |
We can change the location line of the
wall, or heights, or constraints of the wall.
| | 02:41 |
Any of those settings we can change
directly on the Properties panel.
| | 02:44 |
But lets do one that's a little bit more
evident.
| | 02:47 |
For example, I'm going to scroll down here
and I'm going to double-click on the south
| | 02:52 |
elevation to open that view up.
And zoom in just a touch, and I'm going to
| | 02:57 |
select this window right here.
Now, if we look at the Properties pallet,
| | 03:00 |
it tells me that this is a double casement
window, and it's on Level 1 with a sill
| | 03:04 |
height of 3 feet.
Now, if I click right there, I can
| | 03:08 |
actually change that height directly here
in the Properties pallet, so this is just
| | 03:12 |
another example of making that kind of a
modification.
| | 03:15 |
So if I put in 2 here, and I press Enter.
It doesn't appear like anything is
| | 03:20 |
actually taking place.
Well, you have to actually apply the change.
| | 03:24 |
Revit allows you to multiple changes on
the properties palette and then apply them
| | 03:28 |
all in one step.
So you can do that in one of two ways.
| | 03:32 |
You can use this Apply button down here
and click it and you'll see that will
| | 03:35 |
actually apply the change and move the
window.
| | 03:39 |
Or suppose I wanted to change my mind and
go back to 3 feet, I can simply move my
| | 03:44 |
mouse away from the palette.
An programmers like to call this, Shifting Focus.
| | 03:49 |
So if we shift our focus away from the
Properties palette, that will
| | 03:52 |
automatically apply the change.
Okay, so those are the two ways that we
| | 03:56 |
can, apply one or more changes.
The next part of the palette I want to
| | 04:00 |
point out to you is this little, small
drop-down right here.
| | 04:03 |
Currently, it says Windows with a quantity
of one.
| | 04:07 |
So Windows is the category of the object
that we have selected, Windows in this
| | 04:12 |
case, and I have one item selected.
Now, we're going to talk about selection
| | 04:17 |
in an upcoming movie, but for right now
I'll just show you that if you use your
| | 04:20 |
Ctrl key.
And I'm going to come over here and use
| | 04:23 |
the Ctrl key and select this second
window, this bay window here.
| | 04:28 |
You can select an additional object, more
than one object at a time, and what we'll
| | 04:31 |
see here is it still says Windows because
both of those items share the same category.
| | 04:37 |
But, now it says Quantity 2.
I have two windows selected.
| | 04:41 |
Now, up here on the Type Selector, we see
something a little different.
| | 04:45 |
It says multiple families selected.
And that's because, at the moment, the two
| | 04:50 |
objects I have selected are two different
families.
| | 04:53 |
Now, we talked about the differences
between category family and type in a
| | 04:56 |
previous movie.
So if you'd like to you can go back and
| | 04:59 |
review that now.
But we've got two separate families
| | 05:02 |
selected here, and you want to be a little
careful about this because if I changed it
| | 05:06 |
like to something dramatically different,
16 by 24 fixed window.
| | 05:12 |
You will see that that has a pretty
dramatic impact on both of those windows.
| | 05:16 |
May or may not be the most architecturally
exciting change to make, so perhaps I
| | 05:19 |
might want to undo that.
I'm going to use my Undo icon right here
| | 05:23 |
or you can press Ctrl + Z on your
keyboard.
| | 05:26 |
Now, I'm going to return to the Level 1
floor plan.
| | 05:30 |
And look at a few other examples of that
concept that I just talked about.
| | 05:35 |
So, again, here's a plumbing fixture
family.
| | 05:38 |
I select it, it says plumbing fixtures
here, and plumbing fixtures here, and the
| | 05:42 |
quantity is 1.
I can hold down my Ctrl key, select the
| | 05:46 |
second one and again I get multiple
families because clearly a toilet and a
| | 05:50 |
bathtub are different from one another so
they are two different families even
| | 05:53 |
though they share the same plumbing
fixture category.
| | 05:58 |
Now, what would happen if you added a
third or fourth item to the selection that
| | 06:02 |
was of a different category all together?
Well now, it's going to say multiple
| | 06:08 |
categories are selected here and this
changes to just say common.
| | 06:12 |
Now, what's interesting about this is
you'll notice that this is a drop down
| | 06:16 |
menu, so you can actually open that up,
and in addition to common with a quantity
| | 06:20 |
of 3.
You'll see that that selection actually
| | 06:24 |
contains two plumbing fixtures, and one
wall.
| | 06:28 |
Now, it also says floor plan Level 1 down
there.
| | 06:31 |
So you will always have the current view
listed at the bottom of that list because
| | 06:37 |
the view itself, the floor plan in this
case, also has properties.
| | 06:44 |
So by choosing an item here off the list I
could edit the Walls properties and change
| | 06:49 |
the kind of wall.
Make that a generic wall.
| | 06:53 |
I could choose the Plumbing Fixture
properties.
| | 06:56 |
Change something about those or I could go
to the Floor Plans properties and change
| | 07:00 |
something about the floor plan itself.
Maybe I want to change the scale of the
| | 07:05 |
floor plan or the level of detail that it
displays.
| | 07:09 |
So the properties is a multifaceted inner
faced item that have many many setting we
| | 07:13 |
can interact with.
And the key to using it successfully is to
| | 07:17 |
pay close attention to these subtle little
nuances in its behavior.
| | 07:22 |
So, in some case when you make a multiple
selection, like, perhaps I select this
| | 07:25 |
interior wall, and then maybe this wall
that we drew a few moments ago.
| | 07:30 |
What you'll see is, that up here it still
says we've got basic walls, there's more
| | 07:34 |
than one type selected.
In addition, some of these properties over
| | 07:39 |
here look a little bizarre, like
particularly the top constraint here.
| | 07:44 |
It actually has blunt out implying that
there is no setting.
| | 07:48 |
What's really important here is, I wanted
to understand is that, that actually
| | 07:51 |
doesn't mean necessarily that there is no
setting.
| | 07:54 |
What it actually means is that there is
more than one setting.
| | 07:58 |
So, if you are not careful here, if you
went in here and made some change, like
| | 08:02 |
suppose I said, up to Level 3.
The impact of that change might actually
| | 08:07 |
be somewhat dramatic if we switch to
another view because now, I have just
| | 08:12 |
changed the height of both of those walls,
may or may not be what I had intended.
| | 08:19 |
So you need to pay close attention to not
only what you have selected, but the
| | 08:23 |
subtle little clues that the Properties
palette is giving you there in order to be
| | 08:27 |
successful in your edits.
| | 08:30 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Stacking properties and project palettes| 00:00 |
If you spend a lot of time working in
Revit, then you will no doubt discover
| | 00:03 |
that screen real estate often becomes a
premium.
| | 00:06 |
So, there's a few different ways you can
manage your interface, to adjust it to
| | 00:10 |
your liking.
One of the things that we can do is to
| | 00:13 |
adjust the way these pallets are organized
over here on the left hand side.
| | 00:18 |
Now by default, you get the properties
palette stacked on top of the project
| | 00:21 |
browser but they don't have to stay that
way.
| | 00:24 |
If you grab either of these title bars,
the project browser or the properties, and
| | 00:28 |
begin to drag it, you can peel one of
these pallets right off and make it a
| | 00:31 |
floating pallet.
So, you can see right here that I've got
| | 00:36 |
the project browser now floating onscreen.
So, if I go to the edge of it, I can drag
| | 00:40 |
and re-size it.
And I can move these things around
| | 00:44 |
wherever I want it to go.
So, if you had a second screen attached to
| | 00:47 |
your computer, you could actually peel
these off and put them over on the second screen.
| | 00:52 |
Now, another popular way to do this is, a
lot of folks like to actually dock each
| | 00:56 |
one of these pallets one on each side.
So, if you just move it to the edge of the
| | 01:01 |
screen, you'll see an indication that it's
about to dock.
| | 01:05 |
You just let go of the mouse at that
point, and now I have properties on one
| | 01:08 |
side, project browser on the other.
But of course we talked about screen real
| | 01:12 |
estate, and this does reduce the size of
my viewing windows.
| | 01:16 |
So, another option is to peel it off
again, and we can take this one and drag
| | 01:20 |
it right on top of the properties palette.
Now, watch the little grey box that
| | 01:26 |
appears around it.
If I were to let go right here, it would
| | 01:30 |
actually stack them again like it started
off.
| | 01:33 |
But if I move slightly, you'll see that it
will adjust to different configurations.
| | 01:39 |
Like for example, I could make them go
side by side like that or I could pull it
| | 01:43 |
off again and put it on top of this one.
You could put it right on top of the other
| | 01:50 |
one and sometimes it takes a few tries but
what you're looking for is to get the
| | 01:53 |
little outline of a tab down there at the
bottom.
| | 01:58 |
And when I let go, it will stack these two
palettes on top of one another and they
| | 02:01 |
will now appear as little tabs at the
bottom of the palette.
| | 02:06 |
So, when I want the project browser, I
click its tab and when I want the
| | 02:09 |
properties I click its tab and of course
you can drag the size of this if you want
| | 02:13 |
to re-size it to make it either a little
bit larger or smaller.
| | 02:18 |
And this gives you kind of the best of
both worlds, you've got the full screen
| | 02:22 |
height of the palette.
But you're not taking up double the screen
| | 02:26 |
real estate by having them on either side
of the screen.
| | 02:29 |
So, these are all different options that
you have available to you, to customize
| | 02:32 |
the interface to your liking.
For the remainder of this course, I'm just
| | 02:36 |
going to peel this one back off again and
put it back in its default position right
| | 02:39 |
here, to keep them stacked.
But feel free to adjust your screen in one
| | 02:44 |
of the ways I've just shown you to suit
your own personal preferences.
| | 02:48 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Project Browser| 00:01 |
Your Revit Project is a complete virtual
building model that can be viewed, edited
| | 00:04 |
and explored three dimensionally, two
dimensionally in a various reports in
| | 00:08 |
tabular list.
Each set representation of your project is
| | 00:12 |
referred to in Revit as a View.
Views are listed and accessed in the
| | 00:16 |
project browser.
This functions like a table of contents
| | 00:19 |
for your project, and much the same way as
a table of contents of your book tells you
| | 00:22 |
what the book contains.
The project browser will tell you what
| | 00:27 |
views are contained in your project and
you'll use it to navigate to those various views.
| | 00:32 |
So I'm in a file here called condo, if
you'd like to follow along, and we want to
| | 00:36 |
look over here at the project browser...
The project browser palette is typically
| | 00:41 |
located over on the left-hand corner of
the screen.
| | 00:43 |
Now it can be moved or relocated.
It can even be closed, but I certainly
| | 00:47 |
don't recommend doing that.
Let's start by what could happen if the
| | 00:50 |
Project browser or in fact the Properties
palette that we talked about in the
| | 00:54 |
previous movie, what happens if one of
those accidentally gets closed?
| | 00:59 |
So I'm going to select right here and i am
going to click the Close button, and you
| | 01:03 |
know let's say that was accidental.
So, how do i get it back?
| | 01:07 |
Well if you go to the view tab on the
ribbon and you look way over here on the
| | 01:11 |
right hand side there is a item called
user interface.
| | 01:15 |
Open that up, in all of the parts and
pieces of the user interface that are
| | 01:18 |
optional, if you will, have the check
boxes here.
| | 01:22 |
Here is the project browser And I can just
simply check that box to restore it to its
| | 01:26 |
original location.
So if it ever goes missing on you that's
| | 01:29 |
how you can find it and get it back again.
The first item in the Project browser is
| | 01:34 |
at the very top it says, Views and then in
parentheses it says All.
| | 01:39 |
That's just simply saying that we're now
seeing all of the views that are contained
| | 01:42 |
in this project.
And, the default all grouping is dividded
| | 01:46 |
into typical drawing types, so your
going to see a floorplans category.
| | 01:52 |
You're going to see a Ceiling Plans
category, 3D Views, Elevations, Sections,
| | 01:56 |
and so on.
Now beneath that, you've also got other
| | 01:59 |
major groupings like Legends and Schedules
and Sheets.
| | 02:03 |
We'll talk about some of those in future
movies, okay?
| | 02:05 |
We'll look at some of them here.
So, I'm looking at a 3D view right now.
| | 02:09 |
Perhaps I'd like to see a floor plan of
this project, and maybe I'm interested in
| | 02:13 |
the second floor plan.
So, you can see here beneath Floor Plans
| | 02:17 |
that each of the levels is listed here.
Each of its floor plan views and there's
| | 02:21 |
Level Two.
I'll just simply double-click on that and
| | 02:24 |
that will open up that floor plan on
screen.
| | 02:26 |
It's a pretty typical-looking floor plan.
And what you'll see is, in addition to the
| | 02:31 |
view opening here, the project browser
will show me Level 2 is now in bold.
| | 02:37 |
And, that is how we can tell that, that is
currently the active view.
| | 02:40 |
Now if you don't have anything selected,
you may recall in the previous movie, that
| | 02:44 |
it will also show you on the properties
palette, that I'm looking at floor plan
| | 02:47 |
Level 2.
So that's another confirmation that I'm in
| | 02:51 |
that view.
Now if I want to try some other views, I
| | 02:54 |
could open up maybe a Ceiling plan, or I
could take a look at one of the
| | 02:58 |
elevations, South Elevation in this case,
or even one of the Section Views.
| | 03:04 |
And each time I open up one of these views
again it'll be confirmed for me in bold
| | 03:08 |
there on the Project browser.
Now there's other ways that you can access
| | 03:14 |
views as well.
Notice that this section indicator occurs
| | 03:17 |
right here, and if I hover over it, it
says that that's view section, section 2.
| | 03:23 |
Now if I look here on the project browser,
we're currently in section 1 but there's
| | 03:26 |
this second view here called section 2.
So this section head right here actually
| | 03:32 |
point to the section to View.
Now there is a few ways I could get to
| | 03:37 |
that directly from this symbol.
I could either right click on it and
| | 03:41 |
choose go to view or notice the colour,
here is a dark blue colour.
| | 03:47 |
The dark blue colour usually indicates for
you that the view is interactive or that
| | 03:51 |
that item on screen is interactive in some
way and if I just simply double click it's
| | 03:54 |
kind of like a hyperlink in a webpage And
it will open up that view.
| | 04:00 |
And notice over here now section 2 is bold
and active.
| | 04:04 |
Now you may notice that that blue color
occurs here on the section head and also
| | 04:07 |
on these level heads over here.
We zoom in slightly, that's level 3, level 2.
| | 04:13 |
So if I double click that, it will return
me back to my level 2 floor plan.
| | 04:21 |
There's a few different ways you can
switch from one view to the other.
| | 04:24 |
But the project browser is always perhaps
one of your more convenient ways to do that.
| | 04:29 |
We can right click any node on the project
browser and we can perform a search.
| | 04:35 |
This particular project only has a handful
of views so there's probably not too much
| | 04:38 |
trouble in finding the view that I'm
looking for, but if you're working for a
| | 04:41 |
large firm that does large projects in
Revit...
| | 04:45 |
You might find yourself in a project that
has dozens if not hundreds of views, so
| | 04:48 |
this search functionality is going to be
really helpful and I could start putting
| | 04:52 |
in a name here like section and click next
and it will go to the section's category
| | 04:56 |
and then it will go to section one and
then section two...
| | 05:02 |
That will help me find the partiuclar view
that I'm looking for.
| | 05:05 |
OK so that's a nice new feature that's
been added here in the current release.
| | 05:09 |
So our project browser gives us access to
all the various views that are in our project.
| | 05:14 |
Its really helpful if you just think of it
as the table of contents of your project.
| | 05:18 |
Use the table of contents to find the item
you're looking for and then you go to that location.
| | 05:22 |
You can do the same thing with the
browser, find the view that you want to
| | 05:24 |
work on, double click it, and open it up
to perform whatever action you need to
| | 05:27 |
perform
| | 05:28 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Navigating views (Zoom, Pan, and Rotate)| 00:01 |
Learning how to navigate in the various
views in a Revit project is an important skill.
| | 00:05 |
So, in this movie I'd like to show you how
to do some basic actions like zoom and pan
| | 00:08 |
and how to orbit a 3D view.
So, I'm in a file here called Condo and
| | 00:12 |
we're going to use this just as a backdrop
to do some view navigation.
| | 00:16 |
You can really open up any file you like.
Now the easiest way to navigate a view is
| | 00:19 |
to use the wheel on your mouse.
So if you don't have a wheel mouse, you
| | 00:23 |
definitely want to invest in one.
If you roll the wheel, it will zoom out if
| | 00:28 |
you roll down, and if I roll up it will
zoom in.
| | 00:33 |
Now you'll notice that the zooming is
taking place pretty much where my mouse is.
| | 00:37 |
So if I move my mouse Say, over here on
top of the building and repeat that you'll
| | 00:41 |
see that the zooming is more centered on
that location.
| | 00:46 |
Move it over here in the parking lot -
same thing.
| | 00:49 |
So you can control not only the level of
zoom, but where the zoom is focused on
| | 00:52 |
simply by way you move the Mouse and roll
the Wheel.
| | 00:56 |
Now if you hold in the wheel and drag Then
we're panning the screen.
| | 01:01 |
So this doesn't change the navigation.
It just sort of shuffles things around.
| | 01:04 |
So let's say you did zoom in over here,
but you realized you're a little off screen.
| | 01:07 |
You can just recenter easy enough by
dragging with the wheel.
| | 01:11 |
Now I'm in a 3D view right now.
So there's one more trick we can do with
| | 01:15 |
the wheel here in a 3D view.
If you hold down the shift key.
| | 01:19 |
And then drag with the wheel.
You'll see the cursor changes shape to
| | 01:23 |
this little spinney wheel, and now I'm
orbiting my model, and this works in 3D
| | 01:27 |
views only.
So I can spin around and get a better look
| | 01:31 |
here of what I'm seeing.
Now if I come over here to my project
| | 01:35 |
browser, and we talked about project
browser in a previous movie.
| | 01:39 |
And I double click the level one floor
plan view.
| | 01:42 |
This is a 2D view.
This is showing me just a planned version.
| | 01:45 |
The same wheel tricks work.
At least the first two.
| | 01:48 |
We can roll the wheel to zoom in.
We can drag the wheel to pan around.
| | 01:54 |
You can't do the orbit trick.
That will just pan.
| | 01:57 |
So even if I'm holding down my shift key
that doesn't spin this into 3D view.
| | 02:02 |
Because this is a 2 dimensional view, in
Revid its either a 2D view or its a 3D view.
| | 02:07 |
Now there are other ways we can zoom.
If you look over here on the right hand
| | 02:11 |
side of the screen, there's this little
ghosted out bar, if I move my mouse away
| | 02:14 |
its sort of ghosted out and when I get
closer it becomes brighter.
| | 02:20 |
This is the navigation bar.
And the lower portion of that navigation
| | 02:24 |
bar has a small little zoom pop-up menu.
And you can see there are several ways to
| | 02:29 |
zoom here.
And I think most of these are fairly self
| | 02:31 |
explanatory, but let's just walk through a
few of them just the same.
| | 02:35 |
The very first one is called Zoom-In
Region.
| | 02:37 |
So here's the way that works.
When I select that command I get a little
| | 02:40 |
magnifying glass cursor.
And you just simply click two opposite
| | 02:45 |
points on scree, And it will zoom in to
that rectangle.
| | 02:51 |
If I click the little drop down again and
I want to return back to where I
| | 02:54 |
previously was, I can use this one right
here, Previous Zoom In Pan.
| | 02:59 |
Now, notice how I was able to choose the
item of the drop-down and it went
| | 03:03 |
immediately to that command, but, if the
command is already on the top of the pile,
| | 03:08 |
then I just click the mouse and it takes
me there, so notice zoom-in region is
| | 03:12 |
still here.
And it stays on the top of the pile.
| | 03:18 |
Well, let's say that I wanted to do a
different one, like zoom out two times.
| | 03:23 |
That's pretty self explanatory, it just
halves the magnification on screen.
| | 03:28 |
Notice how that command just took the top
of the pile, so if I wanted to use that
| | 03:32 |
again, I would just click it again, but if
I wanted a different one, I would open up
| | 03:35 |
the list and choose it, like this one
right here, zoom to fit.
| | 03:41 |
That would just fit the screen to the
entire drawing.
| | 03:45 |
So let's look at one more here.
We've got one here called, zoom to sheet size.
| | 03:49 |
The command is called zoom to sheet size,
but I think you could actually think of it
| | 03:52 |
as zoom to scale, an it probably will make
a little bit more sense.
| | 03:56 |
If we look at the bottom left-hand corner
of the drawing window, you can see that
| | 04:00 |
this particular drawing is currently set
to one quarter inch equals a foot.
| | 04:05 |
Now, if you go to zoom to sheet size and
you look at your own screen and sort of
| | 04:09 |
mentally measure this door here, you
probably have a pretty good idea how big a
| | 04:12 |
door should be at quarter inch equals a
foot, and it's probably pretty close on
| | 04:16 |
your screen.
Now, it's not super accurate, I wouldn't
| | 04:21 |
recommend getting out a scale ruler and
measuring your screen because computer
| | 04:25 |
screens don't do a really accurate job
like printed paper output would.
| | 04:30 |
but its close.
And the intention is to give you an idea
| | 04:33 |
of what this thing will look like when it
prints out.
| | 04:37 |
So that's why they call it zoom to sheet
size.
| | 04:38 |
Notice I can very clearly see the two
lines in the door panel.
| | 04:43 |
And over here I can see the two lines in
the back of the chair.
| | 04:46 |
So I have an appropriate level of detail
here.
| | 04:49 |
If I open up this pop up And change the
scale to something smaller.
| | 04:53 |
Let's say I went to 16nth of an inch
equals a foot.
| | 04:56 |
Now, of course, the most obvious thing I
see is all the text gets super large.
| | 05:01 |
Now we'll talk about that in a future
movie, but what I want to do is come over
| | 05:03 |
here and click Zoom to Sheet Size again.
And you'll see that it doesn't change the
| | 05:08 |
zoom on screen very much at all.
Because the scale now is so much smaller.
| | 05:13 |
Again look at the door.
The size of that door is about right for a
| | 05:17 |
sixteenth inch scale but notice that I
can't resolve the two parallel lines anymore.
| | 05:22 |
Everythings kind of muddy and bleeding
together.
| | 05:25 |
So the purpose of zoom to sheet size is,
its a great tool for you to tell whether
| | 05:29 |
or not your view is Set to the correct
scale or not, or, not necessarily the
| | 05:32 |
correct scale, but an appropriate scale,
so, I'm going to set this view back to
| | 05:35 |
quarter inch, which is certainly more
appropriate for this drawing.
| | 05:42 |
Those are some of our common zoom
commands, so, you can either use your
| | 05:45 |
wheel, which I think is certainly the
easiest and most immediate way to zoom in
| | 05:48 |
and out and change the view of your
screen.
| | 05:52 |
Or you can use the controls in the
navigation bar as an alternative to your
| | 05:55 |
Wheel Mouse.
| | 05:56 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Selection and modifying basics| 00:00 |
Selecting elements is a basic skill
required to be successful in Revit.
| | 00:04 |
Most modifications you perform in Rabbit
rely on a selection of elements in the
| | 00:07 |
model, and a basic understanding of how to
manipulate those elements in the Rabbit environment.
| | 00:12 |
In this movie, we'll take a high level
look at some of these critical skills.
| | 00:15 |
So I'm in a file here called condo unit
Now if you look at the status bar at the
| | 00:19 |
very bottom of my screen with nothing
selected you've already got some clues as
| | 00:23 |
to how we can make selections in Revit.
The message currently says click to
| | 00:30 |
select, tab for alternates, Ctrl Adds, and
Shift U nselects.
| | 00:34 |
So I'd like to start with those methods
right there because those are really the
| | 00:37 |
most basic ways we can make selections.
Click the select its pretty obvious, you
| | 00:43 |
just simply put your mouse on an object
and click on it and you have the selection.
| | 00:48 |
You'll get some nice feedback on screen
the object will typically highlight in
| | 00:52 |
this bluish color.
Now you can modify it these colors if you
| | 00:56 |
like and we'll talking about some of the
rivet options in the future movies so
| | 01:00 |
that's certainly one of the options you
can do.
| | 01:04 |
But the default selection color in Revit
architecture is this bluish color, as I
| | 01:08 |
select other objects what you will see is
the first object will be deselected.
| | 01:14 |
So by default in Revit each time you click
it creates a new selection or selection set.
| | 01:19 |
You select an object and if you don't use
any of the modifier keys that are
| | 01:23 |
indicated down there on the status bar any
previous selection will be deselected.
| | 01:29 |
Following that if you click in empty space
that will deselect completely anything
| | 01:33 |
that you currently have selected.
The easiest way to deselect everything is
| | 01:38 |
to just simply click in a blank area of
the screen.
| | 01:42 |
Now, if you want to select more than one
object, then the easiest way to do that is
| | 01:46 |
to click the first, hold down the Ctrl key
on your keyboard, you'll see a small
| | 01:50 |
little plus sign appear next to the
cursor, and then you click the second object.
| | 01:58 |
Now we've talked briefly about this in
some of the previous movies.
| | 02:01 |
If I select another, similar object, the
feedback that I get here, in the various
| | 02:05 |
locations, will indicate for me, what I
have selected.
| | 02:09 |
So in this case I've selected two walls,
of the same type and family, and so
| | 02:12 |
there's a lot of, similar modification
that I could start to do to all of those.
| | 02:18 |
As I add additional objects however, i
would get a multi select and I would get
| | 02:22 |
fewer options available on the properties
palette and on the ribbon.
| | 02:27 |
Depending on what kind of modification
you're planning to make you want to be
| | 02:30 |
careful about the kinds of selection you
make.
| | 02:34 |
Now, let's say that I made that selection,
but I accidentally selected the toilet, I
| | 02:37 |
didn't really want that.
We can use a different modifier key, the
| | 02:41 |
Shift key.
Notice that I get a minus sign next to my
| | 02:45 |
cursor and I can click it again to
deselect using the Shift key.
| | 02:50 |
You'd want to do it that way, as opposed
to clicking out in empty space because, as
| | 02:54 |
we've already said, if you click an empty
space, that deselects everything and you'd
| | 02:57 |
have to start over again.
And it's a little bit quicker to just
| | 03:03 |
remove one object from a selection then it
is to start all over again.
| | 03:08 |
Certainly straight forward but not
necessarily the fasts way to do things.
| | 03:13 |
What about tab for alternates?
Now this is a very powerful and unique
| | 03:17 |
Revit feature that we have, so let's take
a look at that.
| | 03:19 |
I'm going to put my mouse in this general
tea right here next to this door.
| | 03:24 |
Now notice the door highlights, and as
we've talked about in some of the previous
| | 03:27 |
movies I get a tool tip giving me some
information about that door.
| | 03:32 |
That's how you verify what kind of object
you're about to select.
| | 03:35 |
Now this is called pre highlighting right
here.
| | 03:37 |
I haven't clicked yet.
If I move my mouse away...
| | 03:40 |
That pre highlighting goes away until you
actually click its not selected.
| | 03:46 |
If I put my mouse right there and this
time I'm going to press and release Tab.
| | 03:51 |
Don't hold it down.
You press the Tab key and release you're
| | 03:54 |
going to see it jump the selection over to
the nearby wall.
| | 03:59 |
Now the reason you don't want to hold the
tab down is you'll get something like
| | 04:01 |
this, it kind of looks like a (UNKNOWN)
light.
| | 04:04 |
So you want to put your mouse over an
object prehighlight it press Tab and then
| | 04:07 |
watch what happens if I tab a second time.
This is called Chain Selection, and if you
| | 04:13 |
look at the status line your going to see
Chain of Walls aligns.
| | 04:17 |
Now this is a very powerful way to select
objects.
| | 04:20 |
If I click the mouse here.
Its going to select both of those walls.
| | 04:24 |
Now a lot of people make this mistake.
They will put the mouse here, press Tab,
| | 04:29 |
press Tab again.
Say yep that's what I want and then move
| | 04:33 |
the mouse.
So you're not done yet until you click.
| | 04:37 |
So it goes highlight, tab, tab, click.
Until you click, you haven't made a selection.
| | 04:44 |
Now there was just two walls.
What if I have lots of walls?
| | 04:48 |
Well, the tab can be really powerful if
you're out here somewhere.
| | 04:52 |
Suppose I highlight this wall right here
and press Tab.
| | 04:56 |
Now look at the chain that I'm getting.
This goes all the way around the entire
| | 04:59 |
perimeter of the entire model and if I
click the mouse, I've selected all of
| | 05:03 |
those objects.
Now notice right here there's a break
| | 05:07 |
between this wall and this wall, so I'm
going to deselect one more time, put my
| | 05:10 |
mouse right here, tab, but before I click
watch what happens if I move my mouse slightly.
| | 05:18 |
So if I'm more to the inside it shifts to
the inside chain and there's the outside chain...
| | 05:25 |
Now this only works if you happen to have
a situation where you have two different
| | 05:28 |
chains that are possible, and then I click
to make the selection.
| | 05:33 |
With a little bit of practice, you can use
that chain selection and really do some
| | 05:37 |
very quick and powerful selections that
otherwise would take an awful lot of effort.
| | 05:43 |
If you look over here on my Properties
styles, I have ten walls selected.
| | 05:47 |
To do that with a Ctrl Key would be ten
clicks and if you missed and click an
| | 05:50 |
empty space of the ninth one, it deselects
everything and then you're just frustrated.
| | 05:56 |
There's a couple other selection methods
that also will speed things up.
| | 06:00 |
We have window and crossing selections,
our so called box selections.
| | 06:05 |
Now the way these work, you make a box
onscreen, a selection box, and everything
| | 06:09 |
within the box will get select and it
works one of two ways.
| | 06:13 |
If you click, hold down and drag...
If you go from left to right, you get a
| | 06:19 |
window selection.
If you go from right to left, you get a
| | 06:23 |
crossing selection, see the difference.
From left to right it's a solid edge, from
| | 06:27 |
right to left it's a dashed edge.
Dashed edge only has to touch objects,
| | 06:32 |
solid edge has to completely surround
them, so let me show you.
| | 06:37 |
I'm going to click inside this bedroom,
start to drag.
| | 06:40 |
Notice that nothing is highlighting until
I completely surround it.
| | 06:45 |
You see those two doors?
And if I keep going and make a bigger box,
| | 06:49 |
I'll eventually start capturing more and
more stuff.
| | 06:52 |
But notice that it's not capturing either
of the walls that make up the boundary of
| | 06:57 |
the bathroom.
I'm not getting the vertical wall on the right.
| | 07:01 |
I'm not getting the horizontal wall at the
bottom.
| | 07:04 |
All I'm getting is the stuff that was
completely in the box.
| | 07:07 |
Now, I'm going to deselect and I'm
going to drag this way instead.
| | 07:10 |
Watch the difference.
Now you see how it highlights those walls?
| | 07:14 |
And I only need to touch these objects
with my selection window, and now I'm
| | 07:18 |
getting the same stuff in addition to
these two walls here.
| | 07:23 |
You can use all of these methods together.
So, I have a selection, now I can hold
| | 07:28 |
down the Ctrl key and make additional
selections using any of these methods,
| | 07:32 |
hold down the shift key and remove
objects, and it all works together.
| | 07:39 |
So, it's not one or the other.
I could do a highlight, tab control click
| | 07:43 |
and add that to the selection ,highlight
tab shift click and remove that from the selection.
| | 07:52 |
As a final selection method perhaps our
most powerful one of all, we can start of
| | 07:57 |
by selecting too much stuff, and then look
up here on the ribbon for this Filter button.
| | 08:06 |
The Filter button allows us to look at the
categories that are included in the
| | 08:10 |
selection we've just made.
It will give us a quantity for each of
| | 08:15 |
those categories and we can un-check the
objects that we're not interested in.
| | 08:20 |
So, let's say that I was not interested in
any plumbing or mechanical equipment in
| | 08:23 |
this current selection.
I can click OK.
| | 08:27 |
And it removes the furnace and the water
heater from the selection.
| | 08:33 |
Now, maybe I don't want the washer and
dryer, as well.
| | 08:36 |
That's the specialty equipment in generic
models.
| | 08:39 |
So I can take those items out as well.
And I also got the stove and the
| | 08:42 |
refrigerator removed from the selection.
But now I'm left with just the base
| | 08:46 |
architecture, an I can do something to
that, selection.
| | 08:49 |
Move it, copy it, rotate it.
Or, I can save it.
| | 08:54 |
This is a slightly more advanced feature,
an we can talk about this maybe a little
| | 08:58 |
bit later in the course, but it works very
simply like this: you click save.
| | 09:03 |
You give it a name.
And then later, if you want, you can load
| | 09:07 |
that selection, and click OK and it will
remember it.
| | 09:11 |
So nothing is selected, I go to the manage
tab, I click load, I select kitchen, I
| | 09:16 |
click OK, and now it's selected.
To make any modification in the Revit
| | 09:22 |
project, you need to master selection.
It's one of our most basic skills that we
| | 09:26 |
have to have, so you definitely want to
open up a file and practice.
| | 09:30 |
Use your Ctrl and Shift key, your windows
and crossings, your tab selection, very
| | 09:33 |
powerful, and your filter selection,
equally as powerful.
| | 09:37 |
Make sure that you've practiced each of
these, your comfortable with each one of these.
| | 09:41 |
And you'll be very glad you did, because
it will make everything you do in Revit,
| | 09:45 |
that much easier to accomplish.
| | 09:47 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding selection toggles| 00:00 |
We have lots of control over the way that
objects are selected in our Revit models,
| | 00:04 |
and we have several toggle switches that
control specific kinds of selection.
| | 00:09 |
I'd like to talk about that feature right
now.
| | 00:12 |
It's important to talk about them now,
because we want to get the settings in
| | 00:14 |
their default state, and then we'll talk
about them in more detail when we get to
| | 00:18 |
the chapters that discuss the specific
features.
| | 00:22 |
So I'm in a file called Selection toggles
and I have a few features in here that we
| | 00:25 |
haven't discussed yet, such as a linked
Revit file, which includes these trees
| | 00:28 |
that you see out here.
And underlay which is another floor plan
| | 00:32 |
that's sort of laid over this current
floor plan and that's this grey
| | 00:35 |
information here.
And then we have some column grids over
| | 00:39 |
here, and we're going to talk about all of
these in future movies.
| | 00:42 |
The Selection toggles is what I want to
focus on right now, and we can find those
| | 00:45 |
in two locations in the interface.
So the first area is down here in the
| | 00:50 |
lower right hand corner of the screen and
the other location is right beneath the
| | 00:54 |
selection icon here, the Modify tool,
there's a small dropdown, and you can see
| | 00:58 |
the same five elements here.
Here they have check boxes next to them to
| | 01:05 |
indicate whether they're on or off, and
down here at the bottom they have the
| | 01:09 |
small little x icon if they are toggled
off and no little x if they're toggled on.
| | 01:15 |
So out here I have the Revit link, which
is just another Revit file which has been
| | 01:18 |
embeeded into this current file, and you
can see if I zoom out a little bit, that
| | 01:22 |
if I click on it, the entire thing
selects.
| | 01:26 |
The trees, the property line, everything.
If I deselect it and toggle off the select
| | 01:30 |
links feature, you could see that I can no
longer select either by the trees or at
| | 01:34 |
the property lines.
That link file is no longer selectable.
| | 01:39 |
I'm going to zoom back in.
Here you could see I'm able to currently
| | 01:42 |
reach in and select these grayed out
elements which are actually elements that
| | 01:46 |
are down on the first floor plan of this
building.
| | 01:50 |
But if I use the Selection toggle and
uncheck Select underlay elements, notice
| | 01:55 |
that down at the lower right hand corner,
a little red x appears at the second icon.
| | 02:01 |
So you can do it in either location.
I can no longer select those underlay elements.
| | 02:07 |
And finally, if we look at any of these
grid elements here, you'll see in the
| | 02:10 |
center of them they have this little push
pin icon.
| | 02:14 |
That's a feature we'll talk about in a
future movie, but it means that those
| | 02:17 |
elements are pinned which just simply
means that I can't accidentally move them.
| | 02:22 |
Okay, I'm not able to move those objects.
If you also want to prevent those objects
| | 02:27 |
from being selected, then that is the
Select pinned elements toggle.
| | 02:32 |
And now I can't even select those pinned
elements.
| | 02:36 |
So the main reason to raise these issues
right now is, you'll notice that I've got
| | 02:40 |
a little red x next to all of those
features right now.
| | 02:45 |
If you toggle those off at any time,
they're going to remain that way until you
| | 02:49 |
come back and re-enable those features.
So your settings may vary from mine, so
| | 02:54 |
for now what I'd like to do is get us all
on the same page here, and I want to have
| | 02:58 |
these first three elements toggled on.
We want to have elements by face turned
| | 03:05 |
off and drag on selection also turned on,
so these four check-boxes are on, this one
| | 03:10 |
is off.
And that's the default behavior if you
| | 03:15 |
were to install Revit fresh and clean
straight out of the box.
| | 03:19 |
So for now let's make sure that all those
settings are set that same way and then in
| | 03:22 |
the future movies when we talk about each
of those features in a little more detail,
| | 03:25 |
we can come back and revisit those topics.
| | 03:28 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing Revit options| 00:00 |
Most computer programs have user
configurable options.
| | 00:03 |
In this movie we're going to take a quick
look at the options dialogue in Revid and
| | 00:06 |
some of the settings that you may want to
consider modifying on your own systems.
| | 00:11 |
I'm in a file called Condo unit, but it
doesn't really matter which file you have
| | 00:14 |
open for this.
We're not going to actually change the
| | 00:16 |
file in any way.
We're going to really focus our energy up
| | 00:19 |
here on the application menu.
The big R in the corner of the screen and
| | 00:23 |
if you open that up you look way down here
towards the bottom there is an Options
| | 00:27 |
button right here.
And if i click on that it bring up this
| | 00:31 |
multi-tabbed Option window which has many
user configurable settings.
| | 00:35 |
Now i am not going to go through every
single setting in here,but i am going to
| | 00:38 |
just highlight few of the important one's
that you might be interested in some of
| | 00:42 |
the one's that you would be likely to be
curious about right away, and let's start
| | 00:45 |
with save reminders.
If you've been working under the computer
| | 00:51 |
for a little while then you know how
important it is to save.
| | 00:54 |
In Revit it's no exception.
You need to actually save yourself with
| | 00:59 |
the controls S or the Save icon on a
regular basis.
| | 01:03 |
Revit does not automatically save for you.
However, Revit will remind you at a set
| | 01:07 |
interval, and that's controlled right
here.
| | 01:10 |
You can see that the default saver minder
interval is 30 minutes, and the way this
| | 01:15 |
works is if 30 minutes has passed since
the last time you saved Revit will look
| | 01:19 |
for the most inconvenient time to display
a dialogue and alert you...
| | 01:26 |
That it's time to save.
And they do it disruptively like that on
| | 01:29 |
purpose because the idea is to make sure
that you remember how important it is to save.
| | 01:35 |
So they wait until you execute a command
and then they say, oh, but hold on a second.
| | 01:39 |
You haven't saved in a while.
You can change this increment if you're
| | 01:42 |
not happy with 30 minutes, you can go down
to 15 or up to four hours, I don't
| | 01:45 |
recommend turning it off.
I think it's a really good idea to keep
| | 01:50 |
some sort of save reminder turned on.
In a future movie, we're going to talk
| | 01:53 |
about the work sharing feature and that's
where the username setting will become important.
| | 01:59 |
In addition, the work sharing frequency
update and the syncronize with central
| | 02:02 |
reminders will also be part of work
sharing, so we'll discuss both of those in
| | 02:05 |
a future movie as well.
The default view discipline is a setting
| | 02:09 |
that we can modify and you can choose
which discpline the majority of the work
| | 02:13 |
you do is, and that will have an impact on
the tabs and templates setting that are
| | 02:16 |
used for you by default, but you can
always choose other options regardless of
| | 02:20 |
what you pick here, that's just your
default.
| | 02:26 |
Under user interface your tab might vary
depending on whether you're using one of
| | 02:30 |
the building design suites, or whether
you're using Revit architecture like I
| | 02:33 |
have here, so the exact settings might be
a little bit different, but we can do
| | 02:37 |
things like change the active theme and
how much tooltip assistance, we've been
| | 02:40 |
seeing these tooltips appear on screen.
Let me show you what some of that looks like.
| | 02:48 |
If I highlight a particular command, you
see that we get a small tool tip and then
| | 02:52 |
a larger one.
Here's probably a better example.
| | 02:55 |
Here's the wall command.
So, you get the small tool tip and then
| | 02:58 |
there's a larger one that includes an
illustration.
| | 03:02 |
That is the normal tool tip.
Behavior right here where it says normal.
| | 03:06 |
If you go to minimal you only get the
small tool tip and it never goes to the
| | 03:10 |
larger one.
If you go to high it goes right to the
| | 03:14 |
more detailed tool tip and bypasses the
minimal one in between and of course if
| | 03:17 |
you don't want tool tips at all, you can
turn them off.
| | 03:22 |
I highly recommend either normal or high
and read those because it's a great way to
| | 03:25 |
learn about each command.
You may recall in the Contextual Ribbon
| | 03:30 |
tab movie that we talked about how when
you select an object.
| | 03:34 |
It would jump over to the modified tab and
show you settings for that object.
| | 03:38 |
That's actually controlled be this check
box right here.
| | 03:41 |
So if you don't like that behavior you can
un check that.
| | 03:44 |
And it won't change tabs on you.
But, I happen to think that it's a good
| | 03:47 |
thing to have it change tabs.
So I like to leave that setting turned on.
| | 03:52 |
Here, you get to control, some of your
default tab behavior as well.
| | 03:56 |
When you deselect, do you want it to
return to the previous tab or do you want
| | 03:59 |
it to stay on the modified tab, for
example.
| | 04:03 |
So, the graphics tab is mostly concerned
with your video card settings and
| | 04:06 |
background colors and your selection
colors and so forth.
| | 04:09 |
And you could see here that in some cases
it will give you a useful message like I
| | 04:12 |
have an older video card driver installed
in my system.
| | 04:16 |
So it might be a good idea for me to
actually go to the manufacturer's website,
| | 04:19 |
Nvidia, in this case, and see whether or
not they have a more current video driver
| | 04:23 |
for me to load.
Down here under selection colors we talked
| | 04:28 |
a little bit about the blue color that
Revit use by default in Revit Architecture.
| | 04:32 |
If you're not happy with that color you
can make changes to it here.
| | 04:36 |
You can also change the size of the text
that's used on the tool tips and the
| | 04:40 |
dimensions on screen.
So that can be helpful sometimes to
| | 04:43 |
increase that setting.
Where Revit accesses resources from is
| | 04:48 |
controlled by file locations.
So, you may recall back, on the recent
| | 04:53 |
file screen in addition to open a new, we
also had architectural template and
| | 04:56 |
constructional template.
Both of those are listed here.
| | 05:01 |
If you want to add a company template, you
can click this green plus sign here and
| | 05:05 |
add your own company template to the list
and make it easily accessible.
| | 05:10 |
>> If you want to change the location
where you're saving files, or what you're
| | 05:13 |
using as the default template.
Some of those settings are listed here.
| | 05:18 |
This course is not going to get into
rendering.
| | 05:21 |
We actually have a Rivet rendering course
here at lynda.com.
| | 05:25 |
So, I recommend that you check that out
after you're done with essentals here.
| | 05:29 |
But settings for rendering would be
controlled there.
| | 05:31 |
most spell checking settings are pretty
self explanatory.
| | 05:34 |
And then Steering Wheels and View Cube are
on Screen Navigation tools.
| | 05:39 |
And we'll have an opportunity to look at
those in some of the future movies.
| | 05:42 |
But if you don't like some of the default
behaviors of either of those two interface
| | 05:46 |
items, you can look at changing those
here.
| | 05:50 |
If you install any macros, any custom
programs into your system, you can control
| | 05:53 |
the behavior here.
So I'm not going to really change any of
| | 05:56 |
the settings here.
Just a quick overview of how some of those
| | 05:59 |
settings function.
Probably the ones that you'd be most
| | 06:02 |
concerned with at an early stage of
working in Revit is making sure your save
| | 06:05 |
reminders are at a good, useful interval
for you.
| | 06:10 |
And possibly looking at changing some of
your selection colors or your user name
| | 06:13 |
setting, or looking at that video card.
So there's a quick look at the Options in Reddit.
| | 06:19 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding view extents and crop regions| 00:00 |
Rivet projects will contain lots of views.
You can access the various views on the
| | 00:04 |
project browser,and you've got floor plan
views, and ceiling plan views, elevation
| | 00:08 |
views, sections views, and so on.
All of the orthographic views, like plans,
| | 00:15 |
sections, elevations, have a crop region.
A crop region is simply the outer most
| | 00:20 |
boundary of the view, and think of it as
the overall extent of that view.
| | 00:26 |
By default, that crop region starts off
being rectangular in shape.
| | 00:30 |
It can be turned on, it can be turned off,
and you can even customize it's shape to
| | 00:33 |
be non-rectangular.
So in this movie we are going to look at
| | 00:36 |
the crop regions of our Orthographic
views.
| | 00:40 |
So I' made a file here called View Crop
Region and I'm looking at a typical floor
| | 00:43 |
plan view.
This is the level one floor plan view.
| | 00:47 |
Now if I zoom out here I'm going to use
the wheel on my mouse and just sort of
| | 00:50 |
roll down until I'm zooming out.
You'll notice that I could really zoom
| | 00:54 |
almost indefinitely and the view just gets
smaller and I have all this white space around.
| | 01:01 |
The crop region for this view is currently
disabled.
| | 01:04 |
So the first thing I want to show you how
to do is how we can actually enable the
| | 01:07 |
crop region.
Now there's two ways we can do that.
| | 01:09 |
We can, do it on the properties palette,
or we can do it down here on the view
| | 01:13 |
control bar.
There's two icons here, the crop view, an
| | 01:16 |
the show crop region icon.
An those correspond to These check boxes
| | 01:21 |
here under the Extents grouping: Crop View
and Crop Region Visible.
| | 01:26 |
So if I check Crop Region Visible for
example, because this is the first time
| | 01:30 |
I'm turning it on, Revit will actually
also turn on the Crop View feature as well.
| | 01:36 |
So it'll enable both of those.
If I apply that change, you're going to
| | 01:40 |
see a rectangle appear here that surrounds
the floor plan.
| | 01:45 |
Now Revit decides how big to make this
rectangle based on the overall view, all
| | 01:48 |
the geometry in that view and then it goes
just a little bit larger.
| | 01:53 |
So it's looking basically at these
evelation markers our here and then adding
| | 01:57 |
a little bit of breathing room all the way
around.
| | 02:00 |
Now, I don't know if you notice that these
icons change as well when I check that,
| | 02:04 |
but the little red X disappeared and this
one has changed the tool tip to now say do
| | 02:08 |
not crop the view and this one says hide
the crop region.
| | 02:13 |
So clicking it here just has the same
effect as checking the box there and you
| | 02:16 |
can see that the crop region is hidden,
the little light bulb dims out, clicking
| | 02:20 |
it again it turns it back on.
So the two check boxes can now work
| | 02:24 |
independenly from one another Now I'm
going to zoom back in a little bit here
| | 02:28 |
and this rectangle is something that we
can manipulate, so if I click on it you'll
| | 02:32 |
see that it's got these little grip points
at the edges, and if you grab those little
| | 02:36 |
grip points you can drag it in and it will
crop out part of the model.
| | 02:44 |
So it's almost as if we've masked out this
part of the floor plan over here.
| | 02:49 |
And we're just focusing in on the part
that remains within the rectangle.
| | 02:53 |
If you were to disable the crop feature
here.
| | 02:57 |
Then the entire floor plan would reappear,
but notice that the cropped region
| | 03:01 |
rectangle still remains the same size.
So once you start manipulating it, it
| | 03:05 |
remembers the size.
That you placed it at, whether or not,
| | 03:09 |
you've, turned it on or off.
Now, this is not limited to just floor plans.
| | 03:13 |
If I, scroll down here, and look at some
other view, like for example, let's take a
| | 03:17 |
look at, this, section at stair here,
under the sections, Building Section category.
| | 03:24 |
this rectangle out here is the crop region
for this section.
| | 03:27 |
And despite the fact that the section is
oriented vertically, or the plan is
| | 03:31 |
oriented horizontally, everything else
behaves exactly the same way.
| | 03:35 |
So when you click on this, it has the same
dots here, and you could manipulate this
| | 03:39 |
in much the same way.
Well suppose I wanted to focus this view
| | 03:44 |
on just the stair itself.
So, I want to crop it in much closer, like so.
| | 03:49 |
It looks great on the left, right and
bottom, but when I get to this direction,
| | 03:54 |
let's zoom in a little here.
You can see, I am seeing this little piece
| | 03:59 |
of the roof here and maybe I don't really
want that, maybe I'd like to just have it
| | 04:02 |
follow the shape of this window.
With this crop region selected we can look
| | 04:08 |
up here on the ribbon and on this mode
panel there's an Edit Crop button.
| | 04:13 |
If I click that that takes me into this
special editing mode and you can see this
| | 04:18 |
crop region changes to this magenta color
and we get some drawing tools over here.
| | 04:25 |
And what I can do is I can start drawing a
line here, and I'm going to just make sure
| | 04:29 |
I'm starting on this magenta line with my
first click, and then I'm going to draw it
| | 04:33 |
roughly parallel to that window and make
sure I go all the way across to this other
| | 04:36 |
location, here.
Cancel out of there.
| | 04:43 |
And then I can select this and use these
little grips.
| | 04:46 |
Until it snaps and this little grip until
it snaps.
| | 04:51 |
And so what I've done is I've created this
custom shaped boundary.
| | 04:54 |
And when I click this big green check box
right here to finish that mode.
| | 04:59 |
You'll now see that the view is cropped to
that shape.
| | 05:03 |
If I want to complete the effect I can
come down here and click that little light
| | 05:07 |
bulb icon and hide that boundary and now
I'm looking at just the stair.
| | 05:14 |
Now we can do the same thing in other
views, and in fact if I go back to my
| | 05:17 |
level one floor plan you can actually
create views on the fly that have these
| | 05:21 |
irregular shaped boundaries, so let's say
that I wanted to do an enlarged floor plan
| | 05:25 |
of just this reception slash corridor
area, these two spaces right here...
| | 05:33 |
I could go to the View tab, click the Call
Out button, but notice its got a drop down
| | 05:37 |
and one of the options is to sketch the
call out.
| | 05:41 |
So the default behavior is to give you a
rectangle call out, but if I choose this
| | 05:45 |
option, I can do a sketched call out and
literally just draw the shape that I want.
| | 05:53 |
This boundary to be.
And I'll get it to line up with the
| | 05:56 |
starting point.
End right there, click Finish.
| | 05:59 |
And you can see that I've got this call
out shape, this dashed boundary
| | 06:03 |
surrounding there.
If I select it, right click and say go to
| | 06:08 |
View, that actually created a view here in
my Project browser that has that irregular
| | 06:13 |
shaped boundary, so the crop regions can
be rectangles, they can be non rectangular.
| | 06:21 |
They have to be enclosed.
You can't have an open shape.
| | 06:23 |
So it's gotta be a closed shape.
But it can be really any shape that you
| | 06:27 |
like, to allow you to focus the view on
just the area that you're interested in.
| | 06:31 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Starting a ProjectCreating a new project from a template| 00:00 |
All the work you do in Revit is contained
in a single Revit Project file.
| | 00:04 |
There's a few different ways that we can
create new projects in rev it.
| | 00:07 |
We can use the recent files screen or the
application menu.
| | 00:10 |
Both of these which we've looked at in a
previous movie.
| | 00:13 |
So I want to focus just on the new file
creation areas.
| | 00:16 |
Here we've got new or the architectural
and construction environmental Or under
| | 00:21 |
the big R the application menu we can go
to New and then Project.
| | 00:26 |
Now there's not a lot of difference
between which way you choose it.
| | 00:29 |
If I choose new project here it brings up
a dialogue, new project, and it lists out
| | 00:33 |
for me those same two templates that we
saw listed here, and if I click this new
| | 00:37 |
link I get the same dialogue, so it's
really the same command either way...
| | 00:44 |
The difference would be, if you're already
in a project.
| | 00:47 |
Then you wouldn't see the recent file
screen.
| | 00:49 |
So you'd want to use the application menu.
Now, the differences between the
| | 00:52 |
architectural template and the
construction template are something that I
| | 00:56 |
want to look at here in this movie.
So if I choose the architectural template,
| | 01:00 |
and I click okay.
And I could have gotten there with that.
| | 01:03 |
Short cut, again a really basic starting
point.
| | 01:07 |
If we look at the project browser, we get
a level one and level two floor plan, we
| | 01:10 |
have got a couple ceiling plans, and a few
elevations.
| | 01:14 |
There are no sheets, there are no
schedules, it's a really, really basic
| | 01:18 |
project with sort of like a no frills,
just get me into the program sort of project.
| | 01:24 |
But there are lots and lots of settings or
lots of things that can be preconfigured.
| | 01:29 |
In a Project template.
Now I am going to just show you a couple
| | 01:32 |
examples by closing this, not going to
save it and oopening up some of the other
| | 01:35 |
templates so take a look and I will start
with this construction template right here
| | 01:39 |
just as a point of contrast.
When I open that the screen here looks
| | 01:44 |
pretty much the same but if you look at
the project browser you can see that there
| | 01:48 |
are some differences.
Instead of just having level one and level
| | 01:54 |
two floor plan, I now have some additional
floor plans showing in the list.
| | 02:00 |
Under 3D views I have several additional
views showing in the list and if I scroll
| | 02:04 |
even further down I have some schedules.
Quite a few actually and I have some
| | 02:10 |
sheets already.
Now let me show how some of this works.
| | 02:15 |
All of those views don't really tell us
very much unless there's something to view.
| | 02:19 |
So I'm just going to come over here and
add a wall.
| | 02:23 |
And don't worry about the specifics right
now, we'll be talking about walls and
| | 02:26 |
doors in a future movie.
But I'm going to add a wall and a couple
| | 02:30 |
quick doors.
And zoom in here.
| | 02:35 |
And this one is door number one.
You can see right there.
| | 02:39 |
This one is door number two.
You can see it right there.
| | 02:43 |
And this one is door number three, you can
see it right there.
| | 02:46 |
Now if I scroll down and look at one of
these other views.
| | 02:52 |
Like a south elevation you can already see
the wall and the three doors or perhaps
| | 02:57 |
this door quantity schedule what you see
here is that there is a single line item
| | 03:02 |
listed here but it says the count is
three.
| | 03:07 |
So, it's recognizing that I actually have
three different doors on that list.
| | 03:12 |
Now, if i go back to level one, and I
select one of these doors, and change it
| | 03:17 |
to something else, gets a little smaller,
scroll down, open up that same one, you'll
| | 03:22 |
see I now get two different line items.
So, this was the construction template,
| | 03:31 |
and if you look at the names of the
schedules, they all start with either QA
| | 03:36 |
or QC for quantities or quality control.
So the kinds of things that a contractor
| | 03:43 |
might be interested in is counting stuff
or verifying that everything is the way it
| | 03:47 |
should be but they're certainly interested
in the quantities that would be in the
| | 03:51 |
model so that they could order the correct
materials and make sure everything gets to
| | 03:54 |
the site.
So you can see all of these schedules are
| | 04:00 |
pre-configured to list out that kind of
information, so that they simply start
| | 04:04 |
drawing and these lists are already
populating themselves automatically.
| | 04:10 |
So this is one of the really powerful
benefits of starting with a template.
| | 04:14 |
I'm going to close this one, and I'm not
going to save it.
| | 04:19 |
And there are a few other templates that
are provided, and I want to just show you
| | 04:22 |
what a couple of those look like, and to
do that, I'm going to click the new link here.
| | 04:27 |
And go to browse this time.
Construction and default are listed here.
| | 04:33 |
Default is actually what they're calling
the architectural template, that was that
| | 04:36 |
really simple one that had very little in
it, and construction is the one that we
| | 04:40 |
just looked at, but there's also a
commercial and a residential default
| | 04:43 |
listed here as well.
Now, we're going to begin a project here
| | 04:47 |
in the coming movies and we're going to
start it with the commercial default, and
| | 04:50 |
let me just show you what that template.
Looks like, so I'm going to choose it
| | 04:54 |
right there.
Click OK.
| | 04:56 |
And take a look, we've got some different
floor plans, elevations, simpler schedules
| | 05:02 |
this time.
You know, just a basic door schedule,
| | 05:06 |
basic room schedule, but this one's got a
whole bunch of sheets already in here.
| | 05:11 |
So, here's what I'm going to do.
I'm going to add a wall.
| | 05:15 |
(SOUND) Again, don't worry too much about
the specifics.
| | 05:17 |
I'm going to add a door to that wall.
Again, don't worry too much about those specifics.
| | 05:23 |
Now, if I scroll down here we would see
that wall that I've just drawn from either
| | 05:27 |
the south or one of the other elevations
like the west or the east.
| | 05:33 |
Here's what it looks like from the south.
Here's what it looks like from the west, okay?
| | 05:37 |
We're just sort of seeing it edge on I
drew it at a slight angle.
| | 05:40 |
If I scroll down here, you'll see that
there's a couple of sheets that are listed
| | 05:44 |
here that already are setup for
elevations.
| | 05:47 |
A4 has the North and South elevation.
A5 has the East and West elevation.
| | 05:53 |
I'm going to open up A4 by double clicking
on it right here.
| | 05:56 |
And what you see is This right here is the
north elevation.
| | 06:02 |
That's number two.
This one's the south elevation.
| | 06:06 |
That's number one.
Here's the model.
| | 06:08 |
Here's the model.
Now if I return to my floor plan, level
| | 06:11 |
one floor pan and you zoom in here.
This is the rest elevation.
| | 06:17 |
That's number two on a five.
The ones we just looked at Or this one,
| | 06:23 |
number one, on A4 and this one, number two
on A4.
| | 06:30 |
Revit automatically inputs the drawing
number and the drawing reference directly
| | 06:34 |
in the symbols for us and when you start
in one of these templates that's already
| | 06:38 |
preconfigured this way You can basically
just start drawing your model in the
| | 06:41 |
correct location, and you're already
getting schedules that are populating
| | 06:45 |
themselves like the one we saw a moment
ago in the construction template.
| | 06:52 |
Or sheets that are showing appropriate
views already.
| | 06:55 |
There's a lot of things that can be
pre-built and put into the template to get
| | 06:59 |
you started.
Now there's a lot of stuff that you can't
| | 07:01 |
put in a template automatically as well.
So, in the next few movies we're going to
| | 07:05 |
be looking at some of the early project
setup things that we would want to do like
| | 07:09 |
setting up levels and setting up grids and
so forth, So your template can only take
| | 07:12 |
you so far, but it's a great place to get
started and you are highly recommended to
| | 07:16 |
always start your projects with an
appropiate template.
| | 07:22 |
Now many of you may actually be in a firm
that has their own custom template, so
| | 07:25 |
rather than choosing from one of the ones
I've just shown you here, which are really
| | 07:28 |
just examples, you might be using one that
comes from your office standards that
| | 07:32 |
somebody there in your firm has created.
Regardless of the template you start with
| | 07:38 |
though, all projects should really be
begun with an appropriate template.
| | 07:42 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing multiuser worksharing projects| 00:01 |
In this movie I want to talk briefly about
what we do when we have a multiple user team.
| | 00:06 |
In Revit your entire project lives in a
single project file.
| | 00:10 |
This raises a problem when you have more
than one person on a team.
| | 00:13 |
Because only one person can access the
project file at a given time, so this
| | 00:17 |
would not make it very practical for teams
to work together.
| | 00:21 |
So, what Revit offers is a feature called
Work Sharing.
| | 00:24 |
With work sharing, you have a central
file, and this file is typically stored on
| | 00:28 |
a network server.
Can be any net work server, any map drive
| | 00:32 |
will do the job.
And then each user on the project team
| | 00:36 |
creates, what we call, a local version or
a local copy of this file that they
| | 00:40 |
actually do the data they work in.
The local copy is created literally on the
| | 00:47 |
local hard drive.
And it maintains a connection back to the
| | 00:51 |
central file.
And what happens is, every so often the
| | 00:54 |
users on the team will synchronize with
the central file that'll take their
| | 00:57 |
changes and publish them to the central
file.
| | 01:01 |
And any changes made by their colleagues,
and bring them down and update their local copy.
| | 01:06 |
And in so doing, everybody is able to work
together on a project team and all make
| | 01:09 |
changes to various parts of the project.
Now the challenge that we have is in a
| | 01:15 |
video course such as this.
It's a little difficult for me to
| | 01:18 |
demonstrate and certainly to provide a
exercise file for you to work in on this.
| | 01:24 |
So what I'm going to is simply demonstrate
the process that you follow, to open and
| | 01:28 |
create a local copy.
And I'm going to do this because many of
| | 01:32 |
you are probably working in firms where
you work together in a team.
| | 01:35 |
And it's going to be important for you to
understand that probably most projects
| | 01:38 |
that you're going to work on in Revit are
going to be opened and created in this way.
| | 01:43 |
So you should at least know the basic
steps.
| | 01:45 |
But I definitely recommend that you talk
to your IT professionals or your BM or CAD
| | 01:49 |
manager and get the details of how things
are done in your firm.
| | 01:53 |
Think of this as really just an overview
of the concept and a tool to help you get started.
| | 01:58 |
So what I've done is set up sort of a
simulated network here on my system, and
| | 02:01 |
I've created a file called work share.
And let me show you how you would access
| | 02:06 |
that if it's a Work Sharing file.
So I would use my Open Link or I could go
| | 02:11 |
to my Application menu to get there, and
go to my Network Server.
| | 02:16 |
In this case, it's on my D, drive, and
I've just created a file called Your
| | 02:19 |
Office Network to simulate this location.
When I open that file and I select the
| | 02:24 |
central file, in this case, it's a file
called Workshare, the most important
| | 02:28 |
setting is down here at the bottom of the
screen.
| | 02:33 |
There's this Create New Local checkbox.
And we want to absolutely make sure that
| | 02:38 |
that's checked.
Now it's checked by default so you
| | 02:40 |
shouldn't have to do anything here.
It should already be that way, but you
| | 02:43 |
want to just double check before you click
open that that's checked.
| | 02:47 |
And what that will do instead of opening
the central file which we don't want to do
| | 02:51 |
that would be considered a bad thing.
We want to make sure we're creating a
| | 02:55 |
local copy let me show you what that looks
like.
| | 02:58 |
If I restore this down here, here's the
file called Workshare and notice that at
| | 03:02 |
the end of that file it's added my user
name.
| | 03:05 |
Fall autumn to the end of the name.
So I'm not working on a local copy of this
| | 03:10 |
Workshare enabled project.
I could go about my work, make whatever
| | 03:15 |
changes I want to make, and then, when I'm
ready.
| | 03:19 |
I would go to the Collaborate tab or the
Quick Access toolbar and used my
| | 03:22 |
Synchronize with Central command.
And you can see it located right here and
| | 03:27 |
right here.
This would maintain the location back to
| | 03:31 |
the central file, it knows where that file
lives.
| | 03:34 |
And when I click OK, it would update any
changes that I've made to the central
| | 03:38 |
file, and if any of my colleagues made
changes it would pull those changes down.
| | 03:43 |
And update my local copy, as well.
That's the way most teams are working
| | 03:49 |
together using a Revit environment.
Now, for the remainder of the course,
| | 03:53 |
we're going to work in standalone
projects.
| | 03:55 |
But I thought it was important for you to
at least understand that work sharing is
| | 03:58 |
going to probably be the way that most of
your projects are going to be set up.
| | 04:03 |
And so you're at least aware of it.
I definitely recommend you talk to some of
| | 04:06 |
you colleagues and your cabin manager.
And make sure that you've got the process
| | 04:09 |
down for what you do there at your firm.
But that's the basic steps that are
| | 04:13 |
involved in opening and creating a new
local file.
| | 04:15 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring project settings| 00:00 |
Many project settings are available under
Revit Project.
| | 00:03 |
Even though you begin your project with a
template file, there are certainly some
| | 00:05 |
settings that you want to double check and
possibly change with each project.
| | 00:09 |
Some of these include really simple things
like the project location, the address,
| | 00:12 |
and maybe the temporary dimension
settings.
| | 00:15 |
So in this movie, we're going to create a
new project and configure a few of those
| | 00:18 |
settings, so let's take a look.
Now, we could easily start with the
| | 00:21 |
default template, but I'd actually prefer
to start with one of the templates that
| | 00:25 |
gives us a little more structure to begin
with, so I'm going to click the new link
| | 00:28 |
right here.
If you watch earlier movie on project
| | 00:32 |
templates, then you saw that we could
click this Browse button here.
| | 00:36 |
And there were some other choices for us
to use, and in this case I am going to use
| | 00:39 |
the Commercial default, and I am going to
click Open, and click OK.
| | 00:43 |
And this gives me some basic views and a
few schedules and some sheets and so it's
| | 00:47 |
good starting point for us to build a
small commercial office building which is
| | 00:51 |
what this project's going to be.
But before I actually start actually
| | 00:56 |
laying out and drawing anything I'm
going to verify a few of the settings that
| | 00:59 |
I might want to use in this project.
And I do this on the Manage tab.
| | 01:05 |
So, I come over here to manage and there
are actually lots of settings that we
| | 01:08 |
could look at here I'm only going to focus
on a few for this movie.
| | 01:12 |
Let's start with the Project Information.
So when I click here, you don't have to do
| | 01:18 |
this right away, but it's not a bad idea
to do this early.
| | 01:21 |
It's pretty basic stuff that you should
know early on in a project.
| | 01:24 |
Like you might have some idea of when the
project's going to be issued.
| | 01:27 |
I'm going to put some date, the status of
the project.
| | 01:31 |
It might be design development.
You could put in the owner.
| | 01:37 |
The project address is the actual street
address that will occur on the title block.
| | 01:45 |
So, in this case, you know, perhaps it's
on Main Street.
| | 01:49 |
Carpentry in California.
Project name might just be simply Office
| | 01:58 |
Park, and we'll give it a project number
of 2001201.
| | 02:06 |
We can obviously change this information
any time we like.
| | 02:10 |
But that information, if we scroll down
here, will already fill in, to several of
| | 02:15 |
the fields, in our title block, over here.
So you can see the, the owners name and
| | 02:21 |
the, name of the project, and the date,
I've all field in.
| | 02:24 |
So that's, one of the settings you might
want to look at, early on.
| | 02:28 |
Some other settings you might want to look
is and this is sometimes confusing, we
| | 02:32 |
just filled in the address but the address
is just for the title block, that's just
| | 02:35 |
going to fill in the actual mailing
address.
| | 02:39 |
But it doesn't actually change the
location of the project, we have to do
| | 02:41 |
that with this command right here.
So, I'm going to click that, and let me
| | 02:46 |
make this window just a little bit larger
here.
| | 02:49 |
And you can see that the default templates
go to Boston.
| | 02:54 |
And that's because Revit is, the office
where Revit is created is here, over here
| | 02:59 |
in Waltham, Massachusetts.
So they've set Boston as the default location.
| | 03:05 |
We just said that we were in Carpinteria,
California.
| | 03:10 |
And if I click Search right here, because
this is using Internet Mapping Service,
| | 03:14 |
it'll go right to that location.
Now, this just acts as downtown
| | 03:18 |
Carpinteria and it gave me the latitude
and longitude.
| | 03:22 |
If we put in the exact address, it can go
right to that street address.
| | 03:25 |
You can also change the way this map is
displaying, maybe you want a Satellite
| | 03:28 |
view, or a Hybrid view, or just a Street
Map view.
| | 03:32 |
You can drag it, you can roll your wheel
to zoom in, and you can even pick this
| | 03:36 |
little icon up and.
Drag it around and put it wherever it
| | 03:41 |
needs to go.
So you can either do it with an address or
| | 03:45 |
by typing in and get yourself in the
general location.
| | 03:49 |
Now, this is important if you're going to
do shadow studies or energy analysis or
| | 03:52 |
anything that requires a correct
geographical location.
| | 03:56 |
The wind stations and the weather stations
in Carpinteria are a little different than
| | 04:00 |
the ones couple of miles down the road.
And so we'll get more accurate weather
| | 04:05 |
data and more accurate energy analysis if
we get the addresses as correct as possible.
| | 04:10 |
So I'll go ahead and click OK there.
So those are a few of the settings that we
| | 04:13 |
might want to configure at the start of
the project.
| | 04:16 |
Now, there are lots of other settings that
we could set.
| | 04:19 |
And I'm not going to go through all of
them.
| | 04:20 |
We could do a whole course in just the
settings if we wanted to.
| | 04:24 |
But many of these things will be off the
standards.
| | 04:26 |
We're going to rely on the settings that
come out of the box but things like fill
| | 04:29 |
patterns and line styles and line weights,
all of these things can be configured and
| | 04:32 |
so you might want to explore some of those
later at your leisure.
| | 04:37 |
The last step is really to just save the
project and since I've never saved it
| | 04:39 |
before it'll bring up a Save As dialogue.
And I'll just put this onto my desktop for
| | 04:43 |
now but if you have another location where
you'd rather save it, you can feel free to
| | 04:46 |
do that.
And I'll call this Office Park.
| | 04:51 |
And, I want to show you right here,
there's an Options button, and if you want
| | 04:55 |
to, you can actually click in here and
make some modifications.
| | 05:01 |
Now, the one in particular that I want to
talk about is this setting right here,
| | 05:04 |
maximum backups.
Twenty is a bit much.
| | 05:07 |
Often you'll see projects that use two or
three.
| | 05:10 |
I'm going to drop it down to three in this
case.
| | 05:12 |
What this will do, let me show you the way
this is going to work is when you OK this
| | 05:16 |
and you Save.
Now, let me go back and do Save As.
| | 05:23 |
There's the project I just created.
I'm going to cancel.
| | 05:27 |
I want to save it again with the Save icon
or you can do Ctrl+S, the Windows shortcut
| | 05:32 |
for Save.
Now, I'm going to do Save As again just to
| | 05:37 |
access that folder, and you see how I got
an Office Park.001?
| | 05:42 |
That's the backup, so the way it works is
over here in options because I said three.
| | 05:48 |
I'll get 01, then 02 then 03.
The next back up after that, it'll take
| | 05:54 |
the oldest one, 01, and go throw it away
and it'll create 04.
| | 05:58 |
And it'll keep doing it like that.
So at any given time, you'll have up to
| | 06:01 |
three backups of your project file.
And this is useful of course if you crash
| | 06:05 |
or something goes wrong, that you can go
back and restore one of those earlier back ups.
| | 06:10 |
To restore it, you just simply open it.
And then re-save it with a new name.
| | 06:14 |
So I'm going to cancel out of there
because I don't actually want to make any
| | 06:16 |
change there.
So we've created a new project, we've
| | 06:19 |
configured a few of the basic settings and
now, we're ready to start actually
| | 06:22 |
building our building.
And we'll start doing that in the next few movies.
| | 06:27 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding levels| 00:00 |
Floor levels are one of the primary
organizational and structural constructs
| | 00:03 |
in a Revit project.
In this movie we'll explore how to add and
| | 00:07 |
manipulate the levels in our project.
Now, levels are one of those datum
| | 00:11 |
elements, if you recall a few movies back
in an earlier chapter where we were
| | 00:14 |
talking about the different buckets that
objects fell in.
| | 00:18 |
Levels and grids, which we're going to
look at in the next movie These are datum elements.
| | 00:23 |
And a datum element is just an
organizational element that establishes
| | 00:27 |
some known location in your project, and
with levels those known locations are
| | 00:31 |
heights above zero, so.
We're looking at a floor plan right now.
| | 00:36 |
I'm in a project called Levels, and this
is actually just a copy of the project
| | 00:39 |
that we created in the last movie.
And, this floor plan is established at a
| | 00:44 |
particular height.
Now, you can't see the height when you're
| | 00:47 |
in a floor plan view, and in fact, you
really can't do any manipulation to the
| | 00:51 |
level when you're in a floor plan view, so
what we need to do is use our elevations
| | 00:54 |
over here.
And open up an elevation, and I have
| | 00:59 |
prepared this east elevation to show us
the levels.
| | 01:02 |
All I really did was shortened the extent
of these levels so that we could zoom in a
| | 01:05 |
little bit more closely.
Each of the levels is represented here
| | 01:09 |
with this dash line and this symbol at the
end, and they each have a name and a height.
| | 01:15 |
So, as I said, the levels are at
horizontal datum.
| | 01:18 |
You think of it is a thin sheet of paper
cutting through your building at a
| | 01:20 |
particular height, and so here's level
one.
| | 01:23 |
And that's at zero.
And then there is a few levels in the
| | 01:26 |
negative direction.
Top of footing and bottom of footing.
| | 01:29 |
And then there is one up here called roof
at 12 foot 8.
| | 01:32 |
Now, when you select these levels, they
have lots of small controls and grips that
| | 01:36 |
appear on them.
They have these little open circles at
| | 01:40 |
either end, and you can use those to
actually change the extend of the level.
| | 01:45 |
And notice that when I do that it actually
controlled the ones down below as well.
| | 01:50 |
That's because of this little lock icon
here.
| | 01:52 |
So, you can stretch any one of these end
points and they'll all stretch together as
| | 01:56 |
a unit which makes it pretty handy
particularly on a building where you have
| | 02:00 |
lots of levels.
You've got a height that you can control
| | 02:04 |
here with this dimension or right here.
You've got a name.
| | 02:07 |
And then you've got this little graphical
symbol here.
| | 02:10 |
Now, down here, you can see there's a
small little elbow on this level.
| | 02:13 |
And when I click on it, there's a few
small grip points here that I can drag to
| | 02:17 |
make this a little bit more legible.
Notice that doesn't have any impact on the height.
| | 02:24 |
The height of the level is here, where
this dashed line is.
| | 02:27 |
That's where the negative 6 feet occurs.
And you can see here form this dimension
| | 02:31 |
that, it's one foot away from its
neighbor.
| | 02:33 |
But this is just for the graphical symbol,
to make things appear a little bit more legibly.
| | 02:38 |
So these were all the levels that were
already here in the project.
| | 02:42 |
But the building that I want to create
needs a few additional levels.
| | 02:45 |
Now, how do you decide?
Well, when you're setting up your project,
| | 02:48 |
this is one of the first tasks that you
want to do.
| | 02:50 |
And what I typically tell people is, if
you've got a button on the elevator You
| | 02:53 |
should put a level there.
Now, you can have levels for other things.
| | 02:57 |
Clearly there isn't a button on the
elevator for top and bottom of footing, so
| | 03:00 |
you can clearly have levels for other
horizontal measurement points as well.
| | 03:04 |
Other datums that are important to you.
But, having one for every actual occupied
| | 03:08 |
floor level is a pretty good idea.
And so, I need a level 2 in this building.
| | 03:13 |
So I'll start with that one.
If I go to the Architecture tab, over here
| | 03:17 |
toward the right-hand side on the data
panel you're going to see the level button.
| | 03:21 |
Now, if you look at the tool tip that
appears when I hover over the tool here.
| | 03:27 |
You could see that it says the word level,
that's the name of the command, and in
| | 03:30 |
parenthesis, it says LL, that's actually
the keyboard shortcut for this command.
| | 03:35 |
The way this works is likely that click
this button or without clicking the
| | 03:38 |
button, I can just type the letters LL on
my keyboard.
| | 03:42 |
Either way, I am going to be running that
command.
| | 03:45 |
So, be on the look out for those tool tips
because they I will tell you keyboard
| | 03:48 |
shortcuts, and often that's a faster way
to issue the Command.
| | 03:51 |
Now notice that when I move my mouse over
here when it lines up with the endpoints
| | 03:55 |
of the neighboring levels it'll snap to
it.
| | 03:59 |
You see that little dashed line there?
It wants to snap to that.
| | 04:02 |
So I'm going to click and start to drag
and when it gets to this other end it'll
| | 04:06 |
snap again.
And click.
| | 04:10 |
I just sort of eyeballed that in, it came
in at about 10 foot two, but I really like
| | 04:14 |
this level at about 10 feet so I'm just
going to put my mouse right on top of this
| | 04:18 |
dimensional text and click and that will
make that editable text.
| | 04:25 |
And then I'm just going to type in one
zero.
| | 04:27 |
This is going to be interpreted as 10 feet
by Revit.
| | 04:31 |
The default unit in the imperial project
if you're working in the United States Is feet.
| | 04:36 |
So, when I press enter, it will interpret
that as 10 feet, zero inches.
| | 04:40 |
So, that's my level 2, my second floor of
the building.
| | 04:43 |
Now I'm going to hold in my wheel, drag a
little bit, make a another level up here
| | 04:48 |
some where.
Again, snap it at both ends.
| | 04:53 |
It came in at 19, 8 I'm going to put in
20, press Enter.
| | 04:56 |
And this is going to be a second roof, my
building actually is going to have two
| | 05:00 |
roofs; there's going to be a lower roof
and an upper roof.
| | 05:04 |
So currently this one is just called roof
and this one came in as level three.
| | 05:09 |
So Revit just guesses at the name.
Now, I'm still in the level command, so
| | 05:12 |
what i want to do is get out of that level
command and show you that it's real easy
| | 05:15 |
for us to rename those two levels that we
need.
| | 05:19 |
But before I get out of the command, let
me just point out the color of this level
| | 05:23 |
symbol and compare it to the color of this
level symbol.
| | 05:26 |
This one is a nice bright blue, and this
one is black.
| | 05:29 |
Notice that when I press Escape and get
out of the command.
| | 05:32 |
That one turns blue as well.
Now, whats that's telling us is if you
| | 05:36 |
look over here on the project browser, it
automatically created floor plans, and
| | 05:40 |
ceiling plans, you can see there's a level
two and level three floor plan and ceiling
| | 05:44 |
plan, for each of those new levels.
Okay, now notice here it says level 2,
| | 05:50 |
level 3.
Watch what happens now, we've also got
| | 05:53 |
Roof here.
I'm going to select this one, click right
| | 05:55 |
on the word Roof, put my cursor at the
start of that name, and I'm going to
| | 05:59 |
change it to Low Roof.
When I press Enter, I'll get a message
| | 06:04 |
that pops on screen and Revit will ask me,
Do I want to rename the corresponding views?
| | 06:09 |
It's talking about this view right here,
that's called Roof in this case.
| | 06:12 |
So, I'm going to say Yes, and you'll see
the name change to Low Roof.
| | 06:17 |
I'm going to do it again.
Click on Level 3, click right on there,
| | 06:20 |
call this High Roof.
Press Enter, say Yes again, and now it
| | 06:25 |
will create High Roof here.
And there's also this ceiling plan called
| | 06:31 |
High Roof, it renamed that.
Now, it turns out that I probably don't
| | 06:35 |
need a ceiling plan on the roof level.
So I can simply select that view in
| | 06:39 |
Project Browser, press the Delete key on
my keyboard, and it will remove that
| | 06:43 |
unneeded view.
So you don't actually have to have a view
| | 06:47 |
in each location for each level, but, it
will create one for you automatically and
| | 06:51 |
you can simply delete it if you don't want
it.
| | 06:55 |
Let me zoom out a little bit here.
Those are my completed levels, I can make
| | 06:58 |
whatever adjustments i want to make, I can
add the little elbow using this tiny
| | 07:02 |
little squiggle right here.
To make that a little bit more legible,
| | 07:08 |
and then all that would remain is to save
my project and move on to the next step.
| | 07:14 |
So one of the first tasks that you want to
do when creating a new project is to set
| | 07:16 |
up the levels.
Nearly all of the elements in a Revit
| | 07:19 |
project have some association to one or
more of the levels in your projects.
| | 07:23 |
So their importance can't be overstated.
You don't have to get all of the levels
| | 07:27 |
perfect on the first try.
But typically, you'll want to set at least
| | 07:30 |
the basic ones early on so that you have a
good frame work for your project.
| | 07:36 |
Remember, if there's a button on the
elevator, you want to create a level for it.
| | 07:39 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding grids| 00:00 |
Like levels, grids provide organization
and structure to your project.
| | 00:04 |
Where levels were horizontal datum
elements cutting through the grid at a
| | 00:07 |
certain height, grids are vertical datum
elements that are located at certain
| | 00:10 |
locations along the building.
Grids are used typically to locate where
| | 00:14 |
the columns occur in your projects and
they provide key points of reference for
| | 00:18 |
things like views and sheets.
Unlike levels not all buildings need grits.
| | 00:24 |
For example most residential projects
don't have any need for a column grid.
| | 00:29 |
Most commercial projects on the other hand
do have column grids.
| | 00:32 |
Therefore they ape of project that your
creating will dictate your need for grids.
| | 00:36 |
Now I'm in a project called grids and I'm
looking at floor plan level one and I'm
| | 00:40 |
going to go here to the Architecture tab.
And click on the Grid tool.
| | 00:45 |
It's located here on the Datum panel.
When I click the Grid tool, there are a
| | 00:47 |
few different shapes you can create, and
I'm just going to stick with simple,
| | 00:50 |
straight lines for this example.
And, for my first example, I'm just going
| | 00:55 |
to draw a grid out here, off to the side.
Now, I click my first point down here and
| | 01:00 |
the second point can be anywhere I like.
In fact, in can be at any angle.
| | 01:04 |
>> But I'm going to just draw straight up
to stay parallel with the building and
| | 01:07 |
click my second point.
Now, what you'll notice right away is,
| | 01:12 |
that Revit creates a grid bubble at the
second end.
| | 01:16 |
The first end has no bubble.
The second end has the bubble and it
| | 01:20 |
automatically numbered it as grid number
one.
| | 01:23 |
The presence of the bubble is controlled
by this little check box right here.
| | 01:29 |
So if I uncheck that will hide that
bubble, if I check it again, it'll display it.
| | 01:35 |
The same was true down here.
Check, it will display it, uncheck, it
| | 01:39 |
will hide it.
Now it turns out that same trick works
| | 01:41 |
with levels, so if you watch the previous
movie we talked about levels.
| | 01:45 |
You can actually check an uncheck whether
or not you want to show the level
| | 01:48 |
annotation, on either end of the level
datum.
| | 01:50 |
So, most of the features of grids work
with levels an vice versa.
| | 01:55 |
Now lemme cancel out of the command for a
moment, and select this grid.
| | 02:00 |
And I am going to simply delete it, and
the reason I want to delete it is I want
| | 02:04 |
to talk about how revit numbers grid.
So, I am going to go back to the Datum
| | 02:08 |
panel, click the Grid tool again, and this
time I am going to click my first point
| | 02:12 |
below the building but inside the wall
here.
| | 02:16 |
So, if you are not careful, it will snap
right to the wall, and I want to snap it
| | 02:19 |
to the wall I want to bring it inside a
little bit.
| | 02:22 |
>> Click my first point.
Pull it straight up parallel to the wall.
| | 02:26 |
And click again.
And the reason I wanted to do it that way
| | 02:29 |
is notice that it remembers that the next
number in sequence is number 2.
| | 02:35 |
So regardless of the fact that I've
deleted grid one, it still remembers that
| | 02:38 |
it's grid two.
Now this is really important.
| | 02:41 |
It's important if I wanted this one to
actually be 1.
| | 02:44 |
It's also important if I want to use
letters here instead, so let me show you
| | 02:48 |
how we can change this before we continue.
You see where it says edit parameter right
| | 02:53 |
here when you put your mouse right over
it?
| | 02:55 |
All you gotta do is click.
And it will make that editable text.
| | 02:59 |
And I'm going to change this to capital a
to go with letters in this direction.
| | 03:04 |
Now, if I continue, I'll zoom back out to
do this.
| | 03:08 |
Line up right here just like levels that
can line up with the neighboring grid.
| | 03:12 |
Snap it at both ends Line up, snap it at
both ends.
| | 03:18 |
Notice that I'm getting A, then B, then C,
and then here's D, and then here's E.
| | 03:26 |
We're going to fine tune the position of
these grids later.
| | 03:28 |
So, for right now, I just kind of want to
rough them in in about the locations that
| | 03:31 |
I'm interested in.
Let me do the same thing down here.
| | 03:35 |
I'm going to come inside this exterior
wall.
| | 03:38 |
Click, but here i want to stop before i
want to continue i want to click right on
| | 03:42 |
the letter F and I don't want that to be
F, I want to go back to the numbers now,i
| | 03:46 |
want to make that number 1 and then i will
continue here's the next one, there is
| | 03:51 |
number 2.
Here's my next one,there's my number 3 and
| | 03:58 |
finally Here's number 4.
Just like levels we have lots of the she
| | 04:02 |
grips on these grids.
I'm going to click my modify tool to
| | 04:06 |
cancel out of the command, or if you
prefer you can press the Escape key twice.
| | 04:12 |
Just like levels if you select one o these
grids that little open circle appears at
| | 04:15 |
the end and you can start to drag these..
And they dragged together as one, now
| | 04:21 |
notice that this one I stopped a little
short it won't do that it will drag all by itself.
| | 04:26 |
However if I bring it all the way out here
and snap it now it will automatically lock
| | 04:30 |
and they'll work together.
So it's really easy to fix that if you
| | 04:35 |
accidentally make one that's too short,
all you got to do is drag it until it
| | 04:38 |
snaps to its neighbor and it will take
care of the rest As I said, I've only
| | 04:42 |
roughed in the grids, and I'm going to
kind of leave them like this for now.
| | 04:48 |
We're going to clean that up in the next
movie.
| | 04:50 |
But I wanted to show you a new feature
here, in 2013.
| | 04:55 |
In really complex commercial buildings,
you sometimes have a really complicated grid.
| | 05:00 |
And, Revit 13 has included this new
multi-segment grid feature.
| | 05:06 |
And if I click on that that's going to
take me into something called sketch mode.
| | 05:10 |
Now I don't really want to get into the
details of sketch mode yet.
| | 05:13 |
We're going to talk about that in great
detail in a future chapter, but for right
| | 05:16 |
now I'm just going to stick with the
straight line tool that's right here and
| | 05:20 |
I'm just going to draw a couple...
Shapes like so.
| | 05:25 |
It doesn't really matter what the shape
is.
| | 05:27 |
You can just draw two or three or four
segments here and then click this big
| | 05:30 |
green checkbox to finish the edit mode,
and what I'll get is a continuous grid
| | 05:34 |
object, but it has this irregular shape,
so that's going to be really helpful in
| | 05:37 |
those complex buildings that have a more
complicated column grid.
| | 05:45 |
In this particular case, I don't really
need that grid.
| | 05:47 |
So I'm actually going to delete it.
But I did want to point out that new
| | 05:50 |
feature to you.
So it's not necessary that you set up your
| | 05:53 |
grids right away, but it can be a good
idea to get them configured in your
| | 05:56 |
project as early as possible.
Your column grid in a commercial project
| | 06:01 |
is a pretty important part of the
building, so having those grids and
| | 06:04 |
columns located early on can be a big
help.
| | 06:07 |
But remember, like all things in Revit, we
can always modify it later.
| | 06:11 |
An in fact, the subject of the next movie,
is we're going to take this starting
| | 06:15 |
column grid that we've begun here, an
we're going to position em all much more
| | 06:18 |
precisely, relative to the surrounding
building geometry.
| | 06:22 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Refining a layout with temporary dimensions| 00:00 |
A very important basic concept to
understand in Revit is the way that
| | 00:03 |
precision is approached.
In Revit what you typically do is you
| | 00:07 |
place objects in a general location and
then you refine the placement of those
| | 00:10 |
objects over time.
So I call this sketch and then modify.
| | 00:16 |
So in this movie we're going to talk about
temporary dimensions.
| | 00:19 |
And temporary dimensions is a process that
we use to take our roughly placed objects
| | 00:23 |
and modify their positions to a more
precise location.
| | 00:28 |
So what I have here on screen is a file
called temporary dims And this is just a
| | 00:31 |
copy of the completed grid layout from the
previous movie.
| | 00:37 |
The grids here have been placed in rough
locations, but I want to start controlling
| | 00:41 |
these grids in a very precise way.
I want the measurement of the grid lines
| | 00:45 |
to the face of the walls to be controlled
very precisely, for example.
| | 00:50 |
And I can do that in variety of ways in
(INAUDIBLE), and the first way I want to
| | 00:53 |
share with you is using temporary
dimensions.
| | 00:55 |
So I'm going to start by selecting grid
line a.
| | 00:59 |
What you'll see is onscreen here in
additional to all the other little
| | 01:03 |
controls and grids here you'll see a
couple dimension strings appear here and here.
| | 01:08 |
And I'm going to zoom in slightly just to
get a better look at this and you'll see
| | 01:12 |
that the dimension number is here and it's
got kind of a long random fractional
| | 01:16 |
number to it, and the second dimension is
here.
| | 01:21 |
You'll see these little blue dots showing
me the witness line locations of these
| | 01:25 |
dimensions and what they're measured to In
both cases on the left and right they're
| | 01:29 |
measured from the grid line and then back
tot he center of the wall.
| | 01:36 |
That's the default behavior.
So if I know what this value is, if I know
| | 01:40 |
how far off the wall I want this distance
to be all I have to do is click in that
| | 01:44 |
dimension and make the change.
Now this exterior wall is a generic 12
| | 01:52 |
inch wall.
You can see it there when I highlight the
| | 01:54 |
tool tip.
That means that if I want this grid line
| | 01:57 |
to be two inches off the inside face of
this wall, I could do the math and say,
| | 02:00 |
well half the distance to the wall is six
inches plus the 2 inches.
| | 02:05 |
So I could click right here and I could
put in a value of 8 inches.
| | 02:09 |
Now the way that you put in inches in a
rivet project is to either do eight inches
| | 02:13 |
or I will show you a second way in a few
moments here and I am going to press Enter
| | 02:17 |
and you will see that will move that grid
line over closer to the wall to maintain
| | 02:21 |
that distance, now I am going to select
this grid line.
| | 02:28 |
And I want to do a similar modification
but perhaps I don't want to perform the
| | 02:32 |
math this time.
Maybe I don't want to do the calculation.
| | 02:36 |
What I can do instead is using these
little small circles here I can actually
| | 02:40 |
click those grips and they will jump to
other points on the wall.
| | 02:45 |
When I click it, it jumps to the inside
face.
| | 02:47 |
If I click it again, it goes to the
outside face and then one more time it's
| | 02:50 |
back to center.
I want to do it from the inside face, so
| | 02:54 |
I'll click it again, and now the current
distance is 3 feet.
| | 02:58 |
I click on there, and this time I want it
to be just two inches.
| | 03:03 |
Instead of writing two inches which I did
moment ago my alternative is to do 0 space 2.
| | 03:11 |
When you're working in an imperial file
you do the feet first, then a space, then
| | 03:15 |
the inches, and so in this case 0 space 2
will be interpreted as 2 inches.
| | 03:21 |
you can do 2 with the inch symbol or 0
space 2.
| | 03:24 |
The choice is up to you.
They both achieve the same result.
| | 03:27 |
So lets do it again.
Change my witness line location, pick in
| | 03:31 |
the dimention, 2 inches.
Go to another location, one more time.
| | 03:37 |
The dimentions way over here this time.
Click right there, click in the value 0
| | 03:43 |
space 2 so again the same result in both
cases whether you do the space or whether
| | 03:47 |
you do the (UNKNOWN) symbol so I could
continue to work my way around this one
| | 03:52 |
here you can see the dimensional line goes
off screen, there it is right there click
| | 03:57 |
the witness line grip Clicking the value
and then the final one over here, click
| | 04:02 |
right there, clicking the value 0 space 2
now that position is all of the grids that
| | 04:07 |
are associated with an exterior wall in
their correct locations.
| | 04:18 |
However, sometimes, you know the distance
of a grid off of something other than a wall.
| | 04:24 |
Now if I select this one, what you're
going to see here is it's measuring still
| | 04:28 |
back to the center of this wall, 24 feet
in this case.
| | 04:33 |
Now if I knew what the distance was off of
that wall, then I could edit that dimension.
| | 04:38 |
But where I'd rather measure it to, is to
the grid line C, to the neighboring grid line.
| | 04:43 |
So, it's often the case where you'll know
the measurement to some other piece of geometry.
| | 04:49 |
Well, simply clicking the little blue
circle won't do the trick.
| | 04:52 |
It'll jump to points on the wall, but it
won't actually jump to the grid line.
| | 04:57 |
So, what you do instead, is you drag it,
so click the little witness line grip,
| | 05:01 |
hold down and you see now that I'm
dragging?
| | 05:05 |
I can highlight nearby geometry like grid
c, let go, and now I've associated that
| | 05:11 |
dimension to that nearby geometry and i
can click in here and put in a value.
| | 05:18 |
Now, in this case, my value is in feet and
inches.
| | 05:22 |
And the value that I want is 31 foot
eight.
| | 05:27 |
Now I can do it with the foot symbol,
which is just the apostrophe mark, or 31
| | 05:32 |
space eight.
Both would work.
| | 05:35 |
It's entirely up to you, which ever method
you prefer, press Enter, and you'll see
| | 05:40 |
grid-line D move in order to maintain that
new dimension.
| | 05:44 |
So an important, aspect of temporary
dimensions to understand is, whatever you
| | 05:49 |
have selected, is what will move, with the
temporary dimensions.
| | 05:54 |
If I select, grid line C, even if the,
dimension, was measured back to D here,
| | 06:00 |
there's the 31-8.
If I click in here and change it to some
| | 06:05 |
other value, notice that gridline C moves
in this case.
| | 06:09 |
Now I'm going to undo that with control Z.
So it's important to always pay attention
| | 06:13 |
to which object you select, and then
that's the object whose dimension you modify.
| | 06:19 |
So often in Revit you're going to start
with a rough idea of what you want.
| | 06:23 |
Whether it be walls or grids or some
objects.
| | 06:25 |
You're going to lay them out in a very
rough fashion.
| | 06:27 |
And then you're going to come back using
the temporary dimensions and do a series
| | 06:30 |
of refinements.
We call this sketch and then modify.
| | 06:34 |
And its a very common way to approach
editing with precision in the revit environment.
| | 06:38 |
In fact the word revit actually stands for
revise it.
| | 06:43 |
So the name of the product comes from this
notion.
| | 06:45 |
That we start with a simple sketched out
layout.
| | 06:49 |
And then we progressively refine it and
refine it as we learn more about our design.
| | 06:53 |
Temporary dimensions is just the first of
many ways that we have do that.
| | 06:57 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding columns| 00:00 |
Most buildings have columns in at least
some locations.
| | 00:03 |
Whether your project has one column or
hundreds.
| | 00:05 |
The process to add them is fairly simple.
Well everything includes two types of
| | 00:09 |
columns, it includes architectural
columns, and structural columns.
| | 00:12 |
We can find those on the Architecture tab.
On the column button, here's structural
| | 00:16 |
column button, and the architectural
column button.
| | 00:20 |
Typically, an architectural column is used
to represent either a column wrap, or a
| | 00:24 |
rough placement column that will then
later be replaced by the structural engineer.
| | 00:30 |
A structural column is typically used to
actually represent material that's really
| | 00:33 |
holding up the building.
So, let's start with the architectual
| | 00:37 |
columns, and take a look, and then we'll
see how that ties in later with the
| | 00:39 |
structural columns.
So I'm going to choose the column
| | 00:42 |
architecutal command.
And, let's take a look at a few of the
| | 00:46 |
settings before we get started here.
Like many other commands, that takes me to
| | 00:50 |
my modified tab, place column.
I've got some settings here on my options bar.
| | 00:54 |
And I've got some additional settings here
on the properties palette.
| | 00:58 |
So let's take a look at a few of these.
Usually you want to start by looking at
| | 01:02 |
the Type selector.
So in this case this particular template
| | 01:06 |
that we started our project from includes
three sizes.
| | 01:08 |
It's a 24 by 24, 18 by 18, and 18 by 24.
So I'm going to stick with the default 24
| | 01:13 |
by 24.
There's a few other settings here.
| | 01:16 |
We're going to talk about room bounding in
a much later movie, but moves with grids
| | 01:20 |
is a setting that we definitely want to
make sure is selected because that will
| | 01:23 |
take advantage of these column grids that
we have placed in our file.
| | 01:29 |
Now, if you want to watched the previous
movie, we laid out all the column grids
| | 01:31 |
and positioned them.
And now we're going to take advantage of
| | 01:35 |
those as the locations for our columns.
Now, you don't have to place your columns
| | 01:40 |
on grids.
You could place them freestanding in space
| | 01:42 |
with a simple click.
But, if you place them at the intersection
| | 01:47 |
of two column grids, those will highlight.
And, I'm going to click the Modify tool
| | 01:52 |
and cancel out of there.
Select this grid line, and move it.
| | 01:56 |
And what you'll notice is, that moves the
column along with it.
| | 02:00 |
So I'm going to undo that with Control z.
I'm going to select these 2 columns, and
| | 02:03 |
delete them.
And that's the basic behavior that we're
| | 02:06 |
looking for.
So let me return to my column tool.
| | 02:10 |
Go to column architectural.
And let me point out one last thing before
| | 02:13 |
we place all these columns.
Here on the options bar, we can actually
| | 02:17 |
control the height of these columns as
we're placing them.
| | 02:21 |
The default is the height.
But we can also do the depth, in terms of
| | 02:23 |
the structural column.
And the default behavior is to go up to
| | 02:28 |
level 2.
Now, if you look at my project browser,
| | 02:31 |
I'm working in a floor plan called level
1.
| | 02:33 |
So my column is going to start at level 1.
And it's going to go up to level 2.
| | 02:38 |
But if I wanted to I could make then go up
to the low roof, or up to the high roof.
| | 02:42 |
I could even make them unconnected, which
would make this setting available, and i
| | 02:46 |
could type in a manual height for these
columns.
| | 02:49 |
But in this case, I want to make sure
they're going up to level 2, the level up
| | 02:53 |
above, and then let me just zoom in
slightly here.
| | 02:57 |
And its as simple as highlighting the
intersection of the nearby column grids
| | 03:01 |
and clicking.
Let me zoom in even closer and show you
| | 03:05 |
one other really nice benefit of working
with architectural columns.
| | 03:09 |
They will automatically sense the presence
of nearby walls and merge into the wall material.
| | 03:15 |
As I place these columns, you're going to
see them merge in and marry with that wall
| | 03:20 |
material, making a very nice clean
presentation to the view.
| | 03:26 |
So let me just continue, all the way
around the file here.
| | 03:32 |
And let me click the Modify tool to finish
the command.
| | 03:36 |
So I now have an architectural column at
each grid location, and once again those
| | 03:39 |
grids are controlling the position of all
those columns, so later if we need to make
| | 03:43 |
any kind of a change, we can do so with
confidence knowing that all the columns
| | 03:46 |
are going to go along with any change we
make to the grids.
| | 03:51 |
And you do control z to undo that.
Like I said, these represent the column
| | 03:56 |
wrap, or the enclosure that's surrounding
the column, but typically there's going to
| | 03:59 |
be some sort of structural steel or some
other structural material within those columns.
| | 04:05 |
So, if I go to the column tool and choose
the structural column, these are going to
| | 04:08 |
behave in much the same way.
If we look at the choices that we have
| | 04:13 |
available on the options bar properties
palet and ribbon, we have a lot of similar choices.
| | 04:20 |
We have our drop down here, on the type
selector.
| | 04:23 |
Which gives me two different sized
columns.
| | 04:25 |
I can create a W 10 by 33 or a W 10 by 49.
We could certainly create other sizes if
| | 04:29 |
we wanted to, we would have to load in a
different family to do that.
| | 04:34 |
I am going to talk about loading families
in a later movie, so for now we were just
| | 04:37 |
going to work with the two sizes that are
here by default.
| | 04:41 |
The structural material is listed here and
there is some connection information and
| | 04:45 |
so forth, so slightly different settings
that have a little bit more to do with
| | 04:49 |
structural usage but otherwise similar
behaviours.
| | 04:53 |
We have the height parameter here, where
we're designating the height, and up to
| | 04:57 |
level 2.
Just like we saw with the architectural columns.
| | 05:02 |
Now, what I want to point out here, the
one really unique feature of structural
| | 05:05 |
columns that's really handy is.
The multiple placement options here on the ribbon.
| | 05:10 |
We can either place structural columns at
the location of the architectural columns,
| | 05:15 |
or we can place them at the intersections,
of the grids.
| | 05:20 |
Now, in this case we get almost the same
result in both cases.
| | 05:24 |
I want to use the, At Columns feature, in
this case.
| | 05:28 |
I'm going to click that.
I can make, a, window selection, around my
| | 05:32 |
entire plan.
And before I let go notice that it's,
| | 05:35 |
only, highlighting, architectural columns.
So, this, feature, is built in to only
| | 05:40 |
sense where the location of the
architectural columns are.
| | 05:44 |
And when I finish that selection, you will
see a piece of steel ghosted in at each of
| | 05:49 |
those locations.
If I'm satisfied with that selection, I
| | 05:54 |
can use this green finish check box right
here, click that, and finish the selection.
| | 06:01 |
And place the remaining columns.
Now, if I prefer, I can use this at grids feature.
| | 06:08 |
And the way this works, is, when you
select grid lines.
| | 06:11 |
It finds the intersections between those
grid lines.
| | 06:16 |
And will place columns at each of those
intersections.
| | 06:18 |
And, again, if I click finish.
I will get a column at each of those locations.
| | 06:22 |
Now I'm going to cancel out of the
command.
| | 06:24 |
I'm going to show you one last thing here.
If I select the structural columns, they
| | 06:30 |
have direction.
If we zoom in a little bit, because of the
| | 06:33 |
I shape, they can either go vertically or
horizontally.
| | 06:37 |
We didn't really have to worry about that
with the architectural columns, because
| | 06:40 |
they were square.
You can quickly rotate the columns along
| | 06:43 |
their own center point simply by tapping
the space-bar.
| | 06:47 |
So, if I tap the space-bar on my keyboard,
you going to see those columns rotate in
| | 06:51 |
90 degree implements.
So that's a really handy way to control
| | 06:55 |
the orientation of those columns.
In this movie, we looked at both
| | 06:59 |
architectural and structural columns.
Typically the structural columns are
| | 07:04 |
going to be used for the actual structural
material, what's physically holding up the building.
| | 07:09 |
The presence of architectural columns is
optional.
| | 07:12 |
It can be used as column wrapping closures
or they can actually be used as temporary
| | 07:16 |
standing locations for the columns that
are later replaced by your structural engineer.
| | 07:21 |
The exact workflow is matter for the team
to decide But both columns share the
| | 07:25 |
behaviour that they are attached to the
column grid and if the column grid lines
| | 07:29 |
move it takes the columns along with it.
| | 07:33 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Modeling BasicsAdding walls| 00:00 |
Walls are perhaps the most basic component
of any building project.
| | 00:03 |
Certainly, they are one of the first
objects that you'll want to master when
| | 00:06 |
you're learning Revit.
Walls have many settings that we can
| | 00:09 |
interact with.
And in this movie, we'll take a look at
| | 00:11 |
the basic features of the wall command.
And get started by just creating some
| | 00:15 |
simple walls.
So, on the Architecture tab, we have our
| | 00:17 |
Wall command, and it's right here.
It also has a keyboard shortcut, WA.
| | 00:21 |
So, if you like, you can just type the
letters, WA.
| | 00:24 |
If you click the drop down, make sure
you're choosing Wall Architectural.
| | 00:27 |
Okay, so any of those methods will do the
trick.
| | 00:30 |
And when I run the command, that takes me
to the Modify Place Wall tab.
| | 00:34 |
Now, this is a Context tab.
We talked about this in a previous movie.
| | 00:37 |
The left hand side of the Modify tab is
the standard, consistent set of commands.
| | 00:43 |
And, the right hand side, in this case,
has a draw panel with several shapes.
| | 00:47 |
And let's start by looking at some of
those shapes.
| | 00:50 |
Now, the first one, the default is just
the line shape.
| | 00:53 |
If you look at the very bottom, left hand
corner of the screen, there's a prompt on
| | 00:56 |
the status bar that says Click to Enter
Wall Start Point.
| | 01:00 |
So, all we have to do is click somewhere
on screen to place the first point of the wall.
| | 01:05 |
Now, if you don't move the mouse at all
it'll immediately go to a new prompt
| | 01:08 |
that'll say Enter Wall Endpoint.
If you start moving the mouse, you might
| | 01:13 |
get a different prompt, something like
horizontal in this case because I'm
| | 01:16 |
snapping horizontal or perhaps vertical.
If you're at an angle that isn't one of
| | 01:20 |
the preset angles, then it'll say this
standard prompt.
| | 01:24 |
So, sometimes it just takes moving the
mouse around, and reading through the
| | 01:26 |
different prompts.
And then you can decide where you actually
| | 01:29 |
want that second point to to go.
And I can click right there.
| | 01:33 |
Now, at this point, if I only wanted a
single wall, I could cancel out of the command.
| | 01:38 |
There's two ways that I could do that.
I can use my Escape key, or I can click on
| | 01:42 |
the Modify tool.
Now, the Modify tool cancels all the way
| | 01:45 |
out of the command.
You see how the Wall command is no longer active.
| | 01:49 |
If I use the Escape key method, than a
single escape will cancel the current draw
| | 01:54 |
mode but it will stay in the command.
Notice how it still says place wall.
| | 02:00 |
If I press Escape a second time then it
cancels all the way out.
| | 02:03 |
Now, what that's really doing is if I draw
one more straight line wall is it's taking
| | 02:08 |
advantage of this chain feature right
here.
| | 02:12 |
The default behavior of the Wall command
when you're in the line draw mode is to be chain.
| | 02:18 |
So, this imply simply means that you can
draw more then one wall connected end to
| | 02:22 |
end with the previous wall.
If I press Escape one time it's simply
| | 02:27 |
breaking the chain so that I can start
drawing a new chain of walls.
| | 02:32 |
And that's really all that means.
Now, we can also change shape.
| | 02:36 |
So, we don't have to draw just simple
straight lines.
| | 02:38 |
We can draw rectangles or polygons.
Rectangle's pretty straightforward.
| | 02:42 |
It just requires two opposite corners.
So, we can simply click any two points and
| | 02:47 |
that'll give us a rectangle.
With polygons we can do inscribe or
| | 02:50 |
circumscribe, that just means, do you
want to draw at the vertex or the face,
| | 02:54 |
when you click it, it will list the number
of sides here on the options bar.
| | 03:00 |
So, the default is this hexagon shape or I
could change the number of sides to
| | 03:04 |
anything I want, if I want to draw a
square, I can draw a square or a pentagon
| | 03:08 |
or really any shape.
We can draw a circle.
| | 03:14 |
Now, if you draw a circle, I'm going to
escape out of here a couple times, cancel
| | 03:17 |
all the way out of the command.
Notice that the circle is actually in two
| | 03:22 |
pieces, so really what a circle does is it
just draws two arcs that are connected to
| | 03:25 |
one another.
Let me go back to the Wall command or type
| | 03:29 |
WA and we have a variety of arcs.
I'm not going to look at every one but I
| | 03:34 |
am going to look at this one really
quickly, because this is actually a Start
| | 03:37 |
End Radius Arc.
And in many draw programs there is a
| | 03:41 |
similar type of arc command, like a
three-point arc and often you draw along
| | 03:45 |
the curve.
But here in Revit, if we follow the
| | 03:49 |
prompts, it says, Click to Enter Wall
Start Point.
| | 03:51 |
I'll do that.
And then it says enter arc wall endpoint
| | 03:55 |
so we actually want to draw the opposite
end of the arc and then as you can see
| | 03:58 |
we're drawing the radius of the arc next.
Okay, so just pay really close attention
| | 04:04 |
to that.
It takes a little practice at first.
| | 04:07 |
And then notice that chain works here as
well so we can do kind of neat stuff like this.
| | 04:13 |
If I move you see how it actually snaps to
the tangent?
| | 04:16 |
And I can make these nice, smooth curves
drawing several continuous arcs if I like.
| | 04:22 |
So, let me escape out of there.
I want to kind of clean things up a little
| | 04:25 |
bit here so I'm going to escape all the
way out of the command.
| | 04:28 |
Zoom out just a touch, select all of these
walls that I've drawn.
| | 04:32 |
But be careful because if you look at my
ribbon right now it says modify multi
| | 04:36 |
select, so this tells me that I've
actually got more than walls selected, I
| | 04:39 |
have several objects selected.
So, I'm going to go to my Filter button
| | 04:44 |
and in fact I also have elevations and
views selection, and I don't want those
| | 04:47 |
selected so I'm going to un-check both of
those, make sure it's only walls I have selected.
| | 04:53 |
Click OK, then I'll press the Delete key
on the keyboard to delete those walls.
| | 04:58 |
I'm going to return to the Wall command,
click the button or type WA.
| | 05:03 |
And let's take a look at the properties
next.
| | 05:05 |
Now, I'm going to talk about location in a
future movie.
| | 05:08 |
Let take a look at the level constraints
here.
| | 05:11 |
There's a base constraint.
And this establishes the lower edge of the wall.
| | 05:16 |
Now, it defaults to level one, because as
you can see down here on the project
| | 05:19 |
browser, we are currently in the level one
floor plan.
| | 05:23 |
So, that's pretty logical that that's
where the wall would start drawing from.
| | 05:26 |
Now, we also have levels two, three and
roof.
| | 05:29 |
So, over here, under top constraint, we
can actually attach the top edge of the
| | 05:34 |
wall to any one of those levels.
So, I'm going to attach it to the level
| | 05:39 |
two and I'll just draw a small wall right
there.
| | 05:42 |
I'm going to press Escape one time, change
this to up to level three, draw a second
| | 05:48 |
wall, Escape again, and then one more time
up to level roof.
| | 05:56 |
Now, if I escape all of the way out of
that command, scroll down in the project
| | 06:00 |
browser and double-click the South
elevation.
| | 06:03 |
Let me just zoom in just a little here so
that we can read the levels over here.
| | 06:07 |
You can see my levels indicated here.
This is not a one time operation that we
| | 06:12 |
just did there.
What we've actually signed is a constraint.
| | 06:16 |
So, the top edge of this wall is
constrained to this level.
| | 06:20 |
The top edge of this wall is constrained
to this level.
| | 06:23 |
If one of these levels were to move and
I'm just going to take level three here
| | 06:26 |
and just drag it manually with the mouse,
you can see that the top edge of that wall
| | 06:30 |
follows along with that.
So, this is a really powerful feature in
| | 06:34 |
the software that as you're designing
changes over time, you can make sure that
| | 06:38 |
all of the walls that are associated with
a particular level move accordingly.
| | 06:43 |
That can be a very powerful way to work
and it can be quite a time saver.
| | 06:46 |
Alright, so let me return to level one and
let's look at one last setting here for
| | 06:50 |
the walls.
Go back to the Architecture tab, click on
| | 06:53 |
the Wall tool again and at the top of the
Properties panel we have our type selector.
| | 06:59 |
I'm going to open that up.
And I'm going to scroll tot he top of the list.
| | 07:02 |
Now, here it says, Basic Wall Generic 8
inch.
| | 07:06 |
Basic Wall is in the gray bar here.
That's the name of the family.
| | 07:10 |
And then Generic 8 inch is a little
further down on the list.
| | 07:14 |
Right here Generic 8 inch.
That's the type name.
| | 07:17 |
You could see here that the Basic wall has
lots of types, we have a whole variety here.
| | 07:21 |
We have break on see and move walls ,we
have Generic walls ,we have Stud walls.
| | 07:25 |
So, what would happen if I would chose one
of these other types of walls ,like may be
| | 07:29 |
break on see and move and I'm going to
draw that ,let me roll my wheel here and
| | 07:32 |
zoom in just a touch.
All we really see is that, that wall is
| | 07:37 |
little bit thicker, so that tells us that
something is different but what I actually
| | 07:40 |
want to see is the makeup of that wall,
the construction, the internal components.
| | 07:46 |
If you look down here at the bottom of the
screen, this is our View control bar down
| | 07:49 |
here, several little icons, the scale and
several other things.
| | 07:53 |
There's this little, white square here and
if I click on it, it says Coarse, Medium,
| | 07:56 |
and Fine.
If I go to either Medium or Fine level of
| | 07:59 |
detail, it will show me the internal
structure of that wall, so coarse only
| | 08:03 |
shows the outlines.
But the medium and fine, let's zoom in
| | 08:07 |
just a little bit a more, that's starts to
show me how that wall is constructed.
| | 08:12 |
So, now if we choose some of these others
wall types and draw them you can see that
| | 08:16 |
they vary from one another in their
composition and what they're made of.
| | 08:22 |
So, there's a lot of different settings
that we can interact with.
| | 08:25 |
As we're drawing walls, we have our shapes
up on the Modify tab.
| | 08:28 |
And we have a variety of settings to
control the height and the composition of
| | 08:31 |
the wall, on both the type selector and
the Properties palette.
| | 08:36 |
So, I encourage you to spend a little bit
more time in this file, playing around and
| | 08:39 |
getting comfortable with how walls work.
Because as we said at the start of the
| | 08:43 |
movie, walls are really the most basic
component of any Revit project.
| | 08:47 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using snaps| 00:00 |
In this movie, I want to show you the
snapping behavior in Revit.
| | 00:03 |
Snaps are just simply rules that allow the
software to lock on to certain key increments.
| | 00:08 |
Either length increments or geometric
points on objects, Revit has a few useful
| | 00:12 |
snapping features.
We have our length increment snap feature
| | 00:16 |
which is tied to the zoom level in the
screen and we have Object snapping
| | 00:19 |
behavior, things like end points.
And mid points and I'd like to show you
| | 00:23 |
both of those features here in this movie.
I'm in a file called Snaps and this is
| | 00:28 |
just based on the default template.
And to show you the Length Increments
| | 00:32 |
Snapping feature, I need to zoom out a
little bit.
| | 00:34 |
So, the easiest way to do this, is to use
the zoom out two times command right here.
| | 00:39 |
So, if it's already chosen, you can just
pick it off the list otherwise you can
| | 00:42 |
choose it here from the drop down.
And that will back up the screen a little bit.
| | 00:48 |
Now on the architecture tab, I'm going to
go over here to the wall command type WA,
| | 00:51 |
and I'm just going to click any start
point.
| | 00:55 |
Now, you'll notice that the temporary
dimension says 0 so, Revit just always
| | 00:59 |
snaps relative to whatever that first
point you clicked was so, it indicates
| | 01:03 |
that as 0.
I'm going to slowly start to move my mouse
| | 01:08 |
a little bit and what you'll see is, it's
sort of jumping.
| | 01:12 |
I doesn't move fluidly, it sort of jumps
and if you look carefully at the
| | 01:15 |
dimension, you'll see that it's jumping in
four-foot increments.
| | 01:20 |
This is the length angle snapping
behavior.
| | 01:24 |
If I click my second point, that wall is
exactly 48 feet long.
| | 01:29 |
Moving in another direction, okay now that
wall is 16 feet long.
| | 01:33 |
It works at any angle so, I can do it
along angles or straight lines.
| | 01:37 |
I'm going to press Escape.
If I zoom in, and I'm using my wheel to
| | 01:42 |
zoom in.
Click a new point and start to move,
| | 01:45 |
notice that the increment has changed.
Now, it's much more fine, it's going to
| | 01:51 |
every six inches.
Now, without even clicking, I'm going to
| | 01:55 |
go back to zero and zoom in a little bit
closer and move again and, guess I got go
| | 01:59 |
a little closer still.
Sometimes it takes a little practice to
| | 02:04 |
get the right increment, there it is.
You can see that now its doing every inch.
| | 02:09 |
'Kay?
So, now if I click that wall was exactly
| | 02:12 |
four foot, ten inches'.
If I continue to zoom in very close and I
| | 02:16 |
just use my wheel to do that, now you'll
see that I'm snapping to every quarter of
| | 02:21 |
an inch.
So, what's really handy about this feature
| | 02:25 |
is, just simply in the course of your
zooming in and out, it will adjust the
| | 02:29 |
degree to which it is snapping.
So, you don't have to go back and change
| | 02:34 |
the setting, it (INAUDIBLE) does it
automatically.
| | 02:38 |
Now, where is this controlled?
I'm going to do Z+F on my keyboard for
| | 02:41 |
zoom to fit just to back out all the way
again ,I'm going to go to my Manage tab
| | 02:44 |
and it's the Snaps dialogue right here
that controls this behavior.
| | 02:50 |
So, I'm going to click on that and right
here at the top, this is the feature that
| | 02:54 |
we just witnessed.
It's the length dimension snap increments.
| | 02:58 |
Now, you'll see here that there's a number
the first number says 4 foot and then a
| | 03:01 |
semicolon and then it says 6 inches and
then a semicolon.
| | 03:05 |
So, the semi colon separate one increment
from the next.
| | 03:09 |
You can change any of these values and you
can introduce new values so, if I wanted
| | 03:13 |
to add a 2 foot snap increment I could put
it right there.
| | 03:18 |
You don't have to actually put in order, I
can just simply click OK.
| | 03:22 |
If I go back to Snaps, notice that it
reorganizes it and it put the 2 feet in
| | 03:25 |
the right sequence.
Now, let's see how that behaves.
| | 03:29 |
If I go to Architecture, click on the Wall
command, right now you can see that at the
| | 03:34 |
level of zoom I'm at, I'm getting a 2 foot
increment.
| | 03:38 |
Now, notice that if I get nearby some
other geometry, that takes precedence.
| | 03:43 |
So, in addition to the length angle Snap,
Revit will always look at nearby geometry
| | 03:47 |
and try to snap to it so, in this case I'm
getting something with a fractional
| | 03:51 |
increment clearly not on a 2 foot
increment.
| | 03:55 |
But if I move past that, then it goes back
to the 2 feet.
| | 03:58 |
Okay?
And again, if I start to zoom, I would get
| | 04:01 |
the different increments.
You can also remove increments if you
| | 04:04 |
don't want to Snap to all of those.
So, all of that is controlled in that dialog.
| | 04:09 |
Also in that dialog we see Object Snaps.
Now, if you've used any CAD program
| | 04:14 |
before, then Object snapping is a familiar
concept.
| | 04:18 |
All this geometry has certain key points.
We have endpoints at either end of a line,
| | 04:22 |
we have the midpoint halfway between.
We have quadrants and circles, we have
| | 04:26 |
perpendicular and tangent points.
You can snap to any of these things.
| | 04:31 |
I'd like you to note here in parentheses,
that each of these items has a keyboard shortcut.
| | 04:37 |
So, if you remember those, you can
actually use those on screen when Revit's
| | 04:40 |
trying to snap to a point that you don't
like.
| | 04:44 |
You can tell it no, I meant the end point
or no I meant the intersection by simply
| | 04:48 |
typing those letters.
May be just jolt these down or take a
| | 04:52 |
screen capture to keep it handy, but they
are pretty easy to remember because they
| | 04:56 |
all start with the letter S.
So, let me click OK here, and lets see how
| | 05:02 |
this behaves.
I'm going to zoom in slightly with my
| | 05:05 |
wheel, lets go to Architecture, lets click
Wall.
| | 05:08 |
Right there that little square, that's
endpoint and then here that little
| | 05:12 |
triangle, that's midpoint.
And then if I come over here and you see
| | 05:17 |
that little X right there, that's
intersection.
| | 05:20 |
So, the symbols will become familiar to
you with practice, but each of those
| | 05:24 |
little symbols indicates a different kind
of snap.
| | 05:29 |
Now, suppose I'm coming over here and it's
trying to snap to the endpoint, but I
| | 05:32 |
really wanted the midpoint.
This where I could type S+M, snap to
| | 05:37 |
midpoint and as I move around now, you'll
see that it's only seeing the midpoints of
| | 05:42 |
the various objects that I try and snap
to.
| | 05:47 |
After I click, it goes back to looking for
everything.
| | 05:51 |
So, that override with the keyboard
shortcut, is for one click only.
| | 05:55 |
And so, with the little practice you will
get the hang of those, they will become an
| | 05:58 |
important part of your arsenal.
But both the Length Increment Snapping and
| | 06:03 |
the Object Snapping, are tools that you
will just use intuitively all the time as
| | 06:06 |
you are working.
So, this features are sort of there in the
| | 06:10 |
background all the time, but just keep in
mind that you can override the behavior
| | 06:13 |
either by going to the Snap dialog.
And putting in new increments, turning on
| | 06:18 |
and off Object snaps or using the keyboard
shortcuts to over-ride on the fly as
| | 06:22 |
you're working.
| | 06:24 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Wall properties and types| 00:00 |
Most elements in Revit have both instance
and type properties walls are no exception.
| | 00:05 |
Some of the behaviors that we witness with
Walls are driven by the each individual
| | 00:08 |
instance and some are controlled at the
type level.
| | 00:11 |
If you change something at the type level.
It changes all instances of that wall.
| | 00:15 |
So in this movie I'm going to, look at
some, examples of each kind of property.
| | 00:20 |
And I have here on screen a file here
called wall properties, and I've annotated
| | 00:23 |
the file to indicate the location line
feature.
| | 00:27 |
In a previous movie we looked at a lot of
the settings of the walls but we haven't
| | 00:30 |
covered the Location Line feature yet, so
lets start with that.
| | 00:34 |
Now this wall right here is just one of
the default wall types.
| | 00:37 |
It's the exterior brick on CMU wall and it
has a base constraint of level one and
| | 00:41 |
it's unconnected at the moment.
But right here is the feature I want to
| | 00:46 |
focus on location line, and if I open that
up you'll see that there are several
| | 00:50 |
options for that.
Now, I've indicated them here with these lines.
| | 00:56 |
So, the center line of the wall should be
fairly straightforward.
| | 00:59 |
That's just the halfway point of the
overall thickness, and you can see in this
| | 01:02 |
particular wall that it ends up sort of in
the middle of the CMU somewhere.
| | 01:07 |
We've got our Finished Face Exterior and
Interior, and I'll talk about how Revit
| | 01:10 |
knows it's interior or exterior in a few
moments.
| | 01:14 |
But notice these three red lines are
indicating the core.
| | 01:18 |
The CMU in this case is the core of the
wall.
| | 01:20 |
Now, what we mean by core in Revit
terminology is this is the part of the
| | 01:23 |
wall that's actually structural, this is
the part of the wall that's holding up the wall.
| | 01:29 |
The stud and the drywall are just
finishes.
| | 01:32 |
The brick and the insulation are also
exterior veneers, those are finishes.
| | 01:38 |
But it's the CMU that's actually doing the
heavy listing.
| | 01:40 |
That's what's keeping this wall up.
So we can actually identify the interior
| | 01:44 |
or exterior faces of that Core or the
center line of the core as well.
| | 01:49 |
And that gives us our six possibilities.
Now if I switch to this view here called
| | 01:54 |
Wall Types on the project browser, I have
that same wall.
| | 01:58 |
Four times and what I'm going to show you
is what happens when we change those
| | 02:02 |
location lines.
So let's take this wall, it's currently
| | 02:05 |
wall center line and change it to finish
face exterior.
| | 02:09 |
I'll take this one, change it to finish
face interior, this one here I'll do core
| | 02:13 |
face exterior, and this one here, maybe
I'll do core center line.
| | 02:18 |
It doesn't really matter which choices I
choose.
| | 02:21 |
Now notice the grips move to those
locations.
| | 02:25 |
So there it's in the center of the core.
Here its on that outside face.
| | 02:28 |
Here its on this inside face of the core.
This one over here, it's on the inside
| | 02:32 |
face, now what we'll see here if we study
this a little bit more carefully.
| | 02:36 |
And I'll Zoom in just a touch to show you
that, is the brick is actually on the
| | 02:40 |
inside and the dry wall is on the outside.
That would make for a rather strange
| | 02:45 |
building, so the other thing I want you to
see here about the location line is,
| | 02:49 |
that's where the wall will flip.
So, the little flip grip here allows me to
| | 02:55 |
change the orientation of the wall, and
flip it around to put the brick on the
| | 02:58 |
correct side.
In this case, It's going to flip by this
| | 03:02 |
outside edge, and then this one is going
to flip by the inside edge.
| | 03:07 |
You could see it's a predramatically
different effect.
| | 03:10 |
So, the location line works together with
the flipping behavior, to help you control
| | 03:16 |
how the wall shifts.
Now, the other place that the location
| | 03:20 |
line is important is if you actually
change the thickness of the wall.
| | 03:24 |
So, if I scroll down here and I choose a
different wall type, I'm going to choose
| | 03:28 |
something that's much thinner than the
current wall.
| | 03:32 |
Like this generic six inches, notice that
it still maintains the center of that core
| | 03:36 |
material so most of the thickness was
removed from the outside.
| | 03:40 |
So those are all examples of instance
based property, but they have an impact on
| | 03:44 |
the overall layout.
Now what about a type based property?
| | 03:49 |
Well, the fact that this wall has CMU and
brick and drywall is all controlled at its
| | 03:55 |
type level.
So lets take a look at how we access those properties.
| | 04:01 |
I'm going to select any one of those
walls.
| | 04:03 |
The thing about type properties is that
you don't have to select all of them in
| | 04:06 |
order to make a modification.
You simply select one of those walls and
| | 04:11 |
then here on the Properties pallet/g.
We have an Edit Type button and I'm
| | 04:16 |
going to click that and that will load the
Type dialogue.
| | 04:20 |
Now there's a variety of settings we could
change in here, but I'm just going to
| | 04:23 |
focus on a couple.
Under Structure, I have this large Edit
| | 04:27 |
button, and if I click that, you will see
a table that lists out all of the various
| | 04:32 |
components in this wall.
The Exterior Side is at the top, the
| | 04:37 |
Interior Side is at the bottom.
So, that's how this wall knows which way
| | 04:41 |
is interior and which way is exterior.
And you can see on the exterior side, we
| | 04:46 |
have our Masonry Brick.
Let's actually widen this window here so
| | 04:51 |
we can read those layers a little bit
better.
| | 04:56 |
So Masonry Brick is on the outside.
We have an Air gap, we have our insulation
| | 05:02 |
structure, here's our Concrete Masonry
Units.
| | 05:05 |
Notice that the structure is between the
core boundary here in layer 5 and layer 7.
| | 05:10 |
Now layer 5 and 7 are just
representational, there's 0 thickness.
| | 05:15 |
But that indicates where the core starts
and ends.
| | 05:18 |
And so any element that you put between
those two is considered part of the core.
| | 05:23 |
And then that's further emphasized over
here by this structural check box.
| | 05:27 |
And that's checked on to show us that
that's actually the structural component.
| | 05:32 |
And then of course, the finished materials
on the inside of the wall are listed over here.
| | 05:36 |
Now what if I did something rather
dramatic?
| | 05:39 |
Suppose I took the substrate and I deleted
it, and I took the finish here, number
| | 05:42 |
eight, and I deleted that and then click
OK?
| | 05:45 |
I'm going to click OK again.
What you'll notice is, on all three walls
| | 05:50 |
that interior finish was removed.
That's what we mean by a Type Level modification.
| | 05:56 |
Let me show you another quick type level
modification.
| | 06:00 |
If I go back to Edit Type, lets do the
coarse scale fill pattern.
| | 06:04 |
In a previous movie we talked about
coarse, medium and fine, the level of detail.
| | 06:08 |
Well here, the Coarse Scale Fill pattern
is something that gets applied only with
| | 06:12 |
the Coarse view is displayed.
So I'm going to scroll down here and I'm
| | 06:16 |
going to choose a Solid Fill pattern.
But instead of leaving it solid black,
| | 06:19 |
which might be a little too bold, I'm
going to choose this bluish-purple color.
| | 06:24 |
Click OK, now notice that nothing changes.
I'm going to deselect the wall.
| | 06:28 |
Well that's because I'm currently in
Medium level of detail.
| | 06:31 |
So let me go to coarse and what you'll see
is again all three of those walls take on
| | 06:34 |
this color.
So those are two examples of type level
| | 06:38 |
modifications that can be preformed.
Now, naturally, deleting layers in a wall
| | 06:42 |
is something you want to think about
carefully before you do it.
| | 06:46 |
And perhaps you want to rename the wall as
well.
| | 06:49 |
So really this is just more of an exercise
to kind of show you the possibilities and
| | 06:52 |
to help you to understand what it means to
be a type level modification.
| | 06:57 |
But both types of properties are
properties that you will be using
| | 07:00 |
frequently in your Revit work.
So when you select an object just be sure
| | 07:04 |
to pay attention to what's available on
the Properties Pallet.
| | 07:08 |
And remember that if it's right here on
the main Properties Palette, then it's
| | 07:11 |
controlled at each individual object.
If it's here in the Edit Type dialogue,
| | 07:16 |
remember that it's controlling all
instances of that type.
| | 07:19 |
So it's a more global change, and if you
keep both of those tips in mind, then
| | 07:22 |
you'll be fine as you use both of these
settings throughout your work.
| | 07:27 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Locating walls| 00:00 |
In this and the next few movies, we'll
continue working with walls and begin
| | 00:04 |
laying out a two-bedroom condominium.
So, we're going to apply what we've
| | 00:08 |
learned in some of the previous movies,
and apply it here to an actual floor plan.
| | 00:13 |
What I'm working with here is a file
called locating walls, and all it contains
| | 00:17 |
is the outline perimeter of the unit, and
what we're going to focus on is the
| | 00:20 |
interior partitions.
We'll start in the Architecture tab with
| | 00:25 |
the Wall tool, you can type WA or you can
click on the tool.
| | 00:29 |
And over here on the Properties pallette,
I want to change the wall type to an
| | 00:33 |
interior type partition.
And so, there are several different sizes
| | 00:38 |
here, and I'm going to choose this one, 4
and 7/8 inch partition.
| | 00:42 |
So, that's roughly a 5 inch partition, and
it's basically a stud with a layer of
| | 00:45 |
drywall on each side, which is pretty
standard interior construction.
| | 00:50 |
Now, I am going to leave all the heights
settings.
| | 00:52 |
It's kind of be going up to level two, and
I am going to stick with the central line
| | 00:56 |
location line, I find that to be the most
logical choice for interior petitions.
| | 01:01 |
Now, if you move your mouse near an
existing wall, what you will see is that
| | 01:04 |
Revit will automatically step to that
geometry.
| | 01:08 |
So, it's filing the central line in this
wall, and it's even giving me a little
| | 01:11 |
temporary dimension here.
Now, I am not terrible concerned with the
| | 01:15 |
exact number, roughly 10 feet is close
enough.
| | 01:19 |
So, I'm going to click right at that
location, move my mouse down to about
| | 01:22 |
right here, and then pull it back over in
this direction here.
| | 01:27 |
I didn't actually do that terrible
precisely, I just sort of roughed in the
| | 01:30 |
shape that I was after, and that might be
a little bit surprising to you.
| | 01:35 |
But I want you to recall that the Revit
approach to layout is to sketch and then modify.
| | 01:42 |
So, we rough it out in roughly the
configuration we're looking for, and then
| | 01:45 |
we come back and we modify using a variety
of techniques.
| | 01:50 |
And so, on that basis, I also need
something about like this, and a couple
| | 01:55 |
walls right here, and a little closet in
this location here.
| | 02:03 |
And what you'll see is I can very quickly
lay out this entire half of the floor plan
| | 02:07 |
without too much effort being expended,
and then I can simply come back and make
| | 02:12 |
additional modifications.
I actually need one more wall in this
| | 02:18 |
location right here, which is going to
eventually be a bathroom area.
| | 02:23 |
So, that's my rough layout for this side
of the plan.
| | 02:26 |
Let me cancel all other command using the
Modify tool or double escape.
| | 02:30 |
And now let's start to clean up the
layout, and I'm going to use temporary
| | 02:33 |
dimensions as the first way to do this.
So, I'm going to start with this wall
| | 02:38 |
right here.
When I select that wall, you may recall
| | 02:41 |
from some of our previous movies that
temporary dimensions will appear.
| | 02:44 |
You may also recall that Revit chooses the
witness line locations by default.
| | 02:49 |
And in this case, we can see that it goes
to the center line of each of these walls.
| | 02:54 |
Now, we have these little grips right here
that Revit displays for us, and if you
| | 02:58 |
recall, we can select those and each time
you click on them they actually move the
| | 03:02 |
witness line location to a new location.
So, I'm going to click those several times
| | 03:08 |
until it goes to the inside faces of that
space right in there.
| | 03:13 |
And you could see that it is giving me
some what random dimension right now, 9
| | 03:16 |
foot 7 and an 8th inches in my case, your
result may vary slightly.
| | 03:22 |
Well, I'm going to just click in that
number and put in 9 feet, and the wall
| | 03:25 |
that I have selected will move to that new
location.
| | 03:30 |
I'm going to repeat the process here with
this wall, click the witness line grips to
| | 03:35 |
get it to the insides of this bedroom,
select that number and make it 10 feet.
| | 03:42 |
And that will again move that wall.
Now, here's a very common mistake that a
| | 03:45 |
lot of folks will make.
They now want to set the size of this
| | 03:49 |
closet here, and so, they immediately go
to this dimension and put in their new number.
| | 03:54 |
But what you'll notice is, the same wall
that I had selected just moved and
| | 03:57 |
actually messed up the number that I
previously typed.
| | 04:01 |
So, I'm going to select that number again
and reset it back to ten.
| | 04:04 |
What did I do wrong?
Always remember to select the object that
| | 04:08 |
you want to move.
Notice that gives me a new set of
| | 04:12 |
dimensions, they're to similar points.
So, I'll click my witness lines and now I
| | 04:17 |
can click in here and make that eight
feet.
| | 04:20 |
So, it's really important that you always
start by selecting the object that you
| | 04:24 |
actually want to move before you edit the
dimension.
| | 04:28 |
Now, this is moving along just fine and I
could continue in this fashion to position
| | 04:32 |
the rest of the walls.
But it might be feeling a little tedious
| | 04:35 |
to have to constantly move those witness
lines.
| | 04:38 |
So, what I want to talk about next is, a
setting that we can modify to change the
| | 04:42 |
behavior of our temporary dimensions.
In the background here, up here at the
| | 04:49 |
very top of my screen on the QAT, I have
my switch windows command.
| | 04:53 |
And in the background here, I have another
file open called temporary dimensions.
| | 04:57 |
And this file's included with the exercise
files if you want to open it up.
| | 05:00 |
Or you can just watch here, because really
this file is just about concepts.
| | 05:04 |
What I have here is an illustration of the
various temporary dimension settings.
| | 05:10 |
So, the default behavior is to go to
center to center as we were seeing in the
| | 05:13 |
other file, but we can change the setting
to go to either the finish face or to the
| | 05:16 |
core face.
We also can change the way it behaves when
| | 05:20 |
it comes to openings like doors and
windows.
| | 05:23 |
The default behavior is to go to the
center line of doors, but we can change it
| | 05:25 |
to do something more like this where it
goes to the openings of doors.
| | 05:29 |
The setting for that is on the Manage tab,
on the additional settings, all the way
| | 05:33 |
down here at the bottom, this command
called Temporary Dimensions.
| | 05:37 |
Let me just move this dialog out of the
way a little bit here.
| | 05:41 |
And what you can see is, for walls, we
have these four settings: center lines,
| | 05:44 |
finish face, core face, core interior.
And we have these two settings for doors
| | 05:49 |
and windows: center lines and openings.
So, my preference is for it to actually go
| | 05:54 |
to the faces of the walls and the openings
of doors and windows.
| | 05:58 |
So, you'll get this sort of behavior for
doors and windows, and you'll be out here
| | 06:01 |
at the face for walls.
So, I'm going to cancel here, go back to
| | 06:05 |
my Switch Windows, go back to my Locating
Walls Drawing File, Manage tab again,
| | 06:11 |
Additional settings > Temporary
Dimensions, and I'm going to choose Faces
| | 06:15 |
and Openings.
When I click OK, and I select the new
| | 06:21 |
wall, you'll now see the difference in
behavior.
| | 06:25 |
The temporary dimensions are automatically
going to the inside phases of the wall now
| | 06:30 |
instead of to the centers.
Which means I can go in and immediately
| | 06:35 |
change that number, and it's going to make
these modifications move a little bit more quickly.
| | 06:42 |
These two bathrooms are both 5 feet, this
one right here, as well.
| | 06:47 |
And this closet here, I'll make that seven
feet, and I'll make this 2 foot 6.
| | 06:56 |
Now, remember to do 2 feet 6, you do 2
space 6 or you do 2 feet 6.
| | 07:03 |
So, using the temporary dimensions, you
can manipulate the positions of the walls.
| | 07:07 |
So, you sketch and then modify, and then
you can quickly move the positions of the
| | 07:10 |
walls to a more precise location.
You can either manually manipulate the
| | 07:15 |
witness line grips, or you can use the
Temporary Dimensions setting on the Manage
| | 07:19 |
tab to change the behavior so that it
always goes to the faces of the walls,
| | 07:22 |
which is usually a little bit more
convenient.
| | 07:26 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the modify tools| 00:00 |
Continuing with the layout of our two
bedroom condo unit, there's lots of
| | 00:03 |
approaches we can take to the layout of
the walls.
| | 00:06 |
In this movie I would like to look at
commands like move and copy and offset and
| | 00:09 |
trim, and these are staple commands in any
(UNKNOWN) drafting program, and Revit is
| | 00:12 |
no exception.
So let's take a look at how some of these
| | 00:15 |
tools function here in Revit.
So I'm in a file called Modifying Walls
| | 00:19 |
and we're going to click over here on the
Modify tab.
| | 00:23 |
The Modify tab contains all of the tools
that we're going to look at here on this
| | 00:26 |
Modify panel.
And I'm going to start with the Move command.
| | 00:30 |
Move command has a shortcut of M+V.
Now I going to let the tool tip load here
| | 00:34 |
for a second by posing my mouse over it in
which you'll notice is that a small
| | 00:38 |
animation starts to run after a few
seconds.
| | 00:42 |
So, all of the commands on this tool
palette have these little animated tool tips.
| | 00:46 |
And they can be really helpful to give you
a sense of how these commands function.
| | 00:49 |
So I encourage you to just take a few
moments, and pause over each of those, and
| | 00:52 |
watch the animations.
So I'm going to click the Move command.
| | 00:55 |
And what you'll see is, because I clicked
the command first, and I don't actually
| | 00:59 |
have any selection on screen, the Revit is
going to prompt me to make some sort of a selection.
| | 01:04 |
If I do it this way I need to let Revit
know that I'm done selecting by pressing
| | 01:09 |
the Enter key.
Now this is just one way that we can do it.
| | 01:13 |
The alternative is to make your selection
first before you click the command and
| | 01:17 |
I'll show you that next, but I want you to
see both methods.
| | 01:22 |
After I made the selection and pressed my
Enter key, at the status line it will say
| | 01:25 |
click to enter the move start point.
Now there's a variety of ways that you
| | 01:30 |
could indicate where you want to start
moving from and where you want to end up,
| | 01:33 |
but in all cases you're picking two points
or you're indicating two points.
| | 01:37 |
You're indicating how far you want this
object to move.
| | 01:40 |
In this case let's say that I wanted to go
a distance that was equal to the width of
| | 01:44 |
this closet.
In that case, I can actually use my object
| | 01:48 |
snaps and say I want to go from this end
point to this end point and the result
| | 01:53 |
will be a movement that matches that width
and when I click you'll see that wall will
| | 01:58 |
move by that amount.
Now, a really nice thing happens with
| | 02:04 |
walls as they stay attached at both ends
where ever possible.
| | 02:07 |
So, Revit tries to keep all of the objects
connected to one another.
| | 02:11 |
If it can't do that it'll actually
generate an error message and tell you
| | 02:14 |
that it can't keep them joined anymore.
So that first move I did by selecting the
| | 02:19 |
Move command and then having it prompt me
for selection.
| | 02:23 |
In this case, I've decided that I've moved
it a little too far.
| | 02:25 |
I want to move it back a little bit and
the object is already selected.
| | 02:30 |
So now notice that if i click the Move
command it just simply goes right to
| | 02:33 |
asking me about where I want to move from
and to because it already has a selection.
| | 02:39 |
This tends to be my preference.
I tend to prefer to select the object
| | 02:42 |
first and then execute the command, but
it's really a matter of personal presence.
| | 02:46 |
Both achieve the same result.
So in this case I'm going to pick a random
| | 02:50 |
point on screen.
Start moving in the direction that I
| | 02:53 |
want to move and then I can simply type on
the keyboard how far I want to move.
| | 02:58 |
And maybe I want to go about two and a
half feet.
| | 03:01 |
So I'm going to put in 2 space 6, which as
you recall is one way that we can put two
| | 03:04 |
foot six.
I could also put 2 foot symbol 6, either
| | 03:08 |
one would work and now the wall moves
back, two foot, six.
| | 03:14 |
Now if you know how to move, you already
know how to copy because the prompts in
| | 03:18 |
the Copy command, here's the button, and
the shortcut is C + O, are exactly the same.
| | 03:24 |
Where do you want to copy from and where
do you want to copy to.
| | 03:28 |
And I'm just going to do that on screen
with two clicks.
| | 03:31 |
That will give me a new wall next to the
original.
| | 03:35 |
Now I could use Move again to move this
wall into the position where I want it.
| | 03:39 |
I actually want it down here at the bottom
of my plan.
| | 03:42 |
Or it turns out that at the end of the
wall they actually have these little grip points.
| | 03:47 |
So in this case it might actually be more
convenient to just grab that grip and
| | 03:50 |
start dragging it.
Until it snaps to the opposite wall.
| | 03:57 |
And then I can grab this grip and start
dragging it to about right there.
| | 04:02 |
Again either method is fine, if you prefer
to move you can feel free to do the move.
| | 04:07 |
There's no right or wrong way to do these
things.
| | 04:10 |
Lets direct our attention to the Trim and
Extend to Corner command next, I want to
| | 04:14 |
show you a quick example of that.
Here it is right here, T+R is the short
| | 04:20 |
cut, you use this command to create L
conditions.
| | 04:24 |
So whenever you want to make a nice corner
like we have right here you can use this command.
| | 04:30 |
So for example if I no longer needed this
part of the wall and I wanted to make that
| | 04:33 |
L back here.
I can select this as my first wall.
| | 04:38 |
And then it will prompt me to select my
second wall.
| | 04:40 |
And I can click right here.
And you see it actually trims off that
| | 04:44 |
piece right there.
Let me repeat it again from here to here
| | 04:48 |
to put it back again.
And in that case, it extended the wall.
| | 04:52 |
So this command is either a Trim or an
Extend depending on the two points you click.
| | 04:57 |
Now I'm going to use it over here to
create a small, little coat closet.
| | 05:01 |
We're going to enter our condo right in
this location here and right here, and
| | 05:05 |
here I want to make a small, little coat
closet.
| | 05:09 |
Now notice it gives me those little dash
green lines to indicate the result that
| | 05:13 |
can be really helpful to make sure you're
clicking the right stuff.
| | 05:17 |
You want to pay very close attention.
How does it know, whether or not you're
| | 05:21 |
getting this, undo, or this undo?
If you pay close attention, to the prompt
| | 05:29 |
it says, click on the part you want to
keep.
| | 05:35 |
Here or here and you can see this small
little dashed line.
| | 05:40 |
So if I want to keep that side that's the
part I click.
| | 05:44 |
If I want to keep that side that's the
part.
| | 05:47 |
So just keep that in mind as you use this
command.
| | 05:50 |
Now I need a small corridor over here to
enter the unit and then I want to join
| | 05:53 |
that up with this command and I'll be
using trim again for that.
| | 05:57 |
But before I can get to the trim I need to
actually create the new wall on the other side.
| | 06:01 |
And I can do that using any of the methods
we've talked about so far.
| | 06:04 |
Let's look at offset for that.
So, the shortcut is O+F.
| | 06:07 |
Over here on the Options bar, I want to
make sure I put in the distance that I
| | 06:10 |
want to offset I'm going to use five feet
in this case.
| | 06:14 |
Just put in five feet and press Enter.
And then as you move your mouse around on
| | 06:20 |
screen, if you highlight objects, you'll
see a small green dashed line appear where
| | 06:24 |
it would create the offset copy.
So I'm going to highlight this wall right here.
| | 06:30 |
Make sure the green dash line is down
because it can go up as well if you move
| | 06:33 |
your mouse.
So make sure it's going down.
| | 06:36 |
And then click.
And that'll give me the copied wall in the
| | 06:39 |
location that I need it.
I'll switch to Trim and Extend.
| | 06:43 |
I'm going to select this wall and, again,
remember to click the part you want to
| | 06:47 |
keep, so click down here not up here.
And when I do that it will create that
| | 06:53 |
nice angled corner.
I'm going to cancel out of there with the
| | 06:56 |
Modify tool, select this wall.
I want to make my living room area here a
| | 07:01 |
little bit larger and my kitchen over here
a little bit smaller.
| | 07:04 |
So I'm going to use temporary dimensions
in this case to do that.
| | 07:09 |
Click right here.
We've already talked about temporary dimensions.
| | 07:11 |
And make the living room 12 foot 6.
Now why would I choose temporary
| | 07:15 |
dimensions here instead of using the Move
command?
| | 07:18 |
Well you may have noticed that the
dimension I started with was some
| | 07:21 |
fractional number.
To use the Move command effectively and
| | 07:25 |
end up at exactly 12 foot 6, I'd have to
do the math and I'd have to be somewhat precise.
| | 07:30 |
The temporary dimension is a much better
job in the case you know what the final
| | 07:33 |
number needs to be.
In the case where you know how far you
| | 07:37 |
want to move, the Move command is usually
a better choice.
| | 07:40 |
So, they're both very effective.
It just depends on what you're starting
| | 07:43 |
with, and where you want to end up.
Now, over here, I need a mechanical closet
| | 07:49 |
and a small pantry.
So, I'm going to go to my Wall command and
| | 07:55 |
I'm just going to sketch these rooms in
like so, and like so, and I'll fine-tune
| | 08:00 |
and clean that up a little bit later.
Click my Modify tool to cancel out of there.
| | 08:08 |
I want to take this segment of the wall
out.
| | 08:10 |
There's a few ways I could approach that
but I want to show you a new tool for this
| | 08:14 |
purpose and that is the Split tool.
So I'm going to click on the Split tool
| | 08:18 |
and the way this works is, if you click an
object, it just simply breaks that into
| | 08:22 |
two pieces.
So, if I cancel out the command with the
| | 08:26 |
Escape key, you will see I have one wall
here and another wall here.
| | 08:29 |
Now, if I did it that way I have to then
use my trim and clean up in this corner.
| | 08:34 |
What I'm going to do instead is Ctrl+Z to
undo that.
| | 08:39 |
Go back to the Split command and it has an
option over here in the Options bar called
| | 08:42 |
Delete Inter segment.
If I remember to check that first, then it
| | 08:47 |
can be a little faster because I'll split
it precisely right here at the intersection.
| | 08:53 |
And then right here, also at the
intersection and it will split out the
| | 08:57 |
segment in between.
If you forget to do that, it's not a big
| | 09:00 |
deal, you can erase it manually or use the
Trim command as I mentioned but this can
| | 09:04 |
save you a few clicks if you remember to
do that.
| | 09:08 |
So, as you can see Revit provides many
modification tools to make your layout
| | 09:12 |
tasks simpler.
Your going to want to practice with each
| | 09:15 |
one of those and get comfortable with
them.
| | 09:19 |
You can use them very effectively here in
floor plan layout but they work any where
| | 09:22 |
in the Revit software and for a variety of
purposes.
| | 09:25 |
So make sure your comfortable with as many
of theses as possible because they will
| | 09:29 |
remain an important part of your (UNKNOWN)
arsenal
| | 09:32 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding doors and windows| 00:00 |
In the last few movies we've focused on
the layout of the walls for our two
| | 00:02 |
bedroom condo unit.
The next logical thing to do is to lay out
| | 00:06 |
the doors and windows, so here i have a
file called Doors and Windows and it's a
| | 00:09 |
completed version of the wall layout.
And we're going to look at the various
| | 00:14 |
ways that we can add doors and windows to
this layout, so let's start with the
| | 00:17 |
doors, and here on the Architecture tab
I'm going to click on the Door tool.
| | 00:23 |
And that's going to take me to the Modify
Place Door Ribbon tab and on the
| | 00:26 |
properties palette I'll see settings for
the doors that I'm placing.
| | 00:31 |
Now, the first thing I want to look at is
the type selector and if I open up the
| | 00:34 |
list here you can see at the top that I
have a single family in this project
| | 00:37 |
called Single flesh.
And it contains several types.
| | 00:43 |
Now, the default type is 36 by 84.
And I'm going to choose the 36 by 80 type instead.
| | 00:50 |
Now, that's really the only change that I
want to make here.
| | 00:53 |
If I move my mouse into the screen.
What you're going to see is, the tip tells
| | 00:57 |
me that I need to click on a wall to place
the door.
| | 01:00 |
And it's confirming that or reinforcing
that by the small circle with the line
| | 01:04 |
through it, the sort of can't place here
symbol.
| | 01:08 |
And what you'll see is as you move the
mouse around, the door will only appear if
| | 01:13 |
your cursor happens to be on a wall.
So, with that in mind you need to pay
| | 01:19 |
attention to whether or not there's a wall
under your cursor.
| | 01:24 |
Other than that it should be pretty easy
to place doors.
| | 01:27 |
Now, I'm going to start with the main
entrance to the condo unit right over here
| | 01:31 |
on this small angled wall.
An if you move slightly, what you'll see
| | 01:36 |
is some snapping behavior that we talked
about earlier in this chapter.
| | 01:41 |
The door will try to find the center of
this wall.
| | 01:45 |
So, it's trying to do that automatically.
You don't necessarily have to read the
| | 01:48 |
fractions directly to see that.
You can kind of tell that it's finding the
| | 01:52 |
center of this wall.
So, as soon as it finds the center, all I
| | 01:55 |
have to do is click and it will place that
door.
| | 01:58 |
Now if I want to continue placing 36 by 80
doors, I can just continue to move around
| | 02:03 |
my plan and find other locations and
again, this one will snap nicely to the center.
| | 02:10 |
And this one will also snap to the center,
but notice that it's flipping the wrong
| | 02:14 |
way, it's swinging opposite of what I
might like.
| | 02:18 |
It'd be a little difficult to get into
this room if the door was swinging to the
| | 02:22 |
left like this.
So, notice as you move the mouse it can
| | 02:27 |
swing in or out of the room but to get it
to swing left or right, what you actually
| | 02:31 |
have to do is tap your spacebar and that
will swing it either left or right.
| | 02:38 |
So, I'm going to click it to place it
right there and I'll place another one
| | 02:41 |
right here.
Again, I can tap my spacebar.
| | 02:46 |
Notice that this time, we're getting a 6
inch dimension there off the end wall.
| | 02:51 |
If you recall the movie on Snaps, we
talked about the default snapping behavior.
| | 02:56 |
That was not limited to just walls, so you
can use that to your advantage here with
| | 03:00 |
doors as well to maintain standard size
jams.
| | 03:04 |
So, I can get a six inch jam there or a
six inch jam over here or really anywhere
| | 03:08 |
that I want to see that.
So, I'm going to continue to place these,
| | 03:13 |
some of these in the center, some of them
with the six inch jam, like so.
| | 03:17 |
That's all of the single swing doors that
I need, but I need to add a few more doors.
| | 03:24 |
I have some closets that require bi-fold
doors and I have a patio down in the
| | 03:27 |
living room at the bottom of the plan that
I want to put in a nice double door.
| | 03:32 |
So, I don't have those door families
currently loaded in this project.
| | 03:37 |
As you can see, all I have is single
flush.
| | 03:39 |
So, what we're going to do is remain in
the door command.
| | 03:43 |
And over here on the Ribbon, we can choose
this Load Family button.
| | 03:47 |
And I'll click it.
And that will bring up the Load Family dialogue.
| | 03:51 |
And I'm in the out of the box standard US
imperial library.
| | 03:56 |
Your screen might look slightly different
but you should have a Doors folder.
| | 04:00 |
And if you open that up, there are several
doors that ship with the software.
| | 04:06 |
Now, the easiest way to tell what's here
is to click the first item and then use
| | 04:10 |
the arrow on your keyboard to slowly page
through all the available doors that are
| | 04:14 |
included here.
And you'll see the previews changing over
| | 04:19 |
on the right.
And so, you can see there's quite a few
| | 04:21 |
varieties for us to choose from.
Now, what I'm going to choose here is my
| | 04:26 |
Bi-fold-2-Panel door at the top, hold down
my Ctrl key and select the Bi-fold-4-Panel
| | 04:32 |
door and then the Double Glass 2.
Double Glass 2 has these muntin patterns
| | 04:40 |
on the glass.
So, I'm going to select all three of
| | 04:43 |
those, click Open, it will load those
three families into my project.
| | 04:50 |
And then if we look at our type selector,
we now have those families and their types
| | 04:54 |
available to us.
So, there's several sizes of each of these
| | 04:59 |
families included in the file now.
So, I am going to choose the 68 by 80
| | 05:05 |
double glass door and I am going to put
one centered down here on the outside of
| | 05:10 |
the living room to get out to our patio.
I am going to change to the double Bi-fold
| | 05:18 |
door and I will do it 72 by 80.
And I'm going to put that one right here
| | 05:24 |
on this closet.
And then I'll switch to the Single By-fold
| | 05:29 |
door and I'm just going to do a 30 by 80
in this case.
| | 05:33 |
And I'm going to place one here and I'm
going to place one here and one right here.
| | 05:40 |
Now, I did those a little bit sloppy on
purpose.
| | 05:43 |
In particular, I am going to zoom in on
this closet right here and show you that,
| | 05:46 |
the way that came in, its kind of right up
against this wall here.
| | 05:51 |
It's also flipping the wrong way.
So, don't feel like you have to undo and
| | 05:55 |
start over again when situations like this
occur.
| | 05:59 |
All you have to do is select it and it got
its own flip grips and you can flip it and
| | 06:02 |
its got temporary dimensions and I am just
going to make that one inch so that it
| | 06:06 |
gives me a small one inch (INAUDIBLE) on
either side.
| | 06:11 |
So, things like that are very easy to fix
after you place them using the same
| | 06:14 |
methods that we used with walls before,
temporary dimensions and flip grips.
| | 06:20 |
So, as a final touch of this plan, I'm
going to go to the Window tool.
| | 06:23 |
If you scan the Ribbon tabs in the
Properties palate it almost exactly the
| | 06:27 |
same as placing doors.
We have a type selector here, we have
| | 06:32 |
choices on this list, we have a lot of the
same choices over here.
| | 06:37 |
What you'll notice here on the list is all
I have is a fixed window, which may not be
| | 06:41 |
the best choice for a condominium plan.
So, just like we were able to do with
| | 06:46 |
doors I'm going to choose Load Family,
scroll down to my Windows folder and
| | 06:50 |
choose a more appropriator type window.
In this case, I'm going to choose a
| | 06:56 |
Casement Double with Trim, open it up.
Pick my desired size.
| | 07:02 |
There is a few different choices
available.
| | 07:04 |
I'll use a 48 by 48.
And I'll place one in each of the rooms
| | 07:09 |
that need a window.
Click the Modify tool.
| | 07:14 |
And that takes care of our door and window
placement.
| | 07:17 |
So, placing doors and windows is a simple
matter of choosing the Tool and clicking
| | 07:21 |
on the wall where you want it to go.
Remember that you have temporary
| | 07:25 |
dimensions to fine tune their placement.
So, if you don't have the family or type
| | 07:29 |
that you're looking for in your project,
you simply click the Load Family tool, go
| | 07:32 |
out to your Library on the hard drive,
choose the one you want, load it in and
| | 07:36 |
place it in your project.
| | 07:39 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using constraints| 00:00 |
So I'm going to add a little bit more
smarts to some of the dimensions here in
| | 00:04 |
my file.
So Revit offers us a few different kinds
| | 00:07 |
of constraints that we can work with and
I'd like to show you a few of those here.
| | 00:10 |
So I'm in a file called constraints and
this is just a version of our two bedroom
| | 00:14 |
condo, and I'm going to start in this area
down here.
| | 00:19 |
Just zoom in a region on this closet here.
And you can see two small problems.
| | 00:26 |
One is that I don't have a whole lot of
room for the doorway right there so I
| | 00:29 |
might want to reduce the size of this
closet slightly.
| | 00:34 |
And two, this door in the closet's not
centered.
| | 00:36 |
Now, perhaps I'm going to consider a few
different positions for this door.
| | 00:42 |
So what I can do is build a relationship
between the door and the closet.
| | 00:49 |
And it's going to start with a permanent
dimension.
| | 00:52 |
Now, up until now we've done everything
with temporary dimensions, but up here on
| | 00:56 |
my Quick Access toolbar is the Aligned
Dimension tool.
| | 01:00 |
The shortcut is DI.
Permanent dimenstions are, just as their
| | 01:04 |
name implies, they remain a permanent part
of your drawing file.
| | 01:09 |
They don't go away, in other words, when
the objects are deselected, like
| | 01:12 |
temporaries do.
Now, you could see here that it's
| | 01:16 |
defaulting to highlingting the center line
of the wall, and there are two ways I can
| | 01:20 |
change that.
I can use this drop down over here on,
| | 01:23 |
the, options bar.
Or I can press the tab key on my keyboard
| | 01:28 |
to shift to one of the other faces.
Now in this case I moved my mouse slightly
| | 01:34 |
to thee exterior face and I'm able to tab
between center and exterior, if I move my
| | 01:38 |
mouse slightly to the interior face I can
tab between those two choices, and i want
| | 01:42 |
to go to the exterior face.
And that's going to be my first witness
| | 01:48 |
line location of this dimension.
Then if I move around on the door you'll
| | 01:53 |
see there's lots of choices inside the
door that I can use and I'm going to
| | 01:56 |
locate this center line of the door right
here.
| | 02:01 |
And then finally use my tab again to get
the inside face of this closet, and the
| | 02:05 |
final click is to place were I want the
dimension to go, so I've got the three
| | 02:09 |
witness line and then I will just place
the dimension out here somewhere, now you
| | 02:13 |
could see the numbers are completely
random There is few little controls
| | 02:17 |
floating next to the dimensions.
I'm going to talk about the locks in just
| | 02:23 |
a few moments.
We're going to look at this one right now,
| | 02:26 |
Toggle Dimension Equality.
If I just simply click that, that will
| | 02:30 |
actually move the position of the door and
center it between the two witness lines
| | 02:34 |
that I asked for.
I'm going to click my modify tool to
| | 02:38 |
cancel out of here, and now I'm going to
select this wall and this is where we
| | 02:41 |
start to benefit from this constraint.
The equality constraint is not a one time operation.
| | 02:50 |
In other words it didn't just move the
door and that's it.
| | 02:52 |
Its an on going live constraint or what
I'm calling smart seer.
| | 02:57 |
So I'm going to select this wall, click on
this dimension, and I'm going to make that
| | 03:01 |
number four feet.
And notice that when this wall moves, that
| | 03:06 |
equality constraint is maintained and the
postion of the door shifts as well.
| | 03:11 |
So you could move this wall, to several
locations and you'll see it will continue
| | 03:16 |
to modify and update.
I'm just going to use my dimension here
| | 03:20 |
and set it back to four feet.
Now, let's look at another example of some smarts.
| | 03:25 |
We'll look at that lock constraint next.
I'm going to zoom over here.
| | 03:28 |
Or I just use my wheel to drag over and
zoom, and I'm going to come up and choose
| | 03:32 |
my align dimension again or DI.
Highlight the wall, press my tab key to
| | 03:38 |
get the inside face and this time I can
actually choose the face of the door.
| | 03:45 |
And set a dimension here.
And lets say that this dimension is
| | 03:49 |
important enough to me that I want to make
sure that gets maintained even if the
| | 03:52 |
closet shifts around.
All I have to do is click this small
| | 03:57 |
little lock icon right here, that will
lock that dimension and now if this wall
| | 04:00 |
were to move, It will maintain that
relationship with the door.
| | 04:06 |
The door has to stay in that location.
It doesn't matter whether I move it left
| | 04:10 |
or right.
I'm going to go ahead and undo that.
| | 04:14 |
Okay.
But I'm going to leave the lock.
| | 04:16 |
Now let's look at one more example.
Loaded here in the background I have
| | 04:19 |
another file called Equality.
It's also included with the exercise files.
| | 04:24 |
Let's open that up.
I'm going to zoom in region here on these
| | 04:27 |
four offices.
We'll be working more with this file later
| | 04:31 |
in the course, but for right now I've got
the file provided.
| | 04:35 |
And you can see that these four offices
are all different sizes.
| | 04:38 |
So using my dimension one more time, align
dimension, and highlighting each of these walls.
| | 04:48 |
And I'm just doing the center lines right
now, and I'll place the dimension out here.
| | 04:52 |
So just like we saw a moment ago, I can
click the little Equality toggle, and it
| | 04:57 |
will respace all of those walls and make
all of these offices equally sized.
| | 05:05 |
It's a live constraint just like the
others, so if I move one of the walls,
| | 05:09 |
you'll see it re-spaces all of the walls
accordingly.
| | 05:13 |
Now I am getting an error here because,
that was kind of a sloppy change because
| | 05:17 |
now all these walls are intersecting these
doors and Revit's saying, "just so you
| | 05:20 |
know, you've got wall right in the middle
of your doors there so you might want to
| | 05:23 |
do something about that".
So, what I'm going to do about that is
| | 05:28 |
just simply Undo.
But you see that the offices are now all
| | 05:31 |
equally spaced.
Now as the last thing that I want to show
| | 05:36 |
you here in this movie, the equal equal,
what we're seeing here on the dimension
| | 05:39 |
string, we can actually customize.
Okay?
| | 05:43 |
So, this is a permanent dimension as you
can see when nothing's selected, the
| | 05:46 |
dimension remains on screen.
And what Rivet default to is showing the
| | 05:50 |
little eq symbol on each of those
dimensions, so it doesn't actually tell us
| | 05:54 |
what those values are, but you can change
that if you want to.
| | 05:59 |
I'm going to select the dimension and over
here on the properties pallet you have
| | 06:03 |
actually three choices, the equality text
is what we are seeing ,the eq We can also
| | 06:07 |
choose the value, and if I apply that
you'll see it actually shows the numerical
| | 06:11 |
value and they're all the same.
Or, we have this feature here, equality formula.
| | 06:19 |
Now if I choose that and I apply it, the
formula that it's defaulting to is not a
| | 06:24 |
very useful formula because If I keep the
dimensions selected and edit its type.
| | 06:32 |
Now you may recall we talked about the
difference between instance and type
| | 06:35 |
properties in an earlier movie.
We were talking about walls at that time,
| | 06:40 |
but annotation objects like dimensions
also have instance and type properties and
| | 06:44 |
so if I edit the type of the dimension
string.
| | 06:49 |
And scroll down, the formula is controlled
down here.
| | 06:54 |
So the equality text is eq that's were we
could change that, so if you want to write
| | 06:58 |
out the work equal remember earlier we
were seeing eq repeated we could change it there.
| | 07:04 |
The formula here is just set to total
length which is why I am seeing Just the
| | 07:08 |
total length of the dimension.
Just probably not very useful.
| | 07:13 |
So, I'm going to click this button.
And in this dialog I'm going to select
| | 07:18 |
Total Length, and I'm going to remove
that.
| | 07:22 |
And then, over here, I have, different
things that I can include.
| | 07:25 |
So what I'm going to say, is Number of
Segments and I'm going to add that.
| | 07:30 |
And then the Length of the segment and I'm
going to add that, and then as a suffix to
| | 07:34 |
Number of Segments I'm just going to put
in the at symbol just like you would use
| | 07:38 |
in email and I'm going to click OK and OK
again and now I'll get something that I
| | 07:41 |
think is a little bit more useful.
It's telling me I have four at and then
| | 07:48 |
the distance of one of those segments.
And of course you could do any variation
| | 07:53 |
you want, so I encourage you to go edit
type and play with some other
| | 07:56 |
combinations, until you arrive at the one
that matches you office standards.
| | 08:02 |
So, you can see that using either lock
constraints or equality constraints adds
| | 08:06 |
an additional level of smarts to our
models.
| | 08:10 |
And they're not only one time
modifications that give us value but
| | 08:14 |
they're ongoing constraints that remain
applied until we choose to come back and
| | 08:18 |
remove them and help maintain design
intent in an ongoing fashion.
| | 08:24 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding plumbing fixtures and other components| 00:00 |
Our two bedroom condo unit is coming along
nicely, but it takes a little bit more
| | 00:03 |
that just walls, doors and windows to make
a physical building layout.
| | 00:07 |
So in this movie, we'll look at the
Component tool, which is the tool we use
| | 00:10 |
to bring in a variety of miscellaneous
items.
| | 00:14 |
As a rule of thumb, if you don't see a
dedicated tool for the item you're trying
| | 00:17 |
to insert, it's probably going to be under
the Component Tools.
| | 00:22 |
So, in other words, if I wanted a door, or
a window, or column, I have Buttons for
| | 00:25 |
those, but I don't see a button for
toilets or for furnaces or for washer dryers.
| | 00:31 |
So, it's a pretty good bet that I'm
going to find those items under Component.
| | 00:36 |
It's sort of a catch all button for all
the miscellaneous items that you want to
| | 00:39 |
insert in a model.
So when I click on the Component tool, It
| | 00:43 |
will take me to the modify place component
tab.
| | 00:45 |
And if I open up the list, you can see
that what's loaded in my default template
| | 00:49 |
is a rather eclectic list.
I have a desk, a parking space, and a tree.
| | 00:55 |
So as you can see, we really do have a
variety of items to choose from here.
| | 00:59 |
However, None of the items on that list
are the items that I actually want to add.
| | 01:04 |
So we're going to to go right over here to
Load Families, same as we did in the
| | 01:07 |
previous movie with doors and windows.
And that will take us to the standard, out
| | 01:12 |
of the box library.
So you might want to familiarize yourself
| | 01:15 |
with the folder structure by spending some
time looking around at what's provided here.
| | 01:20 |
So for the first item, I want to bring in
a furnace for the utility room.
| | 01:23 |
So I'm going to go to the Mechanical
folder, and then there's a single folder
| | 01:26 |
in there, Architectural.
And then I'm going to choose an Air Side
| | 01:31 |
Component, and finally the Furnaces
folder.
| | 01:34 |
The Furnaces folder contains just a single
family called furnace, so I'm going to
| | 01:38 |
select that.
And I'm going to open it up.
| | 01:43 |
Now you'll see the item appear, directly
on my cursor, and, I can actually place
| | 01:46 |
it, where ever I would like it to go.
I call this a Free Standing Family because
| | 01:51 |
there's no restrictions on its placement.
If you recall the previous movie where we
| | 01:55 |
placed, windows and doors, those were
actually wall hosted families and, if you
| | 01:59 |
recall, unless your cursor was on top of a
wall You got the small little circle with
| | 02:02 |
the line through it, so if you see that
sort of indication it tells you that the
| | 02:06 |
object replacing requires a host, but in
this case because I am getting the symbol
| | 02:10 |
right away it tells me this object does
not require a host and I can just place it
| | 02:13 |
wherever I like, now like we've seen in
other movies I can tap the spacebar And
| | 02:16 |
this item will actually rotate in ninety
degree increments.
| | 02:25 |
Another interesting little trick that we
can do is if your mouse happens to be
| | 02:29 |
highlighting something that's at a
different angle, and then you tap the
| | 02:33 |
spacebar, the object will actually match
the orientation of that new object.
| | 02:39 |
So in this case it'll match the angled
wall.
| | 02:41 |
And if I tap it again, it'll rotate ninety
degrees And if I want to reset the
| | 02:45 |
rotation I just move out into empty space
and tap one more time and i am back to
| | 02:49 |
this standard rotation.
So I am going to spin it around this way,
| | 02:54 |
bring it over here and place it kind of in
this location right here in my utility room.
| | 03:01 |
Give it a little bit of room all the way
around like so.
| | 03:04 |
Now I am going to stay in the component
command but I need to load a new component
| | 03:08 |
so I am going to go back to load family.
and this time I want to scroll down here,
| | 03:15 |
and locate the specialty equipment folder,
double click that.
| | 03:21 |
Them I'm going to the domestic folder, and
in here there's actually several items.
| | 03:26 |
So if I just click the first item and use
the Arrow key on my keyboard, I can scroll
| | 03:30 |
through and see that we have several items
to choose from.
| | 03:34 |
Well, I'm going to need a washer and a
dryer, so I'm going to select that washer,
| | 03:37 |
hold down my Control key, select the
dryer.
| | 03:40 |
I'm also going to need a range and a
refrigerator.
| | 03:44 |
So, with the Control key held down, I'll
select all four of those items and click
| | 03:48 |
Open, and it will load those four families
into my project.
| | 03:53 |
When it's done, you'll see the last item I
loaded.
| | 03:56 |
In this case, the range is on my cursor.
I can tap my Space bar to rotate it
| | 04:00 |
around, and then I'll place it over here.
And notice that it will try and snap to
| | 04:05 |
the wall, so that's kind of handy.
Change to a different item, like my dryer.
| | 04:12 |
(SOUND) Choose my size, (SOUND) spin it
around, and I can place it right there.
| | 04:21 |
Choose my washer, pick a size, rotate it
around.
| | 04:27 |
See I was trying to find the orientations
here, I gotta to find a spot where it's
| | 04:31 |
not going to want to snap to an angle,
there we go.
| | 04:35 |
Place it right there next to the dryer and
then finally my refrigerator.
| | 04:42 |
And I'll just place that one like so.
We can move that a little bit later.
| | 04:48 |
Let's load one more family.
We're going to go to the plumbing fixtures
| | 04:52 |
folder this time.
(SOUND) Architectural and then fixtures
| | 04:55 |
and then Water Closets.
And I will find a, two versions of a
| | 04:59 |
domestic toilet.
Now, there is a 2D version and a 3D version.
| | 05:04 |
Sometimes your choice here will depend on
performance considerations, if you are
| | 05:09 |
doing a very large project hundreds of
thousands of square feet.
| | 05:15 |
Adding a lot of 3D toilets can increase
the file size and slow performance.
| | 05:20 |
In this case we're doing a small
condimiuim building and we only need a
| | 05:23 |
couple of toilers, so I don't really think
the difference would be noticeable.
| | 05:27 |
So if you want to use the 3D or the 2D
it's really up to you.
| | 05:30 |
I'm going to choose the 3D version, click
Open.
| | 05:33 |
And even though I've chosen the 3D
version, let me just roll my wheel here
| | 05:36 |
and zoom in a touch.
Notice that it still gives me a 2d symbol
| | 05:40 |
in plan view.
So, I'll show you the 3D view in just a
| | 05:43 |
few minutes, and we'll see the difference
there but it still gives me a nice 2D
| | 05:46 |
version here in plan.
I am going to tap my space bar, rotate
| | 05:50 |
around once again it will hghlight the
nearby wall, space bar couple times and
| | 05:55 |
the nearby wall.
So let me cancel all of this command
| | 06:01 |
clicking the Modify tool and I promise to
look at the 3D.
| | 06:05 |
There is a really simple way that we can
check our progress here in 3D and that is
| | 06:08 |
up on the access toolbar appear the Q80 we
can click this small little 3D house icon
| | 06:12 |
and it almost looks like a little bird
house.
| | 06:16 |
And we'll click on that, and that will
take us into what Revit calls a default 3D view.
| | 06:23 |
Now if I scroll down here on the project
browser, we now have a 3D branch on our
| | 06:27 |
project browser, and if I expand that.
the name of the default 3D view has these
| | 06:32 |
little curly bracket views around here.
So I often call it curly bracket 3D.
| | 06:36 |
Now you can rename that if you want to,
but that's just the default name.
| | 06:38 |
Now, navigation-ally, you have a couple
ways you cans pin this around and get a
| | 06:42 |
better look.
because obviously we can't see any of that
| | 06:45 |
equipment that we just placed.
So we maybe want to tip this down and peek
| | 06:49 |
inside a little bit more.
You can use the view cube over here on the
| | 06:52 |
right hand side, or you can just orbit the
view actually using your wheel mouse, so
| | 06:57 |
in either case let me show you both
methods.
| | 07:03 |
If I come over here to the view cube and
click and drag it, click, hold down and
| | 07:06 |
drag it, that's one way that I can spin
this around...
| | 07:11 |
Now I'm dragging the cube, so I have sort
of freeform motion here.
| | 07:15 |
If I drag the little circle at its base
this little turntable, that will spin in
| | 07:19 |
the model but it will limit the height, it
won't change the height so it'll just sort
| | 07:23 |
of spin it around as if it was literally
on a potters wheel.
| | 07:28 |
Now if you hold your Shift key down on
your keyboard An then drag with your wheel
| | 07:33 |
pushed in.
You can kind of do a similar thing.
| | 07:38 |
So here you can see that's another way
that I can orbit this around.
| | 07:42 |
An, what I'm going to do is kind of tip it
up a little bit, so we can start to see
| | 07:45 |
down into here.
If I roll the wheel forward, zoom in,
| | 07:49 |
there's the toilet in 3D.
Zoom back out.
| | 07:53 |
And then let me hold the Shift and spin
around again.
| | 07:57 |
And kind of get a better look here.
There's our washer dryer, and our range,
| | 08:03 |
and our furnace.
So anytime you'd like to kind of see how
| | 08:06 |
things are shaping up in a 3D view, all
you have to do is click that little bird
| | 08:09 |
house icon and then use one of the
orbiting methods that I just showed you to
| | 08:12 |
spin around and get a better look at
stuff.
| | 08:17 |
So any time you need another component in
your file that's not readily available,
| | 08:21 |
all you have to do is click the Component
tool, go to the load family.
| | 08:27 |
Browse through your available library and
load in the components that you'd like to use.
| | 08:31 |
In the next movie we'll look at other
places where we kind find content in
| | 08:34 |
online libraries.
So that's another option that we'll have
| | 08:37 |
available to us
| | 08:38 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Autodesk Seek| 00:00 |
Revit shifts with the fairly substantial
library of family components that you can
| | 00:03 |
access quickly and easily through the Load
Family tool that we saw on the previous movie.
| | 00:08 |
However, even with this resource, you will
quickly find that there is items lacking
| | 00:11 |
from the out of the box offerings.
You could of course build this items
| | 00:14 |
yourself and we have a chapter devoted tot
he family editor later in the course.
| | 00:18 |
There are many websites that offer Revit
content as well, and so in this movie what
| | 00:22 |
I'd like to do is look at the website
that's actually hosted by Autodesk.
| | 00:26 |
And it's called Autodesk Seek, and in
fact, it's actually built right here into
| | 00:29 |
the product, so it's very easy to get
here.
| | 00:32 |
So you can see here I'm in a file called
Using Seek, and it's a version of the file
| | 00:35 |
we were working on in the last movie.
And I've just added one or two additional
| | 00:40 |
components, a few countertops and a hot
water heater.
| | 00:43 |
i'm going to go to the Insert tab, and
over here on the right hand side, is the
| | 00:46 |
Autodesk Seek panel.
And the way this works, is you simply
| | 00:51 |
click in this field and input what you are
looking for as a search, and it will go
| | 00:55 |
out to Seek and look for the items.
So, in this case I'm going to type in Bath Tub.
| | 01:02 |
Press Enter, and that will load my default
web browser and search for bathtubs.
| | 01:08 |
Now you'll see that it takes me to
Autodesk Seek and it's searching Revit
| | 01:12 |
Content and it puts in the Search query
that I ask for here.
| | 01:15 |
Here's all my results, now there might be
dozens if not hundreds in some cases.
| | 01:20 |
It really depends on what your search
criteria is.
| | 01:24 |
In this particular case I'm going to limit
the search.
| | 01:26 |
You can see here that there are lots of
manufacturer provided content that shows
| | 01:30 |
up here.
So there's several Koller items and if I
| | 01:32 |
scroll down there might be other
manufacturers like Sterling Plumbing and
| | 01:36 |
so on.
For this particular example I'm going to
| | 01:40 |
limit the content source over here to the
generic item.
| | 01:43 |
These would be items that are provided
actually by Autodesk.
| | 01:46 |
And so rather than go and pick a specific
manufacturer but feel free to explore the
| | 01:50 |
manufacturer content on your own if you
like.
| | 01:53 |
And I'm going to stick with this very
simple rectangular Bath Tub here.
| | 01:57 |
You can see there's a Preview and I'll
click Bath Tub right there and you could
| | 02:01 |
see that it comes in several different
file formats.
| | 02:04 |
So, typically what you want to do is
choose the latest version that's available.
| | 02:08 |
So, I'm going to choose 2011 in this case
and there's two option up here.
| | 02:13 |
We can download it to Autodesk 360 if you
have such an account, or you can click the
| | 02:17 |
drop down here.
And say download it to your local and
| | 02:21 |
that's what I'm going to do.
And so, I'm going to click that and then
| | 02:24 |
click the button, you may have to accept
an agreement.
| | 02:27 |
So be sure you read the terms and
conditions and then check this and click accept.
| | 02:31 |
And then it will ask you what you want to
do with the file that you're downloading.
| | 02:35 |
Now the exact steps that I'm following
here might vary if you have a different
| | 02:38 |
web browser, but it should look something
like this.
| | 02:41 |
We can either save the file to our hard
drive or we can open it directly in Revit,
| | 02:44 |
which is actually what I'm going to do,
that'll save me a step.
| | 02:49 |
So this will open it directly in Revit.
And it actually opens it in the Family Editor.
| | 02:53 |
Now, I don't want to get into any of the
details of the Family Editor just yet.
| | 02:56 |
We're going to cover that in a later
chapter.
| | 02:58 |
All we really need to do here is come over
here to this button up on the Ribbon, Load
| | 03:02 |
Into Project, and click that.
And it will take this item that we have
| | 03:07 |
open in the Family Editor and it will load
it directly into my current project.
| | 03:12 |
Now you could see the size that it's
bringing in, it's kind of small so if I
| | 03:16 |
open up this list here, it loaded the
family bathtub and lots of different sizes.
| | 03:23 |
Now my toilet room are five feet so a 60
by 30 inch size ought to do nicely.
| | 03:29 |
So I'll choose this 60 by 30 inch, and I
will tap the space bar a few times, and
| | 03:34 |
place it right in that corner there.
Pan over here, place another one in that
| | 03:42 |
corner right there.
Now I'll press Escape to cancel out of the
| | 03:47 |
command and, if I wanted to I could
continue performing additional search
| | 03:52 |
queries in seek and looking for other
content.
| | 03:57 |
So seek is Autodesks online offering that
provides access to lots of online content.
| | 04:03 |
Both provided by Autodesk and by several
manufactures.
| | 04:07 |
So I encourage you to take some time and
do some searches on Seek, and get
| | 04:10 |
comfortable with the offerings that are
available there.
| | 04:14 |
I think you'd find it's a vast resource
that you will find very useful in your projects.
| | 04:19 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Wall joins| 00:00 |
so, a two bedroom condominium floor plan
has come along quiet nicely, and we are
| | 00:03 |
almost done, but we have small finishing
touches to complete.
| | 00:07 |
I am in a file here called wall joints.
And if you recall, when we are laying out
| | 00:11 |
the interpretations, we ended up with some
undesirable conditions over here and over here.
| | 00:17 |
I'm going to use my zoom in region and
zoom in on this location, and you may
| | 00:20 |
recall that we have these really sharp
corners here with the walls come together.
| | 00:26 |
In addition to that, if I zoom in even
closer over in his location, you will see
| | 00:29 |
that I've got this masonry wall here and
here with the cross hatching inside, and
| | 00:33 |
it's joining one way over here with the
neighboring wall and a different way over here.
| | 00:39 |
Now, when I look at this, I would really
rather have the masonry pass all the way
| | 00:43 |
through here and have it interrupt this
wall here.
| | 00:47 |
So, I want this wall to pass through this
wall.
| | 00:49 |
Now, we can actually control that with a
command called Edit Wall Joints.
| | 00:52 |
So, if you go to your Modify tab and on
the Geometry panel, you'll find the Wall
| | 00:56 |
Joints tool right here.
So, I'm going to click that.
| | 01:01 |
Now, the way this works is, you move your
mouse around on screen and it will
| | 01:04 |
highlight with a square any intersection
that you have on the screen there.
| | 01:10 |
So, what I'm going to do is click right on
this intersection to make that the focus
| | 01:14 |
of this tool.
That will activate the configuration
| | 01:18 |
Options here on the Options bar.
The way this works is you can choose from
| | 01:22 |
a butt or a miter condition, and you have
several different conditions that you can
| | 01:26 |
toggle through.
So, the default behavior is a butt
| | 01:30 |
condition, a miter would look like that.
Probably not what I want in this case, and
| | 01:35 |
so, let's stick with a butt condition.
And each time I click next or previous, it
| | 01:40 |
will toggle through the available Options.
So, all I need to do to get the condition
| | 01:46 |
I'm after is click Next until it displays
the way that I like, and then if I'm
| | 01:49 |
satisfied with that, I can click the
Modify tool to cancel out of the command,
| | 01:53 |
and that completes the operation.
So, it's pretty simple and straight
| | 01:58 |
forward approach.
Let's zoom over here and take a look at
| | 02:01 |
these two conditions.
Here is my Edit Wall Joints.
| | 02:06 |
I'm going to click on this intersection
here.
| | 02:08 |
Now again, with a but condition it would
just be between this and this, which
| | 02:10 |
frankly we wouldn't notice any difference.
But what I have here now is a third Option
| | 02:15 |
because of the acute angle here.
So, I'm going to choose the Square Off
| | 02:19 |
option, and that's exactly what it'll do.
(INAUDIBLE) Is it will make a nice squared
| | 02:23 |
of condition there.
Let me click on this condition here.
| | 02:26 |
Do Square Off, it'll square it off this
way.
| | 02:30 |
Or if I like I can click Next and it will
square it off that way.
| | 02:33 |
So, you choose whichever one that you
want, I'm going to go with that one.
| | 02:38 |
And then when I'm satisfied, I click the
Modify tool, and that completes the wall
| | 02:41 |
joint edits.
So, editing wall joints is a pretty simple
| | 02:45 |
process to undertake.
You just simply click the Wall Joint tool,
| | 02:48 |
you apply the focus to the inner section
that you want to clean up, and then you
| | 02:52 |
use the next and previous options and the
other Options in the Options bar to decide
| | 02:56 |
what condition you are after.
| | 03:00 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Links, Imports, and GroupsLinking AutoCAD DWG files| 00:00 |
Revit supports the import and export to
many popular CAD formats.
| | 00:04 |
Chief among them is the DWG format used by
AutoCAD.
| | 00:08 |
So it's quite likely that some of your
projects will have the need for at least
| | 00:11 |
one DWG at some point.
So in this movie, I'd like to look at the
| | 00:15 |
process to link in a DWG file.
We can also embed a DWG, but in this movie
| | 00:19 |
I want to look at the linking process.
When you link a DWG.
| | 00:23 |
You maintain a connection back to the
original file.
| | 00:26 |
And sort of that original file changes in
a new way you can actually go to a dialog
| | 00:29 |
and reload to capture this latest changes.
So mean to file called linkCAD and its
| | 00:34 |
just created from the default
architectural template and there is no
| | 00:36 |
geometry in here at the moment.
I am going to go to the insert tab and
| | 00:40 |
click the LinkCAD button.
Now what you will see here is there
| | 00:43 |
actually are several different file
formats that we can link in.
| | 00:46 |
And as I said we are going to focus on the
DWG for the time being but the process
| | 00:48 |
would work nearly the same for any of
these other file formats.
| | 00:52 |
With the exercise files, I have a few
different files included, and I'm going to
| | 00:55 |
choose this one here, AutoCAD floor plan,
and you can see the preview over here on
| | 00:58 |
the right.
It's just a simple floor plan of basically
| | 01:02 |
the condo layout that we were working with
in the last chapter.
| | 01:05 |
So, let's look at some of the settings
here in the middle.
| | 01:07 |
Let's start with colors.
There's a few different ways we can treat
| | 01:10 |
the color information coming in from the
imported CAD file.
| | 01:13 |
We can force it to black and white or we
could either invert or preserve to
| | 01:16 |
maintain it in color.
Now we'll talk about black and white in a
| | 01:19 |
later movie.
Invert and preserve, the only real
| | 01:22 |
difference is if you look at the preview
over in the upper right hand corner.
| | 01:26 |
You can see that the colors are very
bright primary colors.
| | 01:29 |
That's pretty common in an Auto CAD file,
but, they might not look so good on the
| | 01:32 |
white background here in Revit.
So, if we chose preserve, we would get
| | 01:36 |
those bright primary colors.
But if we choose invert instead, it'll
| | 01:39 |
take all those color values and it will
reverse them, so that they look a little
| | 01:42 |
bit nicer on the white background.
Now CAD files are organized in, either,
| | 01:46 |
layers or levels.
Autocad DWG files use layers.
| | 01:50 |
Microstation uses levels.
And you can bring in all of those layers
| | 01:53 |
or levels or you could specify to bring in
just certain ones.
| | 01:57 |
Now if you're very familiar with the file,
you can choose to specify and pick from a list.
| | 02:01 |
But in this case, I'm going to choose all
and bring everything in.
| | 02:04 |
You can always go later and turn on and
off the layers that you don't want to see.
| | 02:09 |
For units all the standard measurement
systems are available and Revit usually
| | 02:12 |
does a pretty good job of auto detecting
the correct units.
| | 02:16 |
So I recommend that you start with auto
detect, and if for some reason it doesn't
| | 02:20 |
correctly interpret them then you can undo
and reimport and choose a specific unit
| | 02:24 |
off the list.
Now, sometimes Revit will generate error
| | 02:28 |
messages when it's bringing in a CAD file
because it finds certain lines that are a
| | 02:32 |
little bit skewed.
Revit calls those "off access lines," and
| | 02:36 |
they have this check box here to kind of
auto correct that problem for you so that
| | 02:39 |
you don't generate the error.
So, I recommend you leave this turned on.
| | 02:44 |
Now, under positioning, we have a lot of
options.
| | 02:46 |
We can use center to center, we can do a
manual placement, an automatic placement.
| | 02:51 |
For this example, I'm going to choose
origin to origin.
| | 02:53 |
Now, that will take the origin, or the
zero-zero point in the CAD file, and it
| | 02:56 |
will line it up with the origin in the
Revit file.
| | 03:00 |
Now, if I move this box out of the way
here, the origin in the Revit file is
| | 03:02 |
usually right about here in the middle of
the screen.
| | 03:05 |
Kind of in the middle of this location
between all of these elevation marks.
| | 03:09 |
So that's the location it will use.
The final setting I want to consider is
| | 03:12 |
over not he left, the current View Only
check box.
| | 03:15 |
Now it may be checked for you, it may be
unchecked.
| | 03:17 |
Revit remembers the last setting that you
chose.
| | 03:20 |
The choice here determines how Revit will
interpret the cad data coming in.
| | 03:26 |
If you check current view only, which is
what I want to do in this case, I want to
| | 03:28 |
make sure it is checked.
It will treat this CAD data as view
| | 03:32 |
specific geometry in other words it will
be similar to text, or dimensions, or tags
| | 03:36 |
in Rivet and it will only appear in the
view the (UNKNOWN).
| | 03:40 |
So if you look over here in my Project
browser in the background you can see that
| | 03:44 |
I am in level 1 floor plan that's a bit
bold.
| | 03:47 |
If I open up level two or the 3D view or
one of the elevations.
| | 03:51 |
This CAD file will not appear in those
views as long as current view only is
| | 03:54 |
turned on.
If I un check it, then it will treat the
| | 03:57 |
CAD data as part of a model.
And so it would show in all views
| | 04:02 |
regardless of the one that it was brought
in.
| | 04:05 |
In the next movie we will look at example
of turning off the Current View Only setting.
| | 04:09 |
So for this example I want you to make
sure Current View Only is checked.
| | 04:13 |
And then we'll go ahead and click Open.
Now, as you can see, the colors have
| | 04:17 |
reversed from what they looked in the
preview.
| | 04:20 |
So the walls in particular are nice bright
blue instead that bright yellow color.
| | 04:24 |
If I move my mouse around the file, you'll
see a box highlight around it.
| | 04:29 |
So when you have a linked file Revit just
highlights it with a box all the way
| | 04:32 |
around, and if you were to click to select
it, you'll see the entire object select.
| | 04:37 |
So it doesn't matter which object.
You can't reach into the individual
| | 04:40 |
elements, you pick the entire file.
Now, if you look where that corner of that
| | 04:44 |
box is, you can see that it's right about
there, at the location where I indicated
| | 04:48 |
would be the origin of this Revit model.
Now, if I select the file, you'll notice
| | 04:53 |
that it has a push pin on it.
That's another by product of using the
| | 04:58 |
origin to origin option and that just
simply prevents you from accidentally
| | 05:02 |
moving this file.
Now, you could always unpin it if for some
| | 05:06 |
reason you decided that you needed to move
the file.
| | 05:09 |
So it's perfectly fine to unpin it if you
no longer want it at the origin.
| | 05:13 |
I'm going to undo that with control z.
I'm going to re-select it, and I'm
| | 05:16 |
going to pin it again.
Now as you may recall from the selection
| | 05:19 |
toggles movie in chapter two, we can also
get to the same options down here on the
| | 05:22 |
right hand side of the status bar.
So here we actually have an example of two
| | 05:26 |
of those situations.
This is a linked CAD file, and it's also pinned.
| | 05:32 |
So if you recall, the select drop down
here, under the modified tool, has some
| | 05:36 |
options to prevent links or pinned
elements from being selected.
| | 05:41 |
So if I unchecked select pinned elements,
for example, I can no longer highlight or
| | 05:46 |
select this CAD file.
Now we also have a different option for
| | 05:51 |
select links.
Now, right now they're both turned back
| | 05:54 |
on, so I can select again.
But if I turn off Select Links now I can
| | 05:58 |
no longer select it.
Now it's not necessary to uncheck both.
| | 06:02 |
One or the other will do the trick.
But in either case, what that would do is
| | 06:06 |
prevent you from accidentally selecting
this CAD file, and moving it with other
| | 06:10 |
modifications that you make.
So it can be a little bit safer way to
| | 06:14 |
work to maintain this file just as
essentially a reference.
| | 06:18 |
Now I'm going to zoom in on the CAD file
and let's talk about one of the reasons we
| | 06:22 |
might want to have this link in the first
place.
| | 06:25 |
A very common scenario might be that you
actually want to start converting what you
| | 06:29 |
see here in this file into Revit geometry.
Now unfortunately there's no automatic convert.
| | 06:35 |
We can't just click a button somewhere and
have it convert the geometry.
| | 06:37 |
But what we can do is very quickly and
easily trace over this CAD file.
| | 06:42 |
And if I go to the Architectural tab,
click the Wall tool.
| | 06:46 |
And I'm going to choose the 12 inch
generic wall here.
| | 06:48 |
What you're going to see is, there's a
really handy feature that we can take
| | 06:51 |
advantage of here.
Notice that Revit would find the center
| | 06:55 |
line between two parallel lines in the CAD
file.
| | 06:59 |
That's going to make really easy for me to
click and start tracing over that
| | 07:03 |
underlying CAD file and doing that very
precisely.
| | 07:07 |
I am going to add couple of walls there,
zoom in a little bit closer change to a
| | 07:11 |
smaller size like a 5 inch generic.
And you don't even have to do this
| | 07:16 |
terribly precisely.
I'm just going to draw a wall making sure
| | 07:20 |
that it's at the center.
That's what I'm concerned about press
| | 07:23 |
escape one time, make sure this wall is at
the center.
| | 07:27 |
Now in some cases you'll be able to turn
the corner but in other cases you don't
| | 07:30 |
even really have to worry about it too
much.
| | 07:33 |
And the reason for that is it's very easy
to take these walls we've begun drawing
| | 07:37 |
and then use Revit Modify tools to kind of
clean it up.
| | 07:40 |
So, I'm going to go to these tools here,
we've got trim and extend with a single
| | 07:44 |
element or with multiple elements.
Now, I want to take both of these walls
| | 07:48 |
and extend them out to this one out here,
now let me cancel out of my wall command.
| | 07:53 |
Go to my Modify tab.
And I'm going to choose that trim and
| | 07:55 |
extend multiple elements.
This lets me pick a boundary edge one time.
| | 07:59 |
And then select more than one object that
I want to extend to that.
| | 08:03 |
Now, I want to stay in this command, but I
want to reset my boundary edge.
| | 08:07 |
So I just click an empty space to do that,
pick a new boundary edge.
| | 08:12 |
Extend this one and this one.
Click an empty space to reset.
| | 08:16 |
Pick a new boundary edge.
Extend this one.
| | 08:18 |
Empty space to reset.
Here and here.
| | 08:21 |
Empty space to reset.
Here and here, and so I can quickly take
| | 08:24 |
these walls and kind of extend them and
clean them up with one another.
| | 08:29 |
Now you see one of the advantages of
bringing the CAD file in in color.
| | 08:34 |
Notice that the underlying color starts to
disappear as we begin to trace over it
| | 08:37 |
with the Revit elements.
And so in a really large floor plan if you
| | 08:41 |
were doing this work you would be able to
tell what you had completed and what still
| | 08:44 |
needed to be done.
By simply noticing where the color (UNKNOWN).
| | 08:50 |
Now you may also notice that I'm drawing
the walls directly over openings, so I'm
| | 08:54 |
going to go back to the Architecture tab,
pick on the Door tool.
| | 08:59 |
Choose a size and these are Revit elements
now so they will automatically cut holes
| | 09:03 |
in these Revit walls.
And if we go to a 3D view, hold the shift
| | 09:08 |
key down orbit around you will start to
see that what I am left with is Revit
| | 09:12 |
geometry that's been created very
precisely over the underlying CAD file.
| | 09:18 |
But notice the CAD file does not displayed
in this view, that's because when we first
| | 09:23 |
brought it in, we checked that box for
Current View Only.
| | 09:27 |
And so the only view that shows the CAD
file is the Level 1 floor plan.
| | 09:32 |
All the other views, it's invisible.
Later, if the original owner of the CAD
| | 09:36 |
file sends me an update I can go to the
Insert tab.
| | 09:40 |
Click Manage Links, go to CAD formats,
select it here and reload it.
| | 09:44 |
And I'll get the latest changes to that
CAD file.
| | 09:47 |
So any time you need to use a cad file in
your Revit projects, its a simple matter
| | 09:50 |
of just linking it in, placing it where
you want to go.
| | 09:54 |
And then you can use that CAD file in a
variety of ways such as tracing it over to
| | 09:57 |
create Revit geometry as we've see here.
| | 10:00 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating topography from a DWG link| 00:00 |
In this movie we'll look at another very
common scenario where you will import CAD
| | 00:03 |
data into your Revit project.
And that's when you receive data from an
| | 00:07 |
outside civil Engineer.
There is no Revit civil Engineering package.
| | 00:11 |
Therefore most civil engineers are either
using autoCAD or microstation.
| | 00:16 |
So, you're going to get the data from them
in either DWG or DGN format.
| | 00:21 |
Now, I'm in a file here called CADtopo,
and in this example I'm going to bring in
| | 00:24 |
another DWG file.
But if you were bringing in a DGN, the
| | 00:28 |
process would be virtually the same.
So I'm going to go to the Insert tab and
| | 00:33 |
click on the Link CAD button.
So this time I'm going to select AutoCAD Siteplan.
| | 00:37 |
It's a DWG file.
And it's actually one of the sample files
| | 00:40 |
that ships with AutoCAD.
It just contains some 3D lines
| | 00:43 |
representing the contour lines of the
project.
| | 00:47 |
Now I'm not going to change most of the
settings down at the bottom.
| | 00:49 |
I'm going to leave them the way they were
set in the previous import that we did in
| | 00:52 |
the last movie.
But I am going to make sure that I am
| | 00:55 |
using origin to origin here for the
positioning.
| | 00:58 |
That's usually pretty important when
you're bringing in a civil file because
| | 01:01 |
they've probably associated with a
particular origin.
| | 01:04 |
And over here, it's very important that I
uncheck current view only.
| | 01:08 |
The way to think about current view only.
In the last movie we used that in order to
| | 01:12 |
force it to display in one view and that's
helpful to prevent it from displaying elsewhere.
| | 01:18 |
But in this case, I want to take the CAD
file and turn it into 3D geometry and I
| | 01:22 |
can only do that if that's unchecked, so
in other words.
| | 01:27 |
It has to be visible in all views.
Revit has to think of this CAD file as a model.
| | 01:32 |
And so we tell it it's a model by
unchecking current view only.
| | 01:36 |
So I'm going to go ahead and click Open.
And when the file comes in, it's a little
| | 01:40 |
bit larger than the file that we had
before, or the setup in this file.
| | 01:45 |
So I'm going to type zf.
For zoom to fit, and it will zoom out, and
| | 01:48 |
you can see that I have this site plan
here and the box around it simply
| | 01:51 |
highlights and shows me that it's a CAD
file.
| | 01:55 |
Now, If we take a look at this file in 3D.
I'm going to click the small little
| | 02:02 |
Birdhouse icon over here to generate my
default 3D view.
| | 02:07 |
And then I'm going to hold my Shift key
down and start orbiting with the wheel mouse.
| | 02:13 |
You can see that this file has some height
to it particularly when I look at it from
| | 02:17 |
edge on.
And you can see that those contour lines
| | 02:22 |
are set at heights above the ground.
So, you probably want to spend the first
| | 02:27 |
few moments just sort of investigating the
file and kind of understanding what's here.
| | 02:32 |
Now, I'm going to return to the site plan
view, double-click that on the Project
| | 02:36 |
Browser here and in this area right here,
it's pretty clean.
| | 02:41 |
So, I'm going to do a zoom in region.
Like so.
| | 02:45 |
And before I turn this into a Topo
Surface, or a Topography surface here in
| | 02:49 |
Revit, I need to know a little bit more
about this file.
| | 02:54 |
When you select it, the entire thing will
highlighjt because it's a single
| | 02:57 |
continuous CAD file at this stage.
Up here on the ribbon we have a Query button.
| | 03:04 |
And I can click that button and what this
will allow me to do is to reach in and
| | 03:08 |
touch the individual line work inside the
CAD file.
| | 03:13 |
So you see how I can come in here and pick
any of these individual lines.
| | 03:18 |
What I want to know is what layer that
line work is on.
| | 03:22 |
So I'm going to make a note of this layer,
CFDEP Index, and make a note of this layer.
| | 03:30 |
CFDPINT, those two layers are the contour
lines that are used in this file.
| | 03:37 |
The rest of the geometry that's here,
these lines and all of this other stuff.
| | 03:41 |
I don't care about any of that.
I don't want to generate topography from that.
| | 03:45 |
So that's the information I need to know.
I'm going to click the Modify tool to
| | 03:48 |
cancel the query and I'm ready to move
onto the next step.
| | 03:52 |
Now the next step is to take this CAD file
and use it to generate a three dimensional
| | 03:56 |
topographic surface right here in Rivet.
I do that by going to the Massing and Site
| | 04:02 |
tab, and I'll click on the Topo Surface
button.
| | 04:07 |
The default behavior here is the place
point option.
| | 04:11 |
Place point would require me to
individually place multiple points on the
| | 04:16 |
screen at different elevation heights.
You can see right here, that you can put
| | 04:21 |
in your elevation height and I would
literally have to place one point at a time.
| | 04:26 |
In order to start generating the surface
and you can see that as you place more
| | 04:30 |
points it start connecting them together
to create a surface.
| | 04:34 |
Now, if I did that for this file I'm
going to undo those four points.
| | 04:40 |
It would take me quite a long time because
as you can see just in the small area that
| | 04:43 |
I'm zoomed in here it would require quite
a few points.
| | 04:48 |
Fortunately, right next to the place
point, there's this Create From Import
| | 04:52 |
button and I can choose the Select Import
Instance option.
| | 04:58 |
And that's going to allow me to click on
the CAD file and generate the points
| | 05:02 |
directly from that CAD file.
Now the reason I did the query in the
| | 05:07 |
previous step is because I don't want to
generate points from all the layers in the
| | 05:11 |
CAD file.
I want to click Check None and I only
| | 05:15 |
want to generate then from those two
layers that I queried a moment ago.
| | 05:20 |
So I've got those two selected and I am
going to click OK and it does takes a few
| | 05:23 |
minutes for it to process.
But I think you'll agree even with that
| | 05:28 |
short wait it was considerably faster than
it would take me to generate all of those
| | 05:32 |
points manually.
I'm going to zoom in slightly here.
| | 05:39 |
Imagine how long it would take to place
each and everyone of those points.
| | 05:44 |
So if you were doing this manually, you'd
be in for a long hall.
| | 05:48 |
So, I'm going to zoom back out.
In fact, I'm going to zoom to fit here.
| | 05:53 |
And up here on the ribbon I'm going to
click Finish Surface and that will
| | 05:57 |
complete the creation of this topographic
surface.
| | 06:02 |
Now here in the site plan you can kind of
see its the odd shape thing here.
| | 06:06 |
And this out here, the rectangular border,
that's the CAD file.
| | 06:10 |
So here is the topo, here is the CAD file.
Let's go to 3D and I am going to do two
| | 06:13 |
things here to make this a little easier
to see.
| | 06:17 |
I am going to select the CAD file first,
in 3D it's actually got a box around it
| | 06:20 |
instead of a rectangle and I will select
it.
| | 06:23 |
And I can temporarily hide the selected
object.
| | 06:26 |
I do that down here on the View Control
bar with the this little Sun glasses icon.
| | 06:30 |
I'm going to click that and choose Hide
Element.
| | 06:34 |
When you go into Hide mode, you'll get a
message up here, Temporary Hide Isolate.
| | 06:39 |
That let's you know that something is
temporarily hidden.
| | 06:42 |
You use this just whenever you want to get
something out of the way.
| | 06:44 |
Okay that's distracting right now.
Let me get it out of the way so I can get
| | 06:47 |
a better look at what I'm working on.
Over here also on the View Control bar we
| | 06:52 |
have our Visual Style popup and it's this
little white cube and white cub is hidden line.
| | 06:58 |
I want to switch to Shaded mode.
And then that will shade this topo surface
| | 07:03 |
here in a color.
And now, if I orbit around, it's a little
| | 07:06 |
easier to understand what we've created.
Now, the effect is somewhat subtle across
| | 07:12 |
the expanse.
But this is a rather large site plan.
| | 07:15 |
But if we zoom in a little bit, you can
sort of see that it's created this three
| | 07:19 |
dimensional surface that matches the
contour lines in that CAD file.
| | 07:24 |
So, if you get data from a civil engineer,
either DWG or DGN format.
| | 07:28 |
It's pretty easy to link it in as a CAD
file, query the layers to figure out what
| | 07:31 |
layers contain the contours.
And then use those contours to generate a
| | 07:36 |
topographic surface and then use that
surface as the basis for the ground plain
| | 07:40 |
to build your building.
| | 07:42 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding CAD inserts| 00:00 |
There is a lots of ways to use CAD data in
your revit projects.
| | 00:03 |
Sometimes you don't need to maintain a
link back to the original CAD file.
| | 00:07 |
In such cases you can simply import the
CAD file and embed it directly in your
| | 00:11 |
revit project.
The most common scenario where this might
| | 00:14 |
occur is bringing in detail drawings.
Most firms have large libraries of
| | 00:18 |
standard details that they have
accumulated over the years.
| | 00:22 |
It's pretty common that a lot of those
standard details would have been generated
| | 00:25 |
in a program such as AutoCAD.
So as you make the move to Revit rather
| | 00:29 |
than redraw all of those details, you
might want to reuse and leverage some of
| | 00:32 |
that existing data and just simply import
them into your objects.
| | 00:37 |
So in this movie, we're going to simply
look at the process we could follow to
| | 00:40 |
import a legacy cad detail and use it in
our other project.
| | 00:45 |
So, I'm in a file called import detail And
I want to bring in a CAD file in here.
| | 00:49 |
So at the moment I don't really have a
good view anywhere in the project browser
| | 00:54 |
in order to do this import.
So I'm actually going to create a new view
| | 00:59 |
to receive this detail.
Revit gives us a view types specifically
| | 01:03 |
for this purpose so if I go to the view
tab.
| | 01:07 |
We can create a drafting view, so it looks
like this little t square icon right over
| | 01:12 |
here, and I'm going to click on that.
And, what it will ask me is what name I
| | 01:19 |
want to call this, so I'm going to call
this AutoCad details, and, what scale I
| | 01:23 |
want that drawing to be.
So, I'm going to stick with the default
| | 01:29 |
one half inch equals a foot.
And I'll click OK.
| | 01:31 |
And what I get is a blank sheet of paper.
Now I could do anything that I want on
| | 01:36 |
this blank view.
I could start drawing.
| | 01:38 |
I could import stuff.
It's really up to me.
| | 01:41 |
Unlike the other views in a Revit project,
a drafting view is not actually linked to anything.
| | 01:47 |
So that's why we're not actually seeing
any of our project data in this view.
| | 01:51 |
So it's a completely disconnected view for
this purpose I'm going to go to the insert tab.
| | 01:57 |
And this time, I'm going to choose import
CAD.
| | 02:02 |
Now, if you watched the last few movies,
we did link CAD.
| | 02:05 |
Now, I should note that a lot of CAD and
BIM managers actually prefer to use Link
| | 02:09 |
CAD exclusively.
So I'm going to talk about some of the
| | 02:13 |
reasons why, both in this, and the next
movie.
| | 02:16 |
But for now, I want to show you the
process of import CAD.
| | 02:20 |
The major difference between import and
LinkCad, is that, when we import.
| | 02:24 |
There is no link back to the original
file.
| | 02:27 |
So if the original file changes, you would
have to delete the import, and reimport it
| | 02:31 |
in order to get the latest change.
That's the major difference.
| | 02:36 |
Here's a file called ACAD Detail.
And down here at the bottom, I'm going to
| | 02:39 |
change a couple of the settings.
Now, first of all, the current View only
| | 02:43 |
setting is now grayed out.
So, when you import, that's not even an option.
| | 02:47 |
So, we can ignore that.
Down here, under colors I am going to
| | 02:51 |
assume that when I bring this detail in, I
am going to want to print the detail along
| | 02:55 |
with my every other project.
So, rather than bringing it in in color
| | 02:59 |
this time, I am actually going to force it
all to black and white.
| | 03:02 |
I'm going to bring in all the layers and
let it auto detect the units.
| | 03:06 |
But as far as positioning goes this time
I'm going to do it manually, and I'm going
| | 03:10 |
to set my cursor at the center point of
the detail.
| | 03:15 |
Now the reason I'm choosing the center
point is, I don't really know where the
| | 03:18 |
origin of the detail is.
So I could choose the origin and it might
| | 03:22 |
be way off screen.
So using the center point guarantees that
| | 03:26 |
the image will be on my cursor when I
start to place it in.
| | 03:31 |
And you'll see what I mean when I click
Open here.
| | 03:34 |
And there it is right there.
So you notice how the cursor is right at
| | 03:37 |
this sort of geometric center of the
detail.
| | 03:40 |
And what this allows me to do is just
place it wherever I'd like it to go.
| | 03:45 |
Now, I'm going to zoom in using zoom in
region, z, r if you want to type it, on
| | 03:59 |
the detail And give myself some room.
I'm going to bring that same detail in
| | 04:13 |
again right next to the original and show
you that we actually do have control over
| | 04:17 |
how it comes in.
The way that line weight is handled in
| | 04:22 |
Revit and AutoCad is quite different.
In AutoCad files are organized into layers.
| | 04:28 |
Those layers typically have colors and
it's usually those colors that control the
| | 04:32 |
line weights.
Now, it doesn't have to always be that way
| | 04:35 |
but that's probably the most popular way
to do it in auto cap.
| | 04:39 |
When we bring it in to a Revit project, we
have to let Revit know that that's what's
| | 04:43 |
happening and tell it to key into that.
Over here on the import panel, there's a
| | 04:49 |
tiny little icon right here.
Now you remember, these things were called
| | 04:52 |
dialogue launchers.
We talked about that in one of our earlier movies.
| | 04:56 |
So, when I click it, it launches a
dialogue.
| | 04:59 |
And in this case, it's the Import Line
Weights dialogue.
| | 05:03 |
Now what I have here is a long list of
numbers.
| | 05:06 |
255 to be exact and those numbers
represent the color numbers in the AutoCAD file.
| | 05:13 |
Now, what you see here is that every
single one of them is set to a pin weight
| | 05:16 |
one at the moment and this is why my
detail back here in the background is so
| | 05:19 |
lifeless because every single color was
interpreted the same way.
| | 05:25 |
Well what I can do is either come in here
and click in a field and start changing
| | 05:28 |
the numbers, or to save a little time here
I've actually created a language file and
| | 05:32 |
saved it out to the hard drive and we can
load that in.
| | 05:37 |
Now because I've just typed over one of
the value its just warning me that I am
| | 05:40 |
going to be overwriting that and I am
going to say no I don't need to save that change.
| | 05:46 |
Now I'm going to change this to my desktop
and go to my exercise files.
| | 05:51 |
And here in the chapter five folder, I
have this file here called detail lineweights.
| | 05:56 |
Now, this is just a simple text document.
All these files are, are just txt files.
| | 06:02 |
But when I open it up, what you'll see is,
if you scroll through this list here, some
| | 06:06 |
of the line weights have changed.
Like this color number 31 for example is
| | 06:11 |
now a pen weight three.
An a little bit further down, we might
| | 06:15 |
find some others like this (INAUDIBLE),
131 here.
| | 06:19 |
Or even further down here's a pen weight
six.
| | 06:22 |
So the file contained a bunch of settings
that told Revit what pen weights it should use.
| | 06:28 |
For each of these color settings.
Now, before we click OK here and dismiss
| | 06:31 |
the dialogue, I should note this note down
here at the bottom of the screen.
| | 06:37 |
These values only apply to lines and
layers set to the default line weight in
| | 06:40 |
the source file.
If Autocad uses the line weight property,
| | 06:44 |
then these settings are ignored, and if
you think about it, that's perfectly logical.
| | 06:49 |
Why would I want to use the colors to
generate line weights If there's already a
| | 06:52 |
line weight assigned.
So, where this comes into play, is if the
| | 06:56 |
AutoCAD user didn't use the line weight
feature, an instead is using the color
| | 06:59 |
feature to control line weights.
So I'm going to click OK, an then I'm
| | 07:04 |
going to choose import CAD a second time.
select my detail.
| | 07:08 |
Leave all of the settings the same.
Place it over here, zoom in, and you can
| | 07:13 |
see that the line weights are now a lot
more potent.
| | 07:19 |
Okay, we have a lot more punch.
We have a nice outline around the edge.
| | 07:22 |
This is a very bold line here.
The entire drawing reads a lot more graphically.
| | 07:26 |
So that means, I can simply select this
one, and I can delete it.
| | 07:31 |
And that's my completed detail file.
At this stage, that detail is ready to go.
| | 07:37 |
I can place it on a sheet and I can print
it right along with my revit project.
| | 07:42 |
If you want to reset your line weights
back to the way they were by default, you
| | 07:45 |
can go back to the dialogue launcher,
click Load again, and I've provided a
| | 07:49 |
reset file.
Which just resets everything back to one.
| | 07:54 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Import tips| 00:00 |
I'd like to wrap up our look at importing
and linking CAD files in Revit projects
| | 00:03 |
with just a handful of tips that you might
want to keep in mind when you're working
| | 00:06 |
with CAD files.
So, I'm in a file here called Importing
| | 00:10 |
Tips and I'm in a drafting view that has
an embedded CAD file in, you can see that
| | 00:13 |
file right here.
So, the first thing I want to do is look
| | 00:16 |
at the Query tool in a little bit more
detail.
| | 00:19 |
We've discussed this is a previous movie
but if we click on query what we haven't
| | 00:22 |
discussed yet is, these buttons down here.
Now, you'll notice that there's a Delete
| | 00:27 |
button and a Hide in View button.
Now, that item that I just selected, this
| | 00:30 |
hollow metal frame right here, you can see
is currently on a layer called A Detailed Bold.
| | 00:35 |
And then down here, I could either delete
that layer or hide it in the view.
| | 00:39 |
Now, I'll show you delete in a minute.
Let's do Hide in View right now.
| | 00:42 |
So, I'm going to click that.
And you're going to see that, that element disappears.
| | 00:46 |
Now, it turns out that was the only
element on that layer.
| | 00:48 |
So, that's the only element that
disappeared.
| | 00:50 |
But if we repeat the process with one of
these leader lines here, you can see
| | 00:53 |
that's on a layer called A-Anno-Note.
And if I hide that, then the effect is a
| | 00:58 |
little bit more dramatic because you'll
see that all of those notes were on that
| | 01:01 |
same layer.
So, it makes it really easy for us to go
| | 01:06 |
in and hide layers that we no longer want
to see.
| | 01:10 |
And now I'm going to press Escape to
cancel out of the query command.
| | 01:12 |
How would I get those layers back again if
I later decided that I wanted to redisplay
| | 01:16 |
any of that information?
Well, if you go to the View tab.
| | 01:22 |
And look for the Visibility/Graphic
overrides command.
| | 01:25 |
Now, this has a shortcut VG and you will
find that many people will execute this
| | 01:28 |
command by just simply typing the letters
VG.
| | 01:31 |
So, either way you can click the button or
use the shortcut, and you are looking for
| | 01:35 |
the Important Categories tab.
And what you will see on this tab is any
| | 01:39 |
CAD file that's been brought in to your
project, weather you linked it or embedded
| | 01:42 |
it, will be listed here.
And if you expand it with the plus, minus
| | 01:46 |
sign right here, you will see all of the
layers that are in that CAD file.
| | 01:51 |
And you'll notice here that A-Anno-Note
and A-Detail-Bold are both currently
| | 01:55 |
unchecked, they're both turned off.
And to restore one of those layers it
| | 01:59 |
would be a simple matter of simply
checking the boxes again.
| | 02:03 |
And then when I leave this style those
layers will come back.
| | 02:06 |
Now, you'll also notice that we can
overwrite any of these layers if we wanted
| | 02:09 |
too as well.
And that would include things like line
| | 02:11 |
weight and color or line pattern.
Now, in this case I'm just going to cancel
| | 02:14 |
without making any overwrites.
But if you ever need to make an overwrite
| | 02:17 |
you can do so.
Now, you'll notice those layers are still
| | 02:20 |
turned off.
Let's move this box over here, but if I
| | 02:22 |
click Apply, then they all come back
again.
| | 02:25 |
If I'm done in this dialogue, I can click
OK.
| | 02:28 |
Now, what about the Delete option?
Well, if I select this and I go to query
| | 02:32 |
again and pick that hollow metal frame
again.
| | 02:36 |
This time, if I click Delete instead of
Hide in View, the object also disappears
| | 02:39 |
but here's the difference.
If I type VG again, when I go back to the
| | 02:44 |
Imported Categories you'll notice here on
the list of layers that A-Detail-Bold is
| | 02:48 |
no longer on the list.
So, it's a little bit more permanent and a
| | 02:52 |
little bit more dramatic way to approach
it.
| | 02:55 |
So, what I'm going to do instead is go to
undo here to bring that later back.
| | 02:59 |
I think in most cases doing Hide in View
is going to be a more appropriate way to
| | 03:02 |
deal with layers you don't want to see.
But certainly, if you absolutely don't
| | 03:07 |
need a layer and you want to try and
reduce some of the file size, you can
| | 03:09 |
certainly look at the Delete option as
well.
| | 03:13 |
Any of the features that will available
with the Query tool were available for
| | 03:16 |
either linked or embedded CAD files.
Now, this CAD file is actually an insert.
| | 03:20 |
This one's been embedded directly in this
file.
| | 03:23 |
Most CAD or BIN managers would probably
argue that you should use link CAD exclusively.
| | 03:29 |
So, if I look at my Insert tab they would
favor the link CAD button over the import
| | 03:33 |
CAD button.
Now, there are exceptions of course but in
| | 03:37 |
most cases that's going to to be true.
So, if you can do what ever it is you need
| | 03:40 |
to do with the CAD file using link it's
generally considered a best practice
| | 03:43 |
better approach.
But for the sake of argument let's say
| | 03:46 |
that you have imported a CAD file, one of
the things that sometimes people find a
| | 03:50 |
little tempting about importing a CAD file
is this Explode button over here.
| | 03:55 |
Now I want to show you what this does
because it's got some not so desirable
| | 03:59 |
side effects.
So, if I click on Explode, at first
| | 04:02 |
glimpse it seems a little attractive
because what you'll see is that all of the
| | 04:06 |
individual parts and pieces inside that
CAD file have now become dedicated Revit objects.
| | 04:13 |
Notice these lines are now actual Revit
lines.
| | 04:16 |
And this text is now actual Revit text.
And I could actually edit the note if I
| | 04:20 |
needed to change what it says.
Or modify some of that line work if I
| | 04:24 |
wanted to change the detail in some way.
Now, one of the down sides of exploiting a
| | 04:28 |
CAD file is it tends to radically increase
the file size in your Revit project.
| | 04:31 |
Furthermore, it tends to populate your
Revit project with a lot of styles and
| | 04:35 |
text types and other types of types that
you don't really want to have in your
| | 04:39 |
Revit project, so it increase the file
bloat if you will.
| | 04:44 |
So, for example, if I select one of these
lines, what you'll see is that line
| | 04:48 |
created a line style for itself called A
Detail Fine.
| | 04:52 |
And if I open this list, there's actually
a line style now for every layer that was
| | 04:56 |
previously in the CAD file.
The same is true for the text.
| | 05:01 |
You can see that its created text types
called auto CAD Detail-Arial.
| | 05:05 |
So, its created a text type for every text
style that was in the auto CAD file.
| | 05:11 |
Furthermore, if you go to the Manage tab
and go the Materials dialogue, you will
| | 05:15 |
see that down here, you're going to have
lots of materials that are somewhat
| | 05:19 |
generic, they just say render material
with three numbers after there names.
| | 05:26 |
Those numbers are the RGB values, red
green blue values of the color that was
| | 05:30 |
assigned to those layers.
So, every layer on your CAD file creates a
| | 05:34 |
render material for itself, and as you
could see they're all just sort of gray
| | 05:37 |
material but they have that color assigned
to them from the cad layer.
| | 05:43 |
Now, these render materials don't really
help me at all in the Revit project.
| | 05:47 |
They just, contribute to overall file size
and file blow .
| | 05:51 |
You could certainly purge out and delete
all of these items that you don't need,
| | 05:54 |
but that's a lot of extra work.
And you might easily miss some, and so on.
| | 05:58 |
It makes it a little tougher to enforce
office standards.
| | 06:01 |
So, if you're in a situation where you
really have to explode a CAD file.
| | 06:05 |
A much better way to do it is to create a
temporary Revit project first.
| | 06:10 |
Bring the CAD file into that temporary
Revit project.
| | 06:13 |
Explode it there.
Clean it up.
| | 06:15 |
And then just copy and paste that geometry
out to your live project.
| | 06:19 |
This way, you're only getting the items
that your project needs.
| | 06:22 |
And you're avoiding all that other stuff
that you didn't want it to have.
| | 06:25 |
And if you follow that process, you can
usually do a much cleaner job at bringing
| | 06:28 |
in that data.
| | 06:30 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a group| 00:00 |
Sometimes you develop a part of your
design that can be reused elsewhere in the project.
| | 00:04 |
You can simply use Copy and Paste for such
items, but a better choice is to create a group.
| | 00:08 |
A group gives you a powerful way to manage
repetitive items.
| | 00:11 |
Once you create a group, if you make a
change to one instance of the group that
| | 00:14 |
change occurs across the entire project.
So to demonstrate that I'm going to work
| | 00:18 |
here in this file called Create a Group.
And we're going to use our condo layout
| | 00:21 |
that we've been working on for the last
several movies.
| | 00:24 |
going to zoom out just a touch here and
make a window selection around everything
| | 00:29 |
that I have on the screen.
And then up here on the ribbon, we will
| | 00:34 |
find our Create Group command or we can
type GP.
| | 00:38 |
A dialog will appear which actually
indicates for me that I am really creating
| | 00:42 |
two groups.
The model geometry such as the walls,
| | 00:44 |
doors and windows will go in the first
group.
| | 00:47 |
And I'm going to name that, two bedroom
unit.
| | 00:51 |
And this is a model group.
Model groups contain model geometry.
| | 00:55 |
All of the annotation, like the room tags
and the door tags, are going to go in an
| | 00:58 |
attached detail group.
And I'm going to cal that one, Tags.
| | 01:03 |
Now the way this works is, if I deselect
this, and I kind of move my mouse nearby,
| | 01:08 |
you'll this dashed line appearing around
the entire file.
| | 01:13 |
That is the group now.
And that's the model group right there.
| | 01:16 |
Notice it only highlighted the model
geometry.
| | 01:18 |
Now I'm going to deselect that.
Move my mouse over here, and we'll see
| | 01:22 |
that it's highlighting another dash line.
That's the tags, and that is the attached
| | 01:27 |
detail group.
And that's kind of confirmed for me here
| | 01:30 |
with this small little push pin icon,
letting me that it's attached to something.
| | 01:35 |
Now if we scroll down here on the project
browser, expand the Groups category, and
| | 01:39 |
expand Model, we'll see our two-bedroom
unit listed here.
| | 01:44 |
Beneath it, we'll see Floor Plan Tags.
That's the attached detail group.
| | 01:50 |
So that's another way that we can see
those two items that we've created.
| | 01:54 |
If I select the Model group, you'll see
here in the center that it's got this X, Y
| | 01:58 |
icon right here.
Now what that's useful for, is I can
| | 02:02 |
actually drag that to any location that I
would like to be the origin for this group.
| | 02:07 |
Now in this case I'm going to drag it up
here, to the end point of these two
| | 02:11 |
exterior walls.
And what that does for me is I'm going to
| | 02:15 |
deselect it and I'm going to select my two
bedroom unit.
| | 02:19 |
Drag it from project browser and drop it
into the file.
| | 02:23 |
And what you'll see is, let me zoom out
slightly here, you'll see that, that new
| | 02:27 |
location that I just indicated is the
insertion point of this group now.
| | 02:33 |
And let me press Esc to get out of there.
So, if u have a more convenient point that
| | 02:39 |
you want to use for an insertion point, it
is as easy as that to make change.
| | 02:44 |
What's the advantage of using the group in
the first place?
| | 02:48 |
Well, now that i have my group all i have
to do is select any instance of the group.
| | 02:53 |
i am just going to pick the one here on
the left.
| | 02:56 |
And up here on the ribbon, I can choose
the Edit Group button, or EG is the shortcut.
| | 03:02 |
That will take me into Group Edit mode and
you can see that I can now touch all the
| | 03:06 |
individual geometry again.
And I could make any change that I want to
| | 03:10 |
here to the group.
I'm going to do something that's just
| | 03:13 |
simple and obvious, and so, up here on the
architecture ribbon, I'm going to click
| | 03:16 |
the Window tool.
Open up the list of choices, and I'm
| | 03:20 |
going to pick this 72 by 48 double
casement window, and I'm just going to
| | 03:23 |
place an instance of that here in this
bedroom.
| | 03:28 |
When I click Finish right here, I want you
to pay attention to this wall there, and
| | 03:33 |
notice that in this instance of the group.
It gained that same window over there.
| | 03:39 |
So, if you can imagine if we had dozens if
not hundreds of instances of this group
| | 03:43 |
throughout the project, how powerful that
could be.
| | 03:47 |
We make the change in one location, and
that change will immediately apply
| | 03:50 |
throughout the rest of the project.
Now, we've got our attach detail group
| | 03:55 |
right here as well, right?
And if I take a look at this, this is
| | 03:58 |
attached to all of the different elements
in the group.
| | 04:02 |
This one however is just the model group.
It doesn't have those elements.
| | 04:06 |
Well, it turns out that all I have to do
is select it.
| | 04:10 |
And then on the ribbon right here I can
click Attach Detail Groups.
| | 04:15 |
That will show me any Attach Detail groups
that belong to this group.
| | 04:19 |
In this case, the floor plan tag.
So, I'm going to check that.
| | 04:21 |
And when I click OK, it will add an
instance of that Attach Detail group to
| | 04:24 |
this model instance.
And more importantly, if i zoom in over
| | 04:28 |
here, notice that in this area, this is
door number five, door number four, door
| | 04:32 |
number eight.
Notice that these doors have renumbered to
| | 04:36 |
have unique numbers, so Revit won't
replicate the same numbering, it will
| | 04:40 |
renumber the objects for you.
Now, if you don't like the number you can
| | 04:44 |
always renumber them later and that would
be a subject of a later movie.
| | 04:49 |
But it's really a powerful feature that it
maintains all that numbering for you
| | 04:53 |
automatically and all you have to do is
add the tags.
| | 04:57 |
Now, if you have a situation where you
need to create a group that is slightly
| | 05:00 |
different than the first, maybe we want a
version of this condor that doesn't have
| | 05:02 |
the second window.
Then what we can do is we can actually
| | 05:07 |
select the group.
I'm going to make a copy of it.
| | 05:10 |
I'll just do Copy, and I'll put another
version of it over here.
| | 05:14 |
And I'm going to keep that selected and
over here on the Properties Pallet, I'm
| | 05:18 |
going to click the Edit Type button.
And what you'll see is that groups behave
| | 05:23 |
a lot like other objects that we have in
Revit.
| | 05:27 |
We can see the type properties here.
Well in this case there aren't any
| | 05:30 |
properties to manipulate, but I can
duplicate and rename.
| | 05:34 |
So, I am going to make a duplicate of the
two bedroom unit and the suggested name is
| | 05:38 |
two bedroom unit 2.
I am just going to put One window here
| | 05:43 |
just so I know that, that's what this one
is.
| | 05:47 |
And click OK and OK again.
This is a separate instance now, so if I
| | 05:52 |
edit the group, I can select this window
and delete it.
| | 05:56 |
That will not apply to these other two.
If I decide later that this one should
| | 06:02 |
look like this one, I can now simply
select it and there's my second version.
| | 06:07 |
And when I choose it, it will remove the
window from right there.
| | 06:10 |
If I happen to have a tag associated with
the object that I removed for example, if
| | 06:15 |
I select this and Edit Group.
And let's just say I remove this door.
| | 06:21 |
Let's not talk about the fact that we have
no way to get in that bedroom now.
| | 06:25 |
Let's go to Finish.
Notice that the tag in the attach detail
| | 06:28 |
group gets removed.
If I select this and change it back to the
| | 06:33 |
original, the tag comes back again.
So, the Attached Detail groups respond to
| | 06:40 |
the underlying model group regardless of
what you do, even if you're adding or
| | 06:43 |
removing elements.
It's a pretty powerful feature.
| | 06:48 |
Using groups is a great way to manage
these repetitive design elements that you
| | 06:51 |
have in your projects.
You create a series of elements.
| | 06:54 |
You group them together.
Any changes you make to one instance of
| | 06:57 |
the group apply across the project.
You can swap in and out different versions
| | 07:01 |
of the group.
And by using Attach detail groups, you can
| | 07:04 |
even manage the annotation and the tags
that are associated with those nested
| | 07:07 |
model elements.
| | 07:09 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Mirroring groups to create a layout| 00:00 |
Once you have a group in your project, you
might want to use that group as the basis
| | 00:03 |
for an overall layout such as our
condominium layout here where we might
| | 00:06 |
want to have multiple versions of this
same group on a floor plan.
| | 00:11 |
We could insert each group manually, but
that would require some manipulations of
| | 00:15 |
rotating and mirroring and movement that
would all have to happen independently.
| | 00:20 |
Instead, I'm going to use the Mirror
feature in Revit to mirror the instance of
| | 00:24 |
the group that I already have on screen,
directly.
| | 00:27 |
And talk about some of the issues that we
run into with groups when we do that.
| | 00:31 |
So, I'm in a file called, Mirror Groups
and I've got an instance of the group that
| | 00:34 |
we created in the previous movie and it's
attached detail group.
| | 00:39 |
And I'm going to select the model group
first and up here on the ribbon, we have
| | 00:43 |
two ways that we can mirror.
And I'm going to use this Mirror Pick Axis
| | 00:47 |
option and what that allows me to do, is
select an object that I already have in my model.
| | 00:53 |
And use that as the access of reflection
for the mirror.
| | 00:56 |
So, in this case, that will be the wall
that's going to be shared between the two
| | 01:00 |
copies of the group.
So, I'm going to have one down below and
| | 01:04 |
I'm going to mirror one up above.
So, I'll click this wall and Revit will
| | 01:07 |
create a version of the group up above and
you can see it's a flipped copy of the original.
| | 01:14 |
And it also generates a warning.
The warning that it generates is what
| | 01:18 |
Revit considers to be an ignorable warning
and that's because I could quite literally
| | 01:21 |
ignore the warning if I want to.
But before I dismiss the warning, I
| | 01:25 |
want to just discuss what it's saying.
You'll see that it has highlighted the
| | 01:29 |
shared wall between two instances of the
group in an orange color, and if you read
| | 01:32 |
the message what it's actually telling us
is, we have two walls in the same place.
| | 01:38 |
And in general terms, having two walls in
the same place is considered not to be
| | 01:41 |
such a good idea.
I would agree with that sentiment so, it's
| | 01:44 |
definitely something we're going to
want to address.
| | 01:46 |
But it's an ignorable warning, because
there is no button here, there's nothing I
| | 01:50 |
have to do.
Simply by deselecting everything or
| | 01:53 |
clicking outside the warning, it dismisses
it but the issue is still there.
| | 01:58 |
And so, what I'm going to do, is zoom in
over here and talk about how we can
| | 02:02 |
address that.
Now, I have a group down below, right there.
| | 02:07 |
I have a group up above.
If I put my mouse right here where the
| | 02:11 |
wall is and press my Tab key, it will
highlight the other group.
| | 02:16 |
But if I Tab a second time, it will
actually reach into the group and
| | 02:19 |
highlight the wall that's inside the
group.
| | 02:23 |
I'm going to click that.
And then on that wall, a little icon will
| | 02:26 |
appear right here that says, I can click
to exclude this from the instance of the group.
| | 02:32 |
And I'm going to go ahead and do that.
And what you will see is that, redundant
| | 02:35 |
wall gets removed and I'm left with just a
single wall here, I'm going to deselect,
| | 02:39 |
I'm going to zoom back out and I want to
select this group right here.
| | 02:45 |
Go to the Move command and I'm just
going to move this up like so, just to
| | 02:48 |
show you what that did.
Now, it's telling me that this room is not
| | 02:52 |
enclosed and I'm going to ignore that for
right now, because what I'm more
| | 02:55 |
interested in is, the fact that this wall
has been excluded right there.
| | 03:00 |
You can see that we only have the one
wall.
| | 03:02 |
So, If I undo the movement, these two
condo units are now sharing that wall
| | 03:06 |
in-between and that eliminated any error
that we had and solves the problem.
| | 03:13 |
So, let's zoom out again, I'm going to
select both of these unit now.
| | 03:18 |
And, I want to mirror them to the right
hand side, but I have stairwells and
| | 03:22 |
corridors and everything over here so, I
can't really use any of the existing
| | 03:25 |
geometry as a mirror axis.
So, in this case, I'm going to use this
| | 03:31 |
Mirror command, the Mirror Draw Axis and
that allows me to just pick two points on screen.
| | 03:37 |
So, I'm going to pick my first point,
right about there and I'm going to pull it
| | 03:41 |
straight down and click again.
And what that will do, is it will use that
| | 03:45 |
imaginary line I've just drawn, as the
mirror axis this time and it'll mirror
| | 03:48 |
both instances over to the other side.
Now, if I want to indicate just how far
| | 03:54 |
this is, the easiest way to do that would
be with the temporary dimensions but
| | 03:57 |
they're not currently displaying.
Any time the temporary dimensions don't
| | 04:03 |
display, you can use this button here on
the Options bar to force them to display.
| | 04:07 |
So, I'm going to click on that.
And try not to get too distracted by the
| | 04:10 |
flurry of dimensions that appear here in
the middle.
| | 04:13 |
The one that I'm interested in, is this
one right here which is between these two walls.
| | 04:18 |
So, if I just simply click on that, I can
put in whatever number I want there.
| | 04:22 |
I'm going to make this a nice even 10 feet
and press Enter.
| | 04:25 |
I'll deselect all of that and then at this
stage, I could select all of these groups
| | 04:29 |
and add Attach Detail Groups if I want to,
like we talked about in the previous movie.
| | 04:36 |
And you'll see that it will add tags to
all of the other instances.
| | 04:40 |
And at this stage, that pretty well gives
me my overall forward plan layout.
| | 04:45 |
All that remains for me now, is to come in
and add the stairs and the corridors, and
| | 04:48 |
those are subjects that we'll tackle in
future movies.
| | 04:52 |
So, using the Mirror command in
conjunction with your Groups, is a really
| | 04:55 |
fast and efficient way to create a very
complex layout, very quickly from just a
| | 04:59 |
few instances of your Groups.
| | 05:02 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Revit links| 00:00 |
In this movie we're going to add a link
Revit file.
| | 00:03 |
There is lots of scenarios where we might
choose to link one Revit project to another.
| | 00:07 |
Perhaps, you are working on a multi
building project or may be you have
| | 00:10 |
multiple disciplines where you have
mechanical and electrical and structural
| | 00:12 |
and you're all working in the same
building.
| | 00:15 |
Whatever the scenario might be, you can
take one Revit project and link it into
| | 00:19 |
another Revit project.
And in the similar fashion to the way it
| | 00:23 |
worked when we linked CAD files in, in a
previous movie.
| | 00:27 |
If the original Revit file changes, you
can go to Manage Links and select that
| | 00:31 |
file and simply reload it to see the
latest changes.
| | 00:36 |
So, I'm in a file here called Office
Building.
| | 00:38 |
And I'm going to do a really simple
example just to go through the mechanics
| | 00:40 |
of how to set up a linked file.
And I'm going to link in a small out
| | 00:44 |
build, so I'm going to go to the Insert
tab and click the Link Revit button.
| | 00:49 |
That brings up my Exercise Files folder
and I"m going to grab this Shed file here.
| | 00:54 |
Now, if you watched the movie on Linking
CAD files you may notice that at the
| | 00:57 |
bottom of the dialogue there is far fewer
options than we had at that time.
| | 01:01 |
And that's because when you link to a
Revit file, Revit already pretty much
| | 01:04 |
knows all that it needs to know about that
file, it doesn't have to ask us a lot of
| | 01:08 |
questions about how we want to interpret
the data coming in.
| | 01:12 |
The only question it really asks us is
where do we want to put it, so down here
| | 01:15 |
under positioning we have all of the
standard options: Center to Center, Origin
| | 01:18 |
to Origin, Manual placement and so on.
Now, in this case I'm going to accept the
| | 01:23 |
default Center to Center and I'm going to
simply click Open.
| | 01:26 |
So, you're going to see of course that
Center to Center did just that and it put
| | 01:29 |
the shed building right in the center of
the screen but now its sitting right on
| | 01:32 |
top of my building.
So, there's a pretty good chance that
| | 01:35 |
that's not the location where I want that
to go.
| | 01:38 |
So, I'm going to come over here to try to
select the shed building but I have a new
| | 01:41 |
problem here is that I can't seem to get
that thing to select for some reason.
| | 01:46 |
Well, back in chapter two we talked about
selection toggles.
| | 01:49 |
And one of the selection toggles that we
had available to us was the ability to
| | 01:53 |
turn off selection of linked files.
And we used this in some of the previous
| | 01:58 |
movies and so Revit remembers what your
previous setting was for any of these
| | 02:01 |
selection toggles.
Now, the two places you could find the
| | 02:05 |
selection toggles are of course at the
lower right hand corner of the screen on
| | 02:09 |
the status bar.
And over here on the drop down underneath
| | 02:13 |
the Modified tool and you could see that
select links is turned off here and down
| | 02:17 |
here on the Status bar it has the small
red X next to it.
| | 02:21 |
Now, you can click the toggle here or you
can check it there.
| | 02:25 |
It does exactly the same thing.
But now that would allow me to select my
| | 02:28 |
out building in order to move it.
And you can move it very precisely.
| | 02:33 |
But in this case, I'm going to move it
just a little bit randomly.
| | 02:36 |
I'm going to use my Move tool.
Click a base point and a new point.
| | 02:39 |
And I'll just put it out there for the
time being.
| | 02:41 |
If you want to move yours a little more
precisely, feel free to type in some dimensions.
| | 02:46 |
Now, let's take a look at this in 3D.
I'm going to click the default 3D view icon.
| | 02:49 |
And you can see the building sitting over
here.
| | 02:51 |
And perhaps we wanted to make some
modifications to that building.
| | 02:54 |
Now, let me show you where this linked
file shows up, first of all in the project browser.
| | 02:58 |
So, over here on the project browser, I'm
going to scroll down to the bottom.
| | 03:02 |
And you'll see at the very bottom of the
list there's a Revit links item, and if we
| | 03:05 |
expand that out you can see the shed
building is listed right there with a
| | 03:09 |
small blue arrow next to it.
The blue arrow indicates that the building
| | 03:14 |
is currently loaded.
Now, there is a limited with linked files
| | 03:18 |
in Revit whereby you cannot have both the
host building, the office building in this
| | 03:22 |
case and the link building.
The shed in this case, open at the same
| | 03:26 |
time in the same session of Revit.
Now, just to be clear they can both be
| | 03:31 |
open at the same time on two different
Revits.
| | 03:34 |
So, if you're working on one computer and
your colleague is working in another
| | 03:37 |
computer you can each be in a different
building, just fine.
| | 03:40 |
But on this Revit that I'm working in, I
can't have both open at the same time.
| | 03:45 |
So, if I try to go to open.
Select the Shed and click the Open button
| | 03:48 |
here there by it generates an error saying
that I can't do that.
| | 03:53 |
But it will offer to unload the shed
forming by say yes it will further warn me
| | 03:56 |
that, I got to be sure because I can't
undo that, I'm going to say yes fine, go
| | 04:00 |
ahead and click yes again.
And you'll see that I'm not in the Shed building.
| | 04:06 |
Now, what I'm going to do is just use my
switch windows here on the quick access
| | 04:09 |
toolbar and jump back to the office
building for a moment.
| | 04:12 |
Notice the shed disappears here and down
here on the Project browser it now has a
| | 04:17 |
big red x next to it.
That's indicated for me that's it
| | 04:20 |
currently unloaded.
So, lets go back to the shed using the
| | 04:23 |
switch windows and lets make a couple
really obvious changes.
| | 04:27 |
Let me just roll my wheel to zoom in a
little bit, I am going to select this
| | 04:30 |
window I will copy it over in the middle
here and I will select this door and I
| | 04:34 |
will choose Larger Size Door, like may be
a double door or like that.
| | 04:40 |
So, those change should both be very
noticeable when we load the file,lets go
| | 04:43 |
to big R choose Close we it would ask if I
want to save.
| | 04:47 |
Then I will say yes.
Now, back here in my office building the
| | 04:50 |
shed is still unloaded, so there is two
ways I would reload it, I can use the
| | 04:54 |
Managed Links dialog selected here and
click reload or there is actually a short
| | 04:57 |
cut to that.
Let me cancel we just scroll down and look
| | 05:02 |
over here were its X ed out I can right
click instead and choose reload, now you
| | 05:06 |
can do it either way.
The result is the same and if we zoom in,
| | 05:10 |
you can see that the updated version of
the file is now available.
| | 05:14 |
So, if you have multiple people working on
different aspects of the building at the
| | 05:18 |
same time, linked files can be a really
nice way to manage those different parts
| | 05:20 |
and pieces.
| | 05:22 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Rotating and aligning a Revit link| 00:00 |
In this movie we're going to take a look
at the Align and Rotate commands.
| | 00:03 |
These are two really useful and powerful
modification commands that allow us to
| | 00:07 |
reposition objects based on rotations or
their relationships to other nearby geometry.
| | 00:14 |
So, I'm in a file called Align Rotate and
down here in the lower corner, I have a
| | 00:18 |
small office building.
And up here this odd shape is actually a
| | 00:23 |
site plan file that's linked in to the
project file here.
| | 00:28 |
Now, we're in the Level 1 Floor Plan and
we can get a much better look if we change
| | 00:31 |
to the site plan view.
So, I'm going to double-click site plan,
| | 00:35 |
and now it becomes a little more evident
what I'm actually looking at.
| | 00:38 |
Here is my linked site file.
It's got some roads and sidewalks.
| | 00:43 |
It's got a parking lot and a property
line.
| | 00:45 |
And if you look right here at the end of
this sidewalk there's like a little green
| | 00:49 |
dot right there.
And I'm going to zoom in on that (SOUND)
| | 00:53 |
and that little green dot is actually a
small green line.
| | 00:56 |
That's where the front door is of the
building, so I'm going to use that green
| | 01:00 |
line for reference to get his site plan
positioned relative to the building down here.
| | 01:06 |
So, let me zoom in on the building (SOUND)
and so you can see that we're just looking
| | 01:10 |
down on the building right now.
We're seeing the roof, but we can't really
| | 01:14 |
tell where that front door is.
So, temporarily I'm going to take this
| | 01:17 |
view and using the visual style pop up
right here, the default is Hidden Line,
| | 01:21 |
which is typically what we want.
I'm going to change that to Wireframe and
| | 01:26 |
the drawing gets a little busier, but in
this case that will help me identify where
| | 01:30 |
the door is.
You'll notice if I zoom in over here, that
| | 01:33 |
there's a wall right here and these lines
right here.
| | 01:36 |
That's where the front door is.
So, we want that green line to kind of
| | 01:39 |
line up in that general location.
So, let me zoom out, again, using zoom
| | 01:42 |
previous and to get started, I'm going to
take this file and I'm just simply
| | 01:46 |
going to drag it and get it close by.
So that's really the first step.
| | 01:50 |
And the reason I want to do it that way is
it's going to be a lot easier to get the
| | 01:54 |
modification without having to constantly
zoom in and out.
| | 01:58 |
So if I just get it in the general ball
park, then I can fine-tune it.
| | 02:02 |
Now, I've still got the file selected, and
I will start with the Rotate command.
| | 02:06 |
So I'm going to click on that or type RO,
which is the shortcut for that command.
| | 02:10 |
Now on the Options bar there's a few ways
we can rotate.
| | 02:13 |
We can either just type in an angle.
So if I happened to know that it needed to
| | 02:17 |
rotate 10 degrees, I could simply type
that in.
| | 02:20 |
The trouble with that is you'll see that
it rotated just fine but ten degrees
| | 02:24 |
wasn't the right amount.
I don't really know what the right amount
| | 02:27 |
should be, and you can see that it's sort
of rotated around what seems like an
| | 02:31 |
arbitrary point.
Well, if I click the Rotate command again
| | 02:34 |
to start the command, you kind of see
something's happening offscreen here.
| | 02:39 |
Let me just pan a little bit and show you.
There's this little blue dot right here.
| | 02:45 |
Now, if I roll my wheel and zoom all the
way out, that little blue dot is actually
| | 02:49 |
at the center of this imaginary box, which
surrounds the object that we have selected.
| | 02:56 |
So, that center point is not at a terribly
convenient point for rotation right now,
| | 03:00 |
so let me zoom back in.
And we can actually change where this
| | 03:04 |
center point is located.
So, I'm just going to click on the little
| | 03:08 |
blue dot right here, and I'll zoom in a
little closer at the end of the sidewalk.
| | 03:14 |
And I'm going to snap it right to the
endpoint of that green line.
| | 03:18 |
Once I have the center point right there,
I now have a lot more control.
| | 03:22 |
I'm going to take the starting angle, and
make it snap to the other end of that line.
| | 03:26 |
And now I'm rotating off of that known
edge there.
| | 03:31 |
And so now I have a lot more control.
And notice that if I move this up to a
| | 03:35 |
horizontal, it will automatically snap to
a horizontal and figure out what the
| | 03:39 |
rotation should be.
And I'm just simply click, and you'll see
| | 03:43 |
that it will snap that entire file to a
nice horizontal and vertical orientation.
| | 03:49 |
At this point, all I would have to do is
just move it from the midpoint here to the
| | 03:52 |
midpoint of that door.
Now that's certainly one way that we could
| | 03:56 |
do the rotation.
Actually going to undo that, zoom out a
| | 03:59 |
little bit, and I'm going to show you the
align method next.
| | 04:03 |
So there's nothing wrong with the rotate
method.
| | 04:05 |
You can certainly do that, and that was
one of our options.
| | 04:08 |
The other option is to go to the Modify
tab and use my Align command.
| | 04:13 |
AL is the shortcut for that.
So the way the Align command works is you
| | 04:17 |
highlight some reference on your screen
that you want to use as the reference point.
| | 04:24 |
And then, you click a second object and
that second object will move and rotate
| | 04:28 |
into position Relative to the first.
So, in this case I want my reference point
| | 04:34 |
to be, I'm using my Tab key and I'm
tabbing until I get the face of this wall.
| | 04:40 |
I want my reference point to be the face
of this wall right here.
| | 04:45 |
And you'll see, it'll highlight that edge
all the way across the screen.
| | 04:49 |
Now Revit wants me to select the entity
that I want to move in position into
| | 04:53 |
alignment with that edge, and I'll click
on this green line right here.
| | 04:58 |
And the nice thing about that technique is
it moves and rotates in one step.
| | 05:03 |
Now, I still have to find two in the
position, so you might argue that its
| | 05:07 |
still two steps either way.
And that's why I said we can really do
| | 05:12 |
this either way, but I can from midpoint
to midpoint.
| | 05:16 |
And now my sidewalk is positioned exactly
at the front door.
| | 05:20 |
I zoom back out, I set back to hidden
line.
| | 05:23 |
(SOUND) And I'm not quite done yet,
because if you deselect, you'll notice
| | 05:26 |
that something happened to the building.
And what actually happened to the building
| | 05:32 |
was, if I go to one of my Elevation views,
like the south elevation, we can see that
| | 05:36 |
the linked file is actually inserted too
high.
| | 05:40 |
It's floating up above the building.
So what happened to my building was we
| | 05:43 |
buried it.
So here's another place where we can use
| | 05:46 |
our Align command.
If I zoom and show you the linked site
| | 05:50 |
file actually has a level here called
project level, and you can see that
| | 05:53 |
relative to the site file, that's at 56
feet.
| | 05:57 |
So the 56 feet in the site file should
match zero in my current file.
| | 06:06 |
In other words, this site file needs to
move down 56 feet.
| | 06:10 |
So my two methods that I could use to do
that would be to use the Move command and
| | 06:14 |
just move it down 56 feet or I'm going to
use the Align command again for this.
| | 06:20 |
Click on align, highlight Level 1 as my
alignment reference (SOUND) and then
| | 06:24 |
highlight this level here in the linked
file (SOUND) and you'll see that will pull
| | 06:27 |
the site plan down.
Cancel out of the command...
| | 06:32 |
I'm going to go to the 3D view, zoom in
and we now have our building positioned
| | 06:37 |
nicely relative to the site.
So, Align and Rotate give us two different
| | 06:42 |
methods that we can use to do overall
positioning like what we've done here with
| | 06:45 |
our site plan.
You'll find yourself using these commands
| | 06:49 |
all the time for various purposes.
These were just examples that I've given
| | 06:53 |
you here.
With the Align tool, you use a reference,
| | 06:55 |
and then, move the other object into
position with that reference.
| | 06:59 |
And with the Rotate tool you can either
type in an angle that you want to rotate,
| | 07:02 |
or you can use points on-screen to
indicate the rotation.
| | 07:06 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Establishing shared coordinates| 00:00 |
So, by now, we've looked at a few
different ways that we can link in various files.
| | 00:03 |
We've linked in Revit files, we've linked
in CAD files.
| | 00:06 |
In many cases, we just chose the default
positioning, center to center or origin to
| | 00:09 |
origin, and then if necessary, we moved
the file.
| | 00:13 |
In this movie, I'd like to talk about a
feature called Shared Coordinates.
| | 00:17 |
Shared Coordinates is a feature in Revit
where we're able to manage the positioning
| | 00:20 |
of two linked files relative to one
another.
| | 00:23 |
And the main benefit of doing this is,
once you've established the relationship
| | 00:27 |
between two files, it's going to work in
both directions and it's going to be
| | 00:30 |
maintained throughout the course of the
project.
| | 00:33 |
So, in this case like the file I have here
on screen, which is called Shared
| | 00:37 |
Coordinates, I have a linked site file in
this file.
| | 00:42 |
And what I want to be able to do is open
up the site file and link in the building,
| | 00:46 |
and have it come in, in the correct
location without my having to repeat all
| | 00:49 |
the manual move and rotate, and align
steps.
| | 00:54 |
So, let's take a look at the process.
So, I'm going to select the linked file
| | 00:58 |
here on screen, and I'm just simply
going to click on it anywhere and you'll
| | 01:01 |
see their highlights.
And we're going to take a look over at the
| | 01:05 |
Properties palette, and you can see here's
the name of the file right here.
| | 01:09 |
It's a linked Revit model, it's called
Building Site.
| | 01:11 |
And we can optionally give it a name if we
want.
| | 01:14 |
And down here this is where we want to
direct our attention.
| | 01:16 |
The shared site is currently set to Not
Shared.
| | 01:21 |
So, I'm going to click that button, and I
want to actually share the coordinate system.
| | 01:25 |
So, we have two ways we can do this.
We can publish the coordinate system from
| | 01:29 |
the current file to the link, or we can
acquire the coordinate system from the
| | 01:33 |
link file into the current file.
Now, it's almost a six of one half a dozen
| | 01:39 |
of the other kind of situation so, it
really isn't terribly important which one
| | 01:43 |
I choose here.
In my opinion, this site plan ought to be
| | 01:46 |
the one that does the publishing and
acquiring.
| | 01:48 |
In other words, I want to assume that the
site plan has the master coordinates, and
| | 01:53 |
I want to gain those coordinates from
there.
| | 01:58 |
So, in this case, since I'm in the
building file, I want to acquire the
| | 02:01 |
coordinates from the site.
So, I'm going to choose that.
| | 02:06 |
But like I said, everything should still
function the exact same way if I did
| | 02:09 |
publish, it's really a matter of
preference actually.
| | 02:13 |
Now, down here, Revit can actually record
this information that we're creating.
| | 02:18 |
Right?
We're creating a relationship between
| | 02:20 |
these two files.
It has to record that information somewhere.
| | 02:23 |
And it's recording it in a saved position,
and it's calling that simply, internal.
| | 02:29 |
Now, if you're satisfied with that name
internal, then all you have to do is click
| | 02:33 |
Reconcile and you're done.
I personally prefer to rename that position.
| | 02:38 |
I like to rename it to something a little
bit more descriptive.
| | 02:42 |
So, I'm going to click change right here,
and you can see that internal is the
| | 02:46 |
current saved position or saved site Revit
calls it, and you could either duplicate
| | 02:50 |
it or rename it.
If you want to preserve internal for any
| | 02:55 |
reason, choose Duplicate, and maybe that's
considered a little bit safer.
| | 02:59 |
Or if you're sure that you don't need
internal, you can just simply rename it.
| | 03:02 |
For this example, I'm going to simply
rename it, and I'm going to call this
| | 03:07 |
building site.
And I'm just describing that location in
| | 03:11 |
the file.
So, that's the building site.
| | 03:14 |
And I'm going to click OK, and then click
the Reconcile button.
| | 03:19 |
And what we'll see right here is this
shared site of this linked file, is named
| | 03:23 |
building site.
And to me, that's a little bit nicer and a
| | 03:27 |
little more descriptive than having that
button say internal, which is what it
| | 03:30 |
would have said had I not done the rename
step.
| | 03:33 |
But I just want to stress that the rename
step is really optional.
| | 03:37 |
Okay.
We're not done yet.
| | 03:39 |
The last step in the process here is to
save the file.
| | 03:43 |
So, I need to come up here and click Save,
and when I do, it will say location
| | 03:47 |
position has changed in the file called
building site, the linked file.
| | 03:54 |
We have changed the position.
Well, of course we did, we renamed
| | 03:57 |
internal and called it building site, and
changed it's coordinates.
| | 04:01 |
So, I have to save not only the current
file, but I have to save the linked file
| | 04:05 |
as well.
So, I'm going to click on Save, and now
| | 04:09 |
we've established that relationship.
Now, you may recall where we setup a
| | 04:14 |
linked Revit file, I can't have both the
site and the building open at the same
| | 04:18 |
time in the same session of Revit.
So, what I'm going to do here is go to the
| | 04:23 |
big r/g, the application menu, and I'm
going to choose Close.
| | 04:26 |
And then, my building site is listed right
over here.
| | 04:30 |
I'm going to click on that and open that
up as a recent file.
| | 04:34 |
Now, it should be there because we just
saved it.
| | 04:37 |
If it's not there, you can just go to open
and browse to it, but it should be there.
| | 04:40 |
Notice that it does not have the building.
Now, the building should fit right about
| | 04:46 |
here, and be orientated to the side walks
and the parking lot, and so forth.
| | 04:51 |
I am going to go to the 3D view and zoom
in just a little bit, go to the Insert
| | 04:55 |
tab, click on the Link Revit, select my
Shared Coordinates file.
| | 05:00 |
And down here, instead of any of the other
options that we've previously looked at, I
| | 05:05 |
am going to choose by Shared Coordinates.
When I do that, Revit knows exactly were
| | 05:10 |
to put the file when I click open, it will
come in, in exactly the correct location.
| | 05:16 |
So, that's one of the benefits of using
the shared coordinates system.
| | 05:20 |
Once you set it up for a pair of files, it
goes both directions.
| | 05:24 |
So, it's a bi-directional link, and the
files will know where they should go.
| | 05:30 |
So, it's a pretty nice benefit, if we had
additional buildings on the site, we could
| | 05:33 |
set them up the same way.
And then even those other buildings would
| | 05:36 |
know about each other, and we could build
an entire campus of buildings that were
| | 05:39 |
all linked together.
So, the shared coordinate feature is just
| | 05:43 |
a way of managing the insertion points and
the coordinates.
| | 05:47 |
Actually, it's more than the insertion
point, it's the X, the Y, the Z, the
| | 05:51 |
orientation, it's all of that.
It's a way of managing that relationship
| | 05:55 |
between two files when they're linked
together, and it maintains that
| | 05:58 |
relationship bi-directionally.
So, if you link one to the other, the
| | 06:02 |
relationship stays intact.
| | 06:04 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding file formats| 00:00 |
When working with Revit, it's important to
understand a little bit about file formats.
| | 00:04 |
I have a webpage open here from the
Auto-desk Wiki Help, and it talks about
| | 00:07 |
Revit backwards compatibility.
The most important thing you need to know
| | 00:11 |
about file formats is that each new
version of Revit is a unique file format.
| | 00:16 |
So, in order for you to work effectively,
all members of the project team have to be
| | 00:19 |
working on the same version of Revit.
It's not possible for two different people
| | 00:23 |
to be collaborating back and forth on two
different versions of Revit.
| | 00:28 |
If I'm in the later version of Revit, I
can easily open up previous version files,
| | 00:31 |
but I cannot save them back to the person
using the previous version.
| | 00:36 |
So, while they could send files to me and
I could open them, I would not be able to
| | 00:39 |
send my files back to them.
So, the most important thing you need to
| | 00:43 |
do is at the start of each new project,
you need to get all of the folks that are
| | 00:46 |
going to be involved in the project
together and sit down, and have a
| | 00:49 |
discussion and make sure that you all
agree on a file format.
| | 00:54 |
Everybody needs to be on the same version
number.
| | 00:56 |
And it doesn't matter if it's
architecture, structure or MEP as long as
| | 01:00 |
everybody's on the same version number,
you'll be able to collaborate together.
| | 01:05 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Sketch-Based Modeling ComponentsWorking with floors| 00:00 |
The scene of the movies in this chapter
will be, sketch based objects.
| | 00:04 |
What I mean by sketch based objects is,
any object in Revit that you have to
| | 00:07 |
create a two dimensional sketch in order
to indicate the shape or overall form of
| | 00:10 |
the object.
There are certain objects that Revit can't
| | 00:15 |
automatically assume the shape or the form
for you.
| | 00:17 |
When you draw walls or doors or windows,
you really only need a click or two and
| | 00:20 |
Revit can do the rest.
But when you want to draw elements like
| | 00:24 |
floors or roofs or stairs and railings,
these objects require a little bit more
| | 00:28 |
input from you in terms of, what the shape
and form of that overall object is.
| | 00:34 |
So, in this movie, we're going to look at
floors as our first example of a sketch
| | 00:37 |
based object.
And I'm in a file here called, adding floors.
| | 00:40 |
So, in the Architecture tab, we'll find
the Floor tool over here, I'm going to
| | 00:44 |
simply click on that.
If you use the drop down portion, make
| | 00:47 |
sure you're choosing Floor Architectural
for this example.
| | 00:51 |
I'm just going to click the button here,
that's actually the default Floor button.
| | 00:55 |
And this takes me into Sketch mode, this
mode that I'm talking about here.
| | 01:00 |
Now, I know I'm in Sketch mode because a
few things happen on screen.
| | 01:03 |
The drawing window grays out and kind of
becomes like an underlay.
| | 01:08 |
The Ribbon tab tints in this greenish
color,and right here on the Ribbon we get
| | 01:12 |
this Mode panel with these two big
buttons.
| | 01:17 |
We've got the big red X and the big green
check box.
| | 01:20 |
Those buttons are important because those
are the only ways out of Sketch mode.
| | 01:25 |
So, if you change your mind about being in
Sketch mode, you use the big red X and
| | 01:27 |
that cancels the command.
If you want to complete your sketch, you
| | 01:31 |
use the big green check box and that
finishes your command.
| | 01:35 |
There's no other way to get out of here,
you can't press Escape, you can't click
| | 01:38 |
the Modify tool.
Those are the two tools you use.
| | 01:41 |
So, as general rule of thumb, stay on the
Modify tab when you're working in Sketch mode.
| | 01:46 |
Because if you click on one of the other
tabs here, you'll see that those buttons
| | 01:49 |
aren't available.
And you kind of get lost and you're not
| | 01:52 |
really sure what to do next.
So, make sure you stay over here on the
| | 01:56 |
Modify tab, everything you need to do in a
sketch is going to be right here on this tab.
| | 02:01 |
Now, usually it starts with the Draw panel
over here and the various tools that are
| | 02:05 |
available to us.
With the Floor object, we can draw
| | 02:09 |
boundary lines, slope arrows or we can
change the span direction.
| | 02:12 |
Boundary line is the default, it's already
chosen for us so, I'm going to keep that selected.
| | 02:17 |
Over here, we can draw any shape we like
lines, rectangles, circles.
| | 02:22 |
There's a default selection here, Pick
Walls.
| | 02:25 |
We're going to stick with that.
This is a really handy tool because it
| | 02:29 |
allows us to just click on the underlying
walls in the background drawing area, and
| | 02:32 |
it will create sketch lines that match the
shape of those walls.
| | 02:37 |
Can be really helpful.
Now, on the Options bar, we have one other
| | 02:40 |
really helpful setting.
Extend into wall core, now that's only
| | 02:44 |
available if you choose Pick Walls.
If we had line or rectangle or any of the
| | 02:49 |
other shapes, that checkbox goes away, but
when I have pick walls, this extend into
| | 02:52 |
core is here and here's how that works.
If I click on the wall, you'll see that I
| | 02:58 |
get a sketch line.
That sketch line matches the overall
| | 03:01 |
extent of the wall.
Let me zoom in, and take a look at where
| | 03:05 |
that sketch line occurred.
Now, I'm going to click my Modify tool
| | 03:10 |
here to cancel out of the command so, that
I can actually select a sketch line.
| | 03:14 |
You see that that sketch line is right
there on the edge of the interior line in
| | 03:19 |
the wall.
That interior line is the face of the core.
| | 03:24 |
Now, if I slide this over just a little
bit, I'm holding in my wheel and dragging,
| | 03:28 |
there is a flip grip right here.
If I click that, that will actually flip
| | 03:34 |
to the other side of the core but if I
zoom in just a touch more, you can see
| | 03:37 |
that is actually the other side of the
core.
| | 03:42 |
There dry wall line which is this grey
line here, still occurs a little bit
| | 03:46 |
further away from that.
So, when you've got the, extend into wall
| | 03:50 |
core, that's what's you're doing is you're
either on the inside face or the outside
| | 03:54 |
face of the core.
Now, I'm going to zoom back out and
| | 03:58 |
continue adding sketch lines here.
So, I'll go back to the Pick Walls option
| | 04:03 |
and I'm going to make sure I'm clicking
exterior walls.
| | 04:08 |
I mean, you can click interior walls too,
but in this case that's not what I want.
| | 04:13 |
Keep going around like so.
This front wall is actually in two pieces.
| | 04:18 |
So, I'm only going to pick one of those
pieces there, I don't need to click both.
| | 04:22 |
You could click both but my preference is
to have a cleaner sketch where I have a
| | 04:25 |
single line going across.
So, I'm going to use my Trim and Extend to
| | 04:29 |
Corner command, we looked at that when we
were drawing walls in an earlier movie.
| | 04:34 |
And I'm going to click these two sketch
lines here, and clean them up to a corner.
| | 04:38 |
One of the rules of a sketch is, the
sketch has to be enclosed.
| | 04:42 |
You won't get a valid floor object if the
sketch is not enclosed.
| | 04:46 |
So, I'll come up here and I'll click my
green check box, my Finish Edit mode and
| | 04:50 |
that will complete the floor object.
Now, I'm getting a message here from Revit
| | 04:55 |
it says, would you like the walls that go
up to this floors level, to attach to the bottom.
| | 05:00 |
We're going to cut a section in a few
minutes to look at what it's really
| | 05:03 |
talking about here.
But what it's saying is the walls
| | 05:06 |
underneath this floor, do I want those to
come up and attach to this floor?
| | 05:09 |
Now, in this case I'm actually going to
answer no here, because the walls that
| | 05:13 |
it's talking about are around the
parameter of the building, the foundation walls.
| | 05:18 |
And that's not really the result that I
want, but we'll say yes to that question
| | 05:21 |
in the next floor we draw and you'll see
we will be able to contrast the two behaviors.
| | 05:27 |
Okay, now the floor remains selected and
of course if I wanted to I could make
| | 05:30 |
modifications to it, now to do a
modification you could actually use this
| | 05:33 |
Edit Boundary button right here.
That would take you back into the sketch
| | 05:38 |
and then you could make any changes you
wanted to.
| | 05:41 |
If I change my mind about the shape of
this floor and I want to make it some
| | 05:43 |
other shape, in this case I'm just
going to cancel though and discard those changes.
| | 05:48 |
So, let's go up to level two and let's add
a second floor object here on the second
| | 05:52 |
floor so, I'm going to go back to the
Architecture tab, click the Floor button again.
| | 05:59 |
All the same defaults apply so, I'm
going to accept all of those.
| | 06:03 |
And I'm going to pick these exterior walls
right there.
| | 06:07 |
But then I'm going to stop and go to my
Trim tool, because in this area here I
| | 06:10 |
have a double volume space so, that's open
to below.
| | 06:14 |
So, I'm just going to trim this to this,
to make it a nice corner and so, I'll get
| | 06:18 |
an edge over here.
However, if we zoom in on this little area
| | 06:22 |
here, that would make it a little
difficult for this stair to take us up to
| | 06:26 |
that floor area so, we need to create a
little extension over here.
| | 06:32 |
And I'm going to do that by just drawing
the shape that I want so, here's an
| | 06:36 |
example where Pick Walls wouldn't really
help me.
| | 06:40 |
So, I'll just draw a line here, draw
another line there and then I'll just trim
| | 06:45 |
it up.
This one to this one, remember to pick the
| | 06:49 |
ones you want to keep.
If I undo that and I do this, I don't get
| | 06:52 |
the results I want.
So, you click here and then this is the
| | 06:57 |
side I want to keep.
So remember to do that.
| | 07:00 |
And then this one to this one.
That makes a nice corner there and there.
| | 07:03 |
I click finish.
I'm going to get that same question again,
| | 07:06 |
and this time I'm going to say yes.
And then it asks me a second question.
| | 07:12 |
Here you can see that it's highlighting
the exterior walls here.
| | 07:16 |
So, I'm going to say yes again and now I'm
going to cut a section and I'm going to
| | 07:19 |
show you what all of that did.
So, I'm going to zoom out here a little
| | 07:23 |
bit and up here on my Quick Access
toolbar, I have my Section button, so I'll
| | 07:26 |
go ahead and click that.
And I will just draw section through this
| | 07:31 |
area, right here.
Now, you could see that when you draw a
| | 07:34 |
section, use just two clicks.
This dash box is telling me which part of
| | 07:37 |
the building will be included in the
section.
| | 07:40 |
We're going to be standing here at this
line looking this way, and if I deselected
| | 07:44 |
and just double-click on there, it will
open up that section.
| | 07:50 |
Now, let's go ahead and zoom in on these
two floors that we just created.
| | 07:55 |
The first question said, do you want the
walls that go up to this floor's level to
| | 07:59 |
attach to the bottom?
They were talking about these walls right here.
| | 08:03 |
So, you could see that this wall is
attached to the underside of this floor.
| | 08:07 |
Over here the second question asked, did
we want the floor object to join geometry
| | 08:10 |
and connect to the exterior walls?
Now, we said no to the question when we
| | 08:15 |
did the first floor slab.
Because what it would have done is, like
| | 08:19 |
here where it cut these walls down to
attach to this floor, it would have done
| | 08:22 |
the same thing with these foundation
walls.
| | 08:25 |
And we would have a funny little notch
here.
| | 08:27 |
Now, if I don't like that condition right
there, I can manually clean that up by
| | 08:31 |
going to Modify, clicking Join Geometry
and I go this object should join to that
| | 08:35 |
object and it will clean that up for me.
So, to clean floor slabs in your model,
| | 08:41 |
it's a sketch based object.
Sketch based objects are generated from
| | 08:45 |
two dimensional sketches, in this case
drawn in a floor plan.
| | 08:48 |
You can generate that sketch from the
surrounding walls, or you can draw it line
| | 08:51 |
by line.
When you complete the sketch, Revit will
| | 08:53 |
create the 3D geometry that's needed for
your floor slab.
| | 08:57 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with footprint roofs| 00:00 |
Revit offers us a few different ways that
we can create roofs.
| | 00:03 |
In this movie, I will look at the
Footprint Roof option.
| | 00:07 |
Footprint Roof option is very similar to
creating floor slabs that we looked at in
| | 00:10 |
the last movie.
We sketch them out as a 2D sketch and we
| | 00:13 |
do that sketch in a plan view.
Now, I'm here in a file called Footprint
| | 00:17 |
Roof, and I'm currently in the Level 1
floor plan.
| | 00:21 |
Now, there's actually two roof plans in
this file.
| | 00:23 |
There's a High Roof and a Low Roof.
And so I'm going to double-click the High Roof.
| | 00:27 |
To make sure that I'm working in that
view.
| | 00:30 |
Now the high roof is the left-hand portion
of the building and the low roof is over
| | 00:33 |
here on the right.
So we'll start with the high one.
| | 00:36 |
On the Architecture tab we have our Roof
button.
| | 00:39 |
Now, if you use the drop-down, it's
actually Roof by Footprint that you want.
| | 00:42 |
Or, that's actually the default button
that you can just click right here if you prefer.
| | 00:47 |
That takes me to Sketch mode, we've talked
a little bit about this in the last movie,
| | 00:50 |
the drawing window grace out to a half
tone, the Ribbon Tab (UNKNOWN) is greenish colour.
| | 00:56 |
Our boundary line and our pick walls are,
are default options again here on the Draw
| | 00:59 |
Panel and over here on the Options Bar, we
have some similar options that we had with
| | 01:03 |
the floor object and in this case I
want to talk about the defined slope option.
| | 01:09 |
Now, since it's pretty common for roofs to
have a slope, I thought it would be
| | 01:12 |
appropriate for us to start with this.
Now, we also have an overhang feature, and
| | 01:17 |
I'm going to accept this default right
here of two feet.
| | 01:21 |
If yours says something different, just go
ahead and type two feet in there.
| | 01:23 |
I click into the drawing window somewhere,
and if I move my mouse near one of the
| | 01:27 |
walls, what you'll see is it will
highlight the wall.
| | 01:32 |
But the dash screen line, instead of
appearing on the wall, this time, it will
| | 01:35 |
actually appear at a distance away two
feet in this case,because hats what i said
| | 01:38 |
the over hand to ,by moving the mouse
slightly over to the inside and outside
| | 01:41 |
,even if you accidentally click on
inside,don't worry about it its not a big
| | 01:44 |
deal because we have a little flip grip
right here,and i can just click that To
| | 01:47 |
make it go to the outside, but we probably
want these lines to go to the outside of
| | 01:50 |
the building.
Now there's a small little triangle that
| | 01:58 |
appears on the sketch-line, that's because
we checked defines slope.
| | 02:02 |
So what you want to do is think of this
sketch-line as almost like a piano hinge.
| | 02:07 |
So if you imagine that that line is
hinging, then the plane of the roof,
| | 02:10 |
instead of being flat right there at that
edge is actually going to slope up from
| | 02:14 |
that edge.
And how much it's going to slope is
| | 02:17 |
controlled by this number right here.
The default is this very strange fraction
| | 02:23 |
6 119/128" / 12".
Basically 7 and 12.
| | 02:27 |
I'm going to change that to a slightly
shallower slope of 4 and 12.
| | 02:31 |
Now, notice that all I have to type is
four, and when I press enter, Revit will
| | 02:35 |
see that as a four rise and a 12 run.
So it becomes a four and 12 slope.
| | 02:41 |
I'm going to come over here and I'm going
to click this other edge over here.
| | 02:44 |
Make that 4 and 12 as well.
And I'm just going to do two more.
| | 02:49 |
This one, notice that the corner cleans up
automatically here, but not here, so I'll
| | 02:54 |
fix that in a minute, and this one.
I want to go to my trim and extend to a corner.
| | 03:02 |
Clean this up, because like our floor
slabs that we talked about in the last
| | 03:05 |
movie, you have to have an enclosed shape
in order for the sketch to be completed.
| | 03:10 |
I'm going to click the finish button right
here.
| | 03:13 |
An if I deselect it, so you can get a
better look at it, you can see that we've
| | 03:16 |
essentially gotten a hip roof.
Now the best way to see this is to go to
| | 03:21 |
our little bird house icon over here on
the quick access toolbar.
| | 03:26 |
Now if I hold down my Shift key And drag
with my wheel, I can spin this thing
| | 03:29 |
around and get a slightly better look.
Now, of course, that roof is not really
| | 03:34 |
what I had in mind, it doesn't match the
shape of the building at all, but, what I
| | 03:38 |
wanted you to see was that we could very
quickly create a roof in a very
| | 03:41 |
traditional shape, a hip roof, in this
case.
| | 03:46 |
Now, if I select the roof, I can actually
modify it any time I like.
| | 03:50 |
I go that by going to the edit footprint
button on the modified tab.
| | 03:53 |
I can do that right here in 3D.
So if you want to, you can go back to the
| | 03:58 |
high roof, roof plan, but I can also
modify it here.
| | 04:01 |
Now what I want to do is take these two
edges at the end here.
| | 04:07 |
And select them with my Ctrl key and then
simply uncheck Define slope.
| | 04:12 |
When I do that, if I were to click Finish,
I get a gable roof.
| | 04:17 |
So, by deciding which edges are sloped and
which ones aren't you can change the shape
| | 04:21 |
of the roof pretty quickly.
Let's go to 'edit footprint' one more time.
| | 04:26 |
And let's make this shape match the shape
of the building a little bit better.
| | 04:30 |
So, now I'm going to go to my boundary
line again, pick walls, make sure I have
| | 04:34 |
my overhang, but this time, I'm going to
turn off Define slope.
| | 04:39 |
And I'm going to add a sketch line here,
to this wall, and here, to this wall.
| | 04:44 |
Notice that Revit automatically trims it
up at the corners.
| | 05:05 |
This is my low roof, down over here, and
I'll go to the Roof command, and it's
| | 05:09 |
going to ask me because I'm working in 3D,
which level I want to associate that roof to.
| | 05:16 |
So I'm going to associate it with the Low
Roof level.
| | 05:19 |
So this is just another way you can do it.
If you prefer, you can go to the low roof
| | 05:22 |
floor plan instead.
I'm going to turn on Define slope, pick a
| | 05:27 |
point right there, change that to a really
shallow slope, 2 and 12.
| | 05:33 |
Then I'm going to turn off define slope,
add a slope here and here, and then
| | 05:37 |
finally, I'm going to just draw a line
manually on this inside edge right there.
| | 05:44 |
Click my Modify tool to cancel.
When I click Fainish, because I only
| | 05:48 |
sloped one edge, I get a shed roof.
Okay, so just by controlling which edges
| | 05:54 |
are sloped and which ones aren't you can
do quite a variety of different standard
| | 05:58 |
roof forms.
The footprint roof is very similar to a
| | 06:02 |
floor slab except that typically you're
going to apply a slope to it.
| | 06:07 |
You use the Define slope checkbox to make
any one of the edges a sloping edge.
| | 06:12 |
And, that edge basically is treated like a
piano hinge.
| | 06:15 |
When you click Finish, Revit will figure
out the 3D geometry from your various
| | 06:19 |
sloping and non-sloping edges.
| | 06:21 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with ceilings| 00:00 |
Ceiling elements are similar to floors.
There are horizontal planes set at a
| | 00:03 |
certain height above the finished floor,
and can include layers of material in
| | 00:06 |
their construction.
You can choose from common types, like a 2
| | 00:10 |
by 4 grid, or a drywall ceiling, or even
create your own.
| | 00:14 |
The fastest way to create a ceiling is to
use the Auto-Ceiling option.
| | 00:18 |
This tool automatically creates a ceiling
from the walls that enclose the space.
| | 00:21 |
In cases where you don't have walls or
where the ceiling shape is irregular you
| | 00:24 |
can sketch the ceiling using many other
familiar sketch based tools.
| | 00:29 |
So I made a file here called Ceilings and
I'm in the Level 1 Floor Plan view.
| | 00:34 |
And the first thing I want to talk about
is a common mistake that we've all made
| | 00:37 |
when we first used ceilings, and that is
to go to the Architecture tab and go right
| | 00:40 |
to the ceiling tool.
I've got my automatic ceiling, and click a
| | 00:46 |
point and an error will occur, and that is
because I'm still in a floor plan.
| | 00:52 |
Ceilings don't display in a floor plan
view naturally.
| | 00:55 |
So I'm going to escape out of the command
couple times and I'm going to undo the
| | 00:59 |
placement of that last ceiling.
And what I want to do first then is scroll
| | 01:04 |
down over here and we've actually got some
ceiling plans here in the files.
| | 01:09 |
So i'm going to open up the Level 1
Ceiling Plan view and you'll see it'll
| | 01:12 |
look pretty similar to the floor plan but
the cut plane in this case is actually cut
| | 01:15 |
above the doors.
And so if we're looking a little higher up
| | 01:19 |
but it's still a reflected Ceiling view.
So, let's go to the Architecture tab.
| | 01:25 |
Click the ceiling button and this time
instead of just starting to click let's go
| | 01:28 |
ahead and look at some of the settings.
If I open up the type selector here on the
| | 01:32 |
properties pallet, there's a few different
kinds of ceilings we can choose from.
| | 01:38 |
I'd like to start with this one here the
two by four acoustical tile ceiling, so
| | 01:41 |
i'm going to select that.
Now, the height offset from level defaults
| | 01:45 |
to eight feet, and I'm going to start in
the offices.
| | 01:48 |
And I think that's a pretty good height
for offices.
| | 01:50 |
And then finally, I want to make sure on
the ribbon here that I've have got the
| | 01:53 |
Automatic Ceiling button selected.
It's already selected by default, I just
| | 01:57 |
want to verify that.
So, what you can see is that any enclosed
| | 02:01 |
space will highlight with this red
outline, and all you have to do is click,
| | 02:04 |
and it will create the ceiling plane
within that space.
| | 02:09 |
It's a very easy matter of simply clicking
in each of the office spaces, like so.
| | 02:16 |
Now, I can continue into some of the other
spaces, but perhaps I want to use
| | 02:18 |
different settings.
So, for example, maybe I want to use a
| | 02:21 |
drywall ceiling in my conference room, and
perhaps I want the height of that ceiling
| | 02:25 |
to be a little bit taller in the
conference room space, so I'm going to set
| | 02:28 |
the height to nine feet.
I'm going to use the drywall celing.
| | 02:33 |
And, then I'm going to pick in that space.
And, maybe I want to go back down to the
| | 02:37 |
eight foot level, but add a drywall celing
here in the toilet rooms.
| | 02:42 |
And then, possibly switch back to a two by
two ceiling, and, put a two by two celing
| | 02:47 |
here in the break room.
Those are the three kinds of ceiling that
| | 02:53 |
are built in automatically, the 2x4, the
2x2, and the dry wall ceiling.
| | 02:58 |
Now out in this area here, if I were to
just highlight, you see, it actually
| | 03:02 |
highlights the entire lobby and the
corridor spaces, and if you recall, the
| | 03:05 |
lobby in this particualr project is
actually a double volume space, so I dont
| | 03:08 |
really want the ceiling plane right there
I really only want the ceiling in this
| | 03:12 |
area here.
I can't really use the automatic ceiling
| | 03:18 |
for this next one.
So what I'm going to do instead is switch
| | 03:23 |
to the sketch ceiling mode.
So I just simply click that button and
| | 03:27 |
that just takes me into sketch mode and
now I can create ceilings using all of the
| | 03:30 |
familiar sketch tools.
So I'm going to start with my pick walls.
| | 03:35 |
And I'll pick this wall here, and this one
here.
| | 03:39 |
And this one here.
And this one here.
| | 03:43 |
Then we have another really handy tool
here, which is called pick lines.
| | 03:46 |
And I'm going to click that.
And I'm going to pick this edge here of
| | 03:49 |
the balcony up above.
And then, if I zoom in.
| | 03:55 |
Over in this area.
I need to make a line that goes across
| | 03:58 |
here, and I'm just going to draw that with
a simple line tool like so.
| | 04:04 |
Now as you can see, I've got some clean up
to do.
| | 04:07 |
So while I'm zoomed in here, I'll use my
trim and extend to a corner, and I'll
| | 04:10 |
clean up that corner.
And that corner.
| | 04:14 |
Remember to pick the part you want to
keep.
| | 04:16 |
Let me zoom previous.
Trim that one and that one is one and
| | 04:21 |
finally this one.
Cancel out of that.
| | 04:26 |
So there's the shape, you need to make
sure that its enclosed.
| | 04:30 |
Notice that I didn't go around the columns
its not really necessary that you make
| | 04:32 |
your ceiling go around the columns.
You can if you want to.
| | 04:36 |
And as long as those are enclosed shapes,
it will work just fine.
| | 04:39 |
But in this case, I'm going to let it just
pass right through the columns.
| | 04:42 |
I'm not really concerned about that.
And I'll click Finish.
| | 04:46 |
And when I deselect, you'll see that it
added a new ceiling plane in that location.
| | 04:52 |
The next thing I want to show you is how
you can actually start to manipulate the
| | 04:54 |
ceilings a little bit.
For example, if we look over here at these
| | 04:58 |
two offices, we'll notice that The
orientation of the grid matched the
| | 05:01 |
orientation of the office.
So, that' jut the default behavior, but,
| | 05:06 |
we actually do have control over that.
You can select any one of these grid
| | 05:10 |
lines, notice they all highlight
independently?
| | 05:14 |
What you're actually seeing there is a
surface pattern that's part of the
| | 05:17 |
material that's applied to that ceiling,
but, you can actually select the
| | 05:21 |
individual lines of that surface pattern.
And you can move and rotate them.
| | 05:28 |
Let me zoom in a little bit over here.
And if I select this line I can move it
| | 05:33 |
and lets say I move it about six inches.
Notice that the entire grid pattern moves
| | 05:38 |
along with it.
So, even though I only selected one line
| | 05:41 |
it actually moves the entire pattern.
If I chose rotate, I can reset my center
| | 05:45 |
point maybe to right there.
Use this as a start angle.
| | 05:51 |
And then rotate down 90 degrees.
And so now I've rotated the grid pattern
| | 05:55 |
in the other direction.
So, very easy to modify whatever the
| | 06:00 |
default is that it gives you.
Let's zoom back out.
| | 06:04 |
In terms of making decisions like that,
it's probably easier to make those
| | 06:07 |
decisions once you have some items on your
ceiling plane.
| | 06:10 |
So, light fixtures are the most obvious
object that we want to apply there.
| | 06:16 |
once we have some light fixtures, that
will tell us weather or not we need to
| | 06:18 |
start shifting the grids or not.
To add light fictures in a ceiling plan,
| | 06:22 |
its just simply the component tool, which
we've already looked at in some of the
| | 06:26 |
previous movies.
So, I'm going to load it up here, and see
| | 06:30 |
what we have in the project already.
If we scroll down We can see that there is
| | 06:35 |
a Troffer light lens light fixture here,
we've got several different sizes, and I
| | 06:40 |
am going to choose a two by four, two lamp
fixture right here, 120 volts.
| | 06:47 |
Notice that I get the little circle with
the line through it, this is similar to
| | 06:50 |
what we saw with doors and windows.
That's because a light fixture is a
| | 06:54 |
ceiling hosted fixture, and it's actually
telling me to click on a ceiling to place
| | 06:57 |
an instance.
So, if I move in to the space You can see
| | 07:01 |
the light fixed to appear.
So I am just going to zoom in a little bit
| | 07:05 |
in this office, what I usually do is I
just going to get it close by then I
| | 07:09 |
cancel out and to get it precisely placed
I usually go to the Modify tab and use my
| | 07:13 |
align tool.
Remember the shortcut for align is A L.
| | 07:20 |
So I am going to use the edge of the grid.
And aligned the light to that and the grid
| | 07:25 |
line again and align the light to that and
that brings the light fixture up in into
| | 07:29 |
the proper bay, want to cancel out of
there select it and I will use my Copy
| | 07:33 |
command to make additional copies
throughout the office The copy command
| | 07:37 |
actually has a multiple feature right
here.
| | 07:43 |
So if I check that box, that's going to
allow me to set my base point once and
| | 07:48 |
then say place one here, place one here,
place another one here.
| | 07:54 |
I'll cancel out of that.
I'm going to select all four, go to copy.
| | 08:02 |
Let's place some here, let's place some
here, now naturally if I can't start it
| | 08:06 |
here this is where we might want to start
rethinking the centering of those grids now.
| | 08:14 |
But now I have a very clear understanding
of how much the grid needs to shift by in
| | 08:17 |
order to accommodate the lighting pattern
that I'm after.
| | 08:22 |
If I select one of these grid lines, and I
want these light fixtures to be a little
| | 08:25 |
bit more centered, I can simply move it
and I can go down, maybe, half a tile, so,
| | 08:28 |
abut one foot.
And you'll see that will recenter the
| | 08:33 |
light fixtures.
In other words, the light fixtures are
| | 08:36 |
attached to that ceiling host and so if
the ceiling host adjusts, it takes the
| | 08:39 |
light fixtures along with it.
So, let me repeat in the other direction.
| | 08:45 |
I'm going to select the grid over here, go
to the move command, and I'll shift it
| | 08:49 |
over half a tile in the other direction.
That's pretty good right there, and I want
| | 08:54 |
these other offices to be similar, all I
have to do is use my align command there.
| | 08:59 |
And I'm going to select this.
And align this office, select it again,
| | 09:03 |
and align that office.
And you can see how once you get the basic
| | 09:07 |
objects placed in and you kind of get in
the swing of things.
| | 09:11 |
That it's all going to move very quickly.
Creating ceiling objects is quick and easy
| | 09:15 |
to do with the Auto Ceiling feature.
In the case where you have ceilings that
| | 09:19 |
are a little irregular, you can just
sketch them out manually using familiar
| | 09:22 |
Sketch Tools.
When you start placing light fixtures and
| | 09:26 |
other ceiling hosted fixtures in the
ceiling you can then use commands like
| | 09:29 |
move rotate and align to adjust the break
patterns on the ceiling and fine tune your
| | 09:33 |
ceiling plan layout.
| | 09:36 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with extrusion roofs| 00:00 |
Footprint roofs discussed in our previous
movie are probably the easiest way to
| | 00:03 |
create a roof.
And they certainly are the easiest way to
| | 00:06 |
get the most common forms like hips and
cables.
| | 00:08 |
However, there's lots of other shapes of
roofs that we can create and in some cases
| | 00:12 |
you'll want to create a roof that's not
easily achieved with a footprint roof.
| | 00:17 |
So, in this movie I'd like to look at the
extrusion roof.
| | 00:19 |
This is a good choice for roofs that are
barrel vaults or that are curving in one
| | 00:23 |
direction and so on.
So, in this case, I'm going to create and
| | 00:27 |
awning that going to go on this small
building here.
| | 00:31 |
Now, it's actually on the other side of
the building over here, and I'm going to
| | 00:34 |
use my view cube over here in the corner
to change my orientation.
| | 00:38 |
So, the way the view cube works is you
just highlight the area of the cube that
| | 00:41 |
you want to navigate to.
And in this case I can use the little
| | 00:45 |
corner right and if I click that it will
spin the view around and show me that I
| | 00:48 |
had this little patio on the back side.
Let me zoom in a little bit.
| | 00:54 |
Let's say that we wanted to put some sort
of curving awning up above this little
| | 00:57 |
patio area.
Now, I could do that right here in 3D, but
| | 01:01 |
it might actually be even be easier to do
that in an elevation view.
| | 01:05 |
So, this is the West elevation.
An this way I'm looking right at the wall
| | 01:10 |
that I want to work on.
And to do an extrusion roof the first is
| | 01:14 |
we have to establish the plane that we
want to do the work on.
| | 01:18 |
So, here in the Architecture tab, if I
click the dropdown on the Roof button I
| | 01:21 |
have Roof by Extrusion, right here, I'm
going to choose that.
| | 01:26 |
Now, that will pop up this box, which will
ask me to set my current work plane.
| | 01:32 |
You can do that in a variety of ways.
If you had a named work plane on this list
| | 01:36 |
here that you want to use you can choose
it, I don't have anything there.
| | 01:40 |
In this case I'm going to do Pick a Plane.
And what that allows me to do is click OK
| | 01:44 |
and use the geometry in the building
that's already here as the work plane.
| | 01:50 |
So, I'm going to select the face of this
wall and say that I want to draw directly
| | 01:54 |
on that wall.
Now, its still a roof so Revit will then
| | 01:57 |
ask me, well that's great what level do
you want to associate this roof to?
| | 02:02 |
Well, in this case, I only have level one
and two, so I'll just put it with level
| | 02:05 |
two and I'll click OK.
That takes me into Sketch mode, grays out
| | 02:09 |
the drawing as normal and at this point I
can just sketch the shape that I want my
| | 02:13 |
extrusion to be.
This is a little different kind of sketch
| | 02:18 |
because unlike the footprint sketch, we're
not making an enclosed shape here,
| | 02:21 |
instead, we're making an open shape.
And the shape you're making is the end of
| | 02:26 |
the roof rather than the footprint of the
roof.
| | 02:29 |
So, let me show you.
I'm going to have a little fun here, I'm
| | 02:31 |
going to do something that's a little
curvy.
| | 02:33 |
So, I'm going to use my start/end radius
arc and I'll pick a start point and then
| | 02:38 |
I'll go over here to slight angle and pick
an end point, and then I"m setting the
| | 02:42 |
radius, right.
So ,then I'll do maybe a radius about that
| | 02:48 |
much, maybe keep going over here and snap
it.
| | 02:54 |
Tangent and if you want you can change
shapes, I can even switch to a straight
| | 02:57 |
line at some point and you can make as
whimsical a shape as you want, you don't
| | 03:00 |
have to make exactly the shape that I've
done here.
| | 03:05 |
The key is, all you need is one edge for
each segment of the roof.
| | 03:10 |
In other words I don't want to wrap around
and make an eclipsed shape here in this case.
| | 03:15 |
Watch what happens when I click Finish.
You can see the thickness gets applied to
| | 03:19 |
the roof.
That comes from the roof type that's being
| | 03:22 |
chosen over here, and I'm using a generic
12 inch roof.
| | 03:25 |
So, that's where this thickness came from.
It's 12 inches of material.
| | 03:28 |
The only thing about an extrusion roof
that's a little odd is, if I go back to my
| | 03:33 |
3D view here, it always goes through the
building.
| | 03:37 |
So, Revit instead of asking us how deep we
want the roof to be when we do an
| | 03:41 |
extrusion, it makes a guess.
And it usually guesses based on the depth
| | 03:46 |
of your building.
So, what I'm going to do here is simply
| | 03:48 |
select this and then there is a little
grip here at the end, and then I'm
| | 03:51 |
going to pull that out to about there and
then say, Okay why don't I make that a
| | 03:54 |
whole number?
So, I'll do about 55 feet there and I'll
| | 03:58 |
do the same thing here, just kind of pull
it out here somewhere.
| | 04:02 |
And you can see that that give me a little
gap away form the building, which may be
| | 04:05 |
my design intent.
Or it may not be so in my case I want that
| | 04:09 |
to be flush up against the building.
This is a great job for the align command.
| | 04:15 |
If I go to the Modify tab, click my Align
tool.
| | 04:19 |
When we've previously looked at the Align
tool, we've done it in 2D.
| | 04:22 |
But it works just as well here in 3D.
I'm going to highlight the face of this
| | 04:26 |
wall as my alignment edge.
And then I'm going to highlight the face
| | 04:31 |
of my roof and Revit will stretch the roof
over and attach it to the face of that wall.
| | 04:38 |
So, an extrusion roof is also a sketch
based roof.
| | 04:43 |
It's just sketched in a vertical plane
rather than a horizontal plane.
| | 04:47 |
And all you sketch is the overall profile
of the roof.
| | 04:50 |
And then Revit will extrude it from there.
It's good for barrel vaults or for
| | 04:54 |
undulating forms like this, and it's
another alternative to creating a roof form.
| | 04:58 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Attaching walls to roofs| 00:01 |
In this movie, I'd like to look at
connecting the Wall Geometry to the Roof Geometry.
| | 00:05 |
The file I have on the screen is called
Attaching Walls.
| | 00:07 |
And as you can see, over here on the left,
the walls do not actually meet the roof object.
| | 00:13 |
So they all stop here at whatever height
they happen to be assigned to.
| | 00:16 |
In this case, they're going up to the
level.
| | 00:18 |
But they don't go all the way up to the
roof.
| | 00:20 |
Now compare that to, this wall here that
you can see actually goes up and follows
| | 00:24 |
the slope of the roof.
It's actually really easy to achieve that.
| | 00:29 |
All you have to do is select the wall, or
walls.
| | 00:32 |
And use this button right here to attach
its top or base to the near by geometry.
| | 00:37 |
Now we are going to do this with the roof,
but you can actually do this with floor
| | 00:41 |
slaps or with ceilings or with any
geometry that runs horizontally.
| | 00:46 |
So to make this a little easier I am
going to select all four walls, so I am
| | 00:49 |
going to highlight one, press my Tab key.
That'll highlight all four walls, and then
| | 00:54 |
remember when you're doing a chain
selection with your Tab key don't forget
| | 00:58 |
to click.
A lot of times people will go highlight,
| | 01:01 |
Tab, yeah that's what I want and then move
their mouse away.
| | 01:03 |
You gotta go highlight, tab, click, and
now I've got all four walls selected and
| | 01:07 |
then all I have to do is click attach top
and base.
| | 01:12 |
The Options bar will say what do you want
to attach, the top or the base?
| | 01:17 |
Obviously, we want to attach the top edge
of the walls.
| | 01:20 |
So I'll leave that selected.
And then you just click anywhere on the roof.
| | 01:23 |
And you will see, if I spin this, I'm
holding my Shift key and dragging with the wheel.
| | 01:29 |
You will see, the walls have now projected
up and attached the underside of the roof.
| | 01:35 |
Now what's really powerful about this is
this is not a one time edit.
| | 01:39 |
If I select this roof, scroll down, and
it's currently a 3 in 12 slope, if i
| | 01:43 |
change that to something steeper.
Lets go with a 5 in 12, click Apply,
| | 01:48 |
notice what happens with the walls.
Same thing is true with my gable here.
| | 01:53 |
Let's make that a 6 and 12, click Apply,
and you'll see it will project up here.
| | 01:58 |
Now, it's actually attached here with my
hip roof as well.
| | 02:02 |
But to show you that I need to open up
this section here, section one, and I'll
| | 02:06 |
zoom in over here on the right.
And you can see that it's actually cutting
| | 02:11 |
the top edges of the walls to match the
underside of that roof.
| | 02:14 |
And again if you change the slope it would
maintain that setting.
| | 02:18 |
The last thing I should point out here is
what can be a little confusing about the
| | 02:22 |
attach to top and base feature.
Is this attach feature takes precedence
| | 02:27 |
over the level constraint.
So if we look at this wall for example and
| | 02:31 |
we scroll down here on the top constraint.
You can see that it goes up to the level
| | 02:36 |
called parapit, that's this level right
here but it clearly goes beyond that,
| | 02:39 |
that's because its also attached to this
roof.
| | 02:44 |
Now unfortunately there's no way to see
here on the properties pallet that it's
| | 02:47 |
attached to anything.
So that's something you just have to
| | 02:50 |
investigate by, looking at how it behaves
in the model.
| | 02:53 |
It's usually pretty obvious when an object
is attached to something, in this case
| | 02:56 |
it's pretty obvious that it's attached to
the roof.
| | 02:59 |
So, when you want your walls to attach to
the underside of your roof structure.
| | 03:03 |
All you have to do is select the walls and
use the Attach Top and Base command to
| | 03:06 |
attach them, to the underside of the roof.
I showed it with roofs here, but it works
| | 03:11 |
equally well with floor slabs, and with
ceiling slabs and other similar horizontal structures.
| | 03:16 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the shape editing tools to create a flat roof| 00:00 |
Roofs come in all sorts of shapes and
varieties, but many buildings have simple
| | 00:03 |
flat roofs.
So in this movie I'd like to look at some
| | 00:07 |
of the techniques we can use to create a
simple flat roof.
| | 00:09 |
Now, even a flat roof has some sort of
sloping, it's not completely flat.
| | 00:13 |
In an early schematic design, you can get
away with just doing a flat slab without
| | 00:17 |
any slope, and it will be representational
enough.
| | 00:20 |
But at some point in the design, you're
probably going to want to start modeling
| | 00:23 |
the actual slope, so that you get a more
accurate representation of what's really
| | 00:26 |
going to be there.
So I'm in a file called Flat Roof, and I
| | 00:30 |
want to look specifically at the shape
editing tools that are available on roof slabs.
| | 00:36 |
That will allow us to sculpt the drainage
sloping for a flat roof.
| | 00:41 |
There's kind of a lot of pieces that need
to fit together correctly in order for
| | 00:43 |
this technique to work, so let's sort of
try and walk through this systematically.
| | 00:48 |
If I select this roof right here, okay
this is just a pretty typical flat roof.
| | 00:55 |
It's called Insulation on Metal Deck and
there's no slope applied to it as you can see.
| | 01:00 |
Compare that to this one.
This one is just a generic nine inch roof.
| | 01:04 |
Now I want you to look right here at the
ribbon in particular when I select these.
| | 01:09 |
This one obviously has a slope, and I
click it, and I get this single button
| | 01:13 |
here, Edit Footprint, but if I click this
one in addition to Edit Footprint, I also
| | 01:17 |
get this Shape Editing panel.
So the first thing that has to be in order
| | 01:24 |
for you to use the shape editing tools is,
you have to start with a completely flat roof.
| | 01:29 |
You can't even have one edge slope
defining.
| | 01:33 |
So that's the first thing.
The second thing is the way this slope
| | 01:36 |
gets applied to a roof using shape editing
tools is by points.
| | 01:41 |
There's actually three methods that you
can use to add those points.
| | 01:44 |
You can add them individually point by
point, you can add lines where you draw a
| | 01:48 |
line and then that actually has two
points, or you can actually do pic supports.
| | 01:55 |
So, for example if I just did Add a Point,
you'll see that that takes me into a kind
| | 01:59 |
of sketch mode.
Now, I should stress that this isn't
| | 02:03 |
really the same sketch mode.
It does gray out the screen, but it's not
| | 02:06 |
really the same kind of mode that we
looked at in some of the previous movies.
| | 02:10 |
So, it really is its own thing.
But, you can see right here that the plane
| | 02:14 |
of the roof highlights in that green
dashed line, and I'm just going to click a
| | 02:17 |
point right there.
The green stuff is the stuff that Revit created.
| | 02:23 |
And that was created automatically from
the shape of the roof.
| | 02:26 |
When I add a point, you can see it comes
in in that bluish color.
| | 02:29 |
Now if I use this tool right here, this is
the tool that I need to use to actually
| | 02:33 |
change the height of that point.
So if I click on it, I can click this
| | 02:39 |
little blue point and it's currently at 0,
0 is measured relative to the plain of the
| | 02:43 |
roof, and if I click in that dimension I
can change that to a positive or negative
| | 02:47 |
number to move it up or down relative to
the roof.
| | 02:53 |
So I could put in maybe 4 inches here and
it kind of makes this little pyramidal form.
| | 02:59 |
If I add another point maybe over here,
modify that sub element.
| | 03:05 |
Make that a negative 4 inches.
Now you can kind of see these gray lines
| | 03:11 |
are sculpting to follow that shape.
So in, if you have a low point here and a
| | 03:16 |
high point here that's kind of what the
roof has to do.
| | 03:19 |
Now I'm doing sort of a little nonsense
example there just to show you what this
| | 03:22 |
looks like.
But you can see, that when I cancel out of
| | 03:26 |
the command, I have in fact sculpted the
shape of my roof, and it may be easier to
| | 03:30 |
see here if I go to a Section view.
And if we look over here, my roof is in
| | 03:36 |
now kind of twisted and warped a little
bit.
| | 03:39 |
Now if that's the roof I had in mind, I
could call it done, but if we Investigate
| | 03:43 |
this section a little bit more closely, we
see a few things that we might want to address.
| | 03:49 |
First of all, probably don't want such a
weird shaped roof.
| | 03:52 |
I'm not really sure if that would be of
much benefit.
| | 03:55 |
And secondly, you can see that the entire
form of the roof is twisting with those points.
| | 04:03 |
So there's two things I want to show you
next.
| | 04:05 |
I'm going to select this, and I'm going to
actually reset the shape right here.
| | 04:09 |
Then I'm going to go back to my 3D view
and use my Modify Sub Elements, and I'm
| | 04:15 |
going to take this point at the corner and
I'm going to increase that to about 6 inches.
| | 04:24 |
And then this point at the corner.
Sometimes you've gotta make a little box
| | 04:27 |
around it if you can't select it directly
and make that 6 inches as well.
| | 04:32 |
So, that's a really subtle change in slope
that I'm giving it right there.
| | 04:36 |
Let me go down here and reopen the section
and show you what that did.
| | 04:41 |
So, now you can see that it's a little
more rational.
| | 04:42 |
The plane is sloping.
Well a lot of times with this kind of a
| | 04:46 |
flat roof what actually will happen is
that the rigid insulation on top of the
| | 04:49 |
roof that's tapered and the actual
structure of the roof remains flat.
| | 04:55 |
So if that's the kind of construction that
I want to emulate, then I'm going to
| | 04:59 |
select this roof object and I need to do
one last thing.
| | 05:04 |
And that is edit the type over here on the
Property's pallet, so I'm going to chose
| | 05:07 |
Edit Type.
I can duplicate this type if I don't want
| | 05:11 |
to modify the one that's here, or I can
edit it directly.
| | 05:14 |
Just remember, if you edit it directly,
it's going to affect every instance of
| | 05:18 |
this type throughout the entire model.
So, sometimes it's a little safer to
| | 05:22 |
duplicate it first and give it a unique
name.
| | 05:25 |
I'll just add the word taper at the end
and then edit it and what we want is this
| | 05:29 |
variable column over on the right.
You can make one component in the roof
| | 05:35 |
structure variable.
So here's my rigid insulation, it's 5 inch
| | 05:38 |
thick right now continue as 5 inch thick.
If I check this and click OK, you are
| | 05:44 |
going to see that all of the difference in
taper gets applied directly to the
| | 05:48 |
insulation and the remaining part of the
roof stays flat.
| | 05:54 |
So the under edge is flat and the
insulation now is thin on the right and
| | 05:58 |
thick on the left.
So if you want to accurately represent
| | 06:03 |
this flat roof with drainage sloping and
tapered bridged insulation It actually
| | 06:08 |
takes this sort of multi-step approach.
You have to start with a completely flat roof.
| | 06:15 |
Then you have to use the Shape Editing
tools to either add points or lines and
| | 06:18 |
manipulate where the heights of those
points are.
| | 06:21 |
And then finally you have to take your
roof type structure.
| | 06:26 |
And, turn on the variable feature next to
the rigid installation component to get
| | 06:29 |
the taper to apply just to the rigid
installation.
| | 06:33 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with slope arrows| 00:00 |
There's one more way that we can create
slope in a roof or even in a floor slab,
| | 00:03 |
and that's using something called a Slope
Arrow.
| | 00:07 |
So I'm in a file called Slope Arrows.
And, slope arrows are typically used when
| | 00:11 |
the slope that you want to define doesn't
run perpendicular to the edge.
| | 00:16 |
So another way to say that is, when we
used the slope defining check box in the
| | 00:20 |
previous movies It was turning that edge
of the sketch into a piano hinge.
| | 00:26 |
So, if I select this roof right here, and
I Edit the Footprint, if I select one of
| | 00:30 |
these edges and turn on Define Slope, it's
kind of like this is a hinge.
| | 00:36 |
I am going to turn that off.
What if this slope doesn't run
| | 00:39 |
perpendicular to that edge?
It doesn't hinge on that edge, it runs at
| | 00:43 |
another angle.
That's really where a Slope Arrow can be a
| | 00:46 |
very handy thing.
With the Slope Arrow you just simply draw
| | 00:50 |
this arrow and the arrow has two points.
It's got a low point and a high point and
| | 00:55 |
you define what those points are and then
the slope of the roof will follow along
| | 00:59 |
that arrow.
So all I have to do is click the Slope
| | 01:03 |
Arrow, and in this example, I'm going to
go from corner to corner here.
| | 01:07 |
So I'm going to go from this corner of the
building over to this corner of the
| | 01:11 |
building using my Object Snaps in both
directions.
| | 01:15 |
Let me zoom in just a little bit here so
we can see.
| | 01:19 |
And with this arrow still selected, if I
look over here on the Properties palatte.
| | 01:24 |
There's two things we can specify, we can
either specify the height at the tail or
| | 01:28 |
the slope along the arrow.
So if we do the Height features, you get a
| | 01:33 |
low point and a high point.
So in the default it's saying it's zero
| | 01:38 |
here and it's ten feet here.
So it starts at zero, slopes up to 10 feet.
| | 01:44 |
If you switch this to Slope, it turns off
that feature, it grays it out.
| | 01:48 |
And then down here you would actually put
in a slope in the traditional rise over
| | 01:51 |
run format.
So the way you define the slope is really
| | 01:55 |
up to you and this one I'm going to do the
hide it tail.
| | 01:58 |
And I"m going to accept that default ten
feet, apply that, and I'm going to finish
| | 02:02 |
the roof.
Let's see what we get.
| | 02:04 |
Now, if we look at this its best if you
orbit in 3D here, so I am going to hold my
| | 02:08 |
Shift key and spin the wheel.
And you can kind of start to see what I
| | 02:13 |
did, so instead of the slope matching just
one of the edges of the roof.
| | 02:17 |
It actually runs along the diagonal of the
roof and you can kind of see that very
| | 02:21 |
clearly with this view here.
So, the low point is way down at this
| | 02:26 |
corner, high point up here.
All right, let's look at another quick example.
| | 02:31 |
Over here, I'm going to select this one,
Edit the Footprint.
| | 02:35 |
I'm going to give myself a guideline here.
Sometimes, it's easier to do it that way.
| | 02:40 |
I want to use the midpoint right here, so
you just have to make sure you erase that
| | 02:43 |
guideline when you're done.
Let me draw a Slope Arrow, in this Slope
| | 02:46 |
Arrow I only want to go halfway.
So I'm going to snap to that midpoint.
| | 02:52 |
An I'm going to change the, height at the
arrowhead to five feet.
| | 02:58 |
An then I'm going to keep that thing
selected, go to Mirror, an I'm going to
| | 03:01 |
Mirror around this guideline that I drew.
And then, of course, I need to delete the guideline.
| | 03:07 |
If I don't delete the guideline, and I try
and finish, Revit will complain, because I
| | 03:10 |
haven't got a valid sketch right now.
So I have to click Continue, and Delete
| | 03:14 |
the offending line.
And now I should be able to finish, and
| | 03:17 |
watch what kind of roof I get here.
Now your contractor is going to love you
| | 03:22 |
if you do this roof.
Because its going to be really difficult
| | 03:25 |
to frame but you know it's not that
unusual so, you could may be give that one
| | 03:28 |
a try.
And, really the points is with a
| | 03:31 |
combination of Slope Arrows and slope
defining edges you can get also lots of
| | 03:34 |
interesting shapes.
In fact, that's exactly what I have right here.
| | 03:39 |
Now what I'm going to do to show you this
one is I'm going to take this wall.
| | 03:42 |
Go down to my little sunglasses here, my
temporary hide isolate.
| | 03:45 |
We looked at this in a previous movie, and
I'm going to hide that element.
| | 03:49 |
Now that gives me the temporary Hide mode,
and it's just telling me just get it out
| | 03:52 |
of my way, it's temporarily hidden.
Let me orbit the 3D view just a little bit
| | 03:56 |
here and show you how these crickets were
formed.
| | 04:00 |
So, I'm going to select this roof, edit
the footprint and you can see that it's a
| | 04:05 |
combination of slope defining edges.
This little short segment right here,
| | 04:11 |
define slope and then these overlapping
Slope Arrows where the low point here is
| | 04:15 |
at zero.
And the high point here is just at six
| | 04:19 |
inches, so it's a very shallow slope.
Now, if I select this Slope Arrow and I
| | 04:24 |
kind of Delete it, you'll see that there
actually is a sketch line underneath, so
| | 04:28 |
let me undo that.
Now the important thing is that sketch
| | 04:32 |
line underneath needs to have the defined
slope feature turned off.
| | 04:37 |
You can't put a Slope Arrow and a slope
defining edge in the same spot.
| | 04:42 |
Revit will argue with you or complain
about that.
| | 04:44 |
Now how did I create this?
It was pretty simple, I'll just do it over
| | 04:47 |
here on the other side.
I used my Split tool.
| | 04:51 |
And I Split that wall into a couple
pieces, then I selected this line and I
| | 04:54 |
turned off the Define Slope.
So, that gave me the flat portion right
| | 05:00 |
there and then I drew a Slope Arrow and it
went from the end point to the mid point.
| | 05:07 |
So, right there and I defined how high I
wanted that, six inches.
| | 05:12 |
And then I can either mirror it or just
draw another one, and I'll just draw the
| | 05:16 |
other one from here to here.
And again make sure it goes to six inches
| | 05:22 |
like so.
And let's finish the roof and you can see
| | 05:25 |
that I've now just defined another little
cricket over here on the other side.
| | 05:30 |
So, sloped arrows are a way for you to
define slopes in your roof that would be
| | 05:33 |
difficult or impossible to achieve with
any of the other different methods.
| | 05:39 |
It would theoretically be possible to use
the Shape Editing tools that we looked at
| | 05:42 |
in the last movie to also model these same
crickets.
| | 05:46 |
So I encourage you to, try both techniques
an see which one you like better.
| | 05:50 |
But Slope Arrows are a really great way to
do, unusual shapes like the ones that I
| | 05:53 |
had over here.
An there really wouldn't be too many other
| | 05:57 |
ways, to define a roof like that without a
Slope Arrow.
| | 05:59 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding openings| 00:00 |
Once you have the basic geometry like
walls, floors and roofs in place in your
| | 00:03 |
model, you'll begin the steady process of
refining the model as the design progresses.
| | 00:08 |
In many cases you'll find the need to cut
holes in these elements like simple
| | 00:11 |
passage ways through walls, shafts for
floors, elevators and equipment and floors
| | 00:14 |
and skylights and dormers and roofs.
In some cases, you'll find it easiest to
| | 00:19 |
edit the sketch of the element in question
to represent such penetration.
| | 00:22 |
This approach would work well for floors
which represent double volume spaces, for example.
| | 00:28 |
In other cases, you might use an opening
object to actually cut through the solid geometry.
| | 00:33 |
So, in this movie we're going to explore a
few examples of opening objects, and I'm
| | 00:36 |
going to start with a shaft opening.
And the file I have open here on screen is
| | 00:41 |
called Shaft.
Now, the opening objects are on the
| | 00:44 |
architecture tab you can find them here on
the opening panel.
| | 00:48 |
We're not going to do all five opening
types, but we are going to look at a
| | 00:50 |
couple of these.
And again, I'm going to start with the
| | 00:53 |
shaft opening.
Now let me set the stage here first.
| | 00:56 |
I'm in a view called, section 2 here.
And, this section is cutting through the
| | 01:02 |
elevator shaft of my building.
And lets just get a closer look here, let
| | 01:06 |
me zoom in.
A little bit on a couple of these floors
| | 01:10 |
here, and what you'll see is, the floor
slab here goes all the way through, on
| | 01:15 |
each level.
Clearly, that would make it a little bit
| | 01:19 |
difficult for our elevator cab to travel
through there.
| | 01:21 |
Our two options for dealing with that
would be to select the floor, go to edit
| | 01:25 |
boundary because I'm not in a floor plan
view Revit would alert me of that fact and
| | 01:30 |
ask me for a floor plan that I wanted to
open up like level two.
| | 01:37 |
And then, in that floor plan, I would have
to draw the shape of the hole that I
| | 01:41 |
wanted to cut through that space and I
could do that with a simple rectangle for example.
| | 01:49 |
I have just answered no that question.
When i finished that, and i go back to the
| | 01:54 |
section that would infact, you know, cut
the hole in there, but the trouble is,
| | 01:59 |
that the only worked for the one floor
that i had selected.
| | 02:05 |
So, what I'm going to do here is Reverse
all of that with my Undo command.
| | 02:10 |
And, I'm going to instead use a shaft
opening.
| | 02:13 |
The advantage that the shaft opening has,
is it's a separate sketch-based object
| | 02:16 |
that we draw at once and then we adjust
the height of it.
| | 02:20 |
And it will cut through every object in
its path.
| | 02:24 |
So, let's go to the first floor plan here
to get started.
| | 02:29 |
Level one, and I'm going to zoom in on the
elevator area, and I want to create the
| | 02:33 |
shaft in that are right there.
So I'll click shaft, that takes me to
| | 02:38 |
sketch mode, we talked about sketch mode
quite a bit already, and I can really draw
| | 02:42 |
this thing using any of the methods, I
could use pick walls, or just draw a rectangle.
| | 02:50 |
In this case I'm going to just draw a
simple rectangle and I'm going to start
| | 02:53 |
right here at the intersection of those
two walls and go over here to the
| | 02:57 |
intersection of these two walls.
Now, with these lock icons I can even lock
| | 03:04 |
this sketch.
And the advantage of that will be, if any
| | 03:08 |
of those walls move, this sketch will
actually adjust.
| | 03:11 |
The potential disadvantage of doing that
is if one of those walls moves in such a
| | 03:14 |
way that the sketch can't stay attached,
it might generate an error message.
| | 03:19 |
So, just be careful about locking your
sketch's, but in this case I'll go ahead
| | 03:22 |
and do it.
I'm going to click finish here, and to see
| | 03:26 |
the result of that, I need to go back to
the section view, I'll go to section 2 here.
| | 03:32 |
And, interestingly enough, the shaft
actually ended up sort of in the middle of
| | 03:36 |
the space there.
Either using the settings here on the
| | 03:41 |
Properties palette, the level constraints
and heights, or these little grips, I can
| | 03:45 |
make adjustments to that height.
So, what I'm going to do is make the base constraint.
| | 03:51 |
Start at level one, let's apply that and
see what that does.
| | 03:54 |
You see how that'll pull it down there.
And then the top constraint here is
| | 03:57 |
already up to level three, that seems to
do the trick.
| | 04:02 |
And if I deselect the shaft, you can see
the result.
| | 04:05 |
We now have a nice clean space through
here.
| | 04:07 |
The walls pass through cleanly and the
elevator can pass through that shaft there.
| | 04:12 |
So, the shaft opening is a void opening.
Okay, so it cuts through everything in its path.
| | 04:19 |
I'd like to look at another example, I'd
like to look at the dormer example, it's a
| | 04:22 |
similar kind of thing, so I've got another
file open here in the background called dormer.
| | 04:28 |
It's just a simple little building here.
I've got a hip roof and then I've got a
| | 04:33 |
small little gable roof here.
And then, these three little walls right
| | 04:37 |
here which make up the dormer assembly.
So the first step of creating a dormer is
| | 04:41 |
to just build the actually geometry that
would represent the dormer.
| | 04:45 |
What I want to do now is actually create a
hole.
| | 04:49 |
I'm going to select all this stuff and
temporarily hide it.
| | 04:53 |
With my sunglass icon down here, and you
can see that, there's no hole in the roof beyond.
| | 04:59 |
So let me reset the temporary hide
isolate, and so that's going to be what
| | 05:02 |
this dormer opening tool is going to do
for me.
| | 05:06 |
It's going to allow me to build.
That hole in the other roof.
| | 05:10 |
Now the first step is this roof is not
touching the back roof.
| | 05:14 |
So I want to join these two together.
There's a tool for that.
| | 05:17 |
Go to the modify tab, and I click on the
join unjoin roof tool.
| | 05:23 |
It's prompting me to select an edge at the
end of the roof.
| | 05:27 |
I can pick either one of these.
And then the plain I want to attach it to,
| | 05:30 |
and it will just extend that roof back and
attach it.
| | 05:34 |
Then I go to the Architecture Tab, and I
can create my dormer opening.
| | 05:37 |
So I am going to click the tool, and the
first question that its asking me is to
| | 05:41 |
select the roof that's going to be cut by
this opening and its going to be this roof.
| | 05:46 |
Now, that'll take me into a kind of sketch
mode and this is similar to other objects
| | 05:49 |
we've seen that it has this pick option
right here.
| | 05:53 |
I can pick the edges of roofs and walls.
So, if I pick this roof it draws that
| | 05:58 |
little v shape, and if I pick these walls
you can see that it will create those
| | 06:02 |
little sketch shapes over here.
Now, if I zoom in slightly, this sketch
| | 06:08 |
line went to the inside face of the other
wall there, so I'm going to click my
| | 06:12 |
modify tool to cancel out of that mode.
Select this, and I'm just going to flip it
| | 06:18 |
to the other side, and then I'll use my
trim command To trim up these corners.
| | 06:23 |
So like other sketches this has to be an
enclosed shape.
| | 06:26 |
When I click finish I'll get this error
message, now this can be a little scary
| | 06:29 |
looking message here everything turned
orange on screen and it says it can't continue.
| | 06:35 |
But what it's actually talking about is
not really the dormer at all, what it's
| | 06:38 |
talking about is the wall out here, the
exterior wall.
| | 06:42 |
That's attached to the underside of the
roof.
| | 06:45 |
The remedy is listed right here.
I can unjoin the elements.
| | 06:48 |
I'm going to go ahead and do that.
Now, you could see the dormer is nice and clean.
| | 06:53 |
It's all done.
If I select these elements here, with a
| | 06:56 |
window selection like we did a few moments
ago and I do hide element, you can see
| | 07:00 |
we've got a nice little hole cut through
the roof there.
| | 07:05 |
Let me reset that.
Where the trouble is, if I open up a
| | 07:08 |
section that cuts through this dormer.
I'm going to open up section two.
| | 07:13 |
You could see the dormer condition here.
Lets zoom in on it.
| | 07:18 |
This was really where the problem was.
So the wall up here is kind of in the same
| | 07:22 |
general location as this wall over here.
So, you could either join those walls
| | 07:27 |
together or what I'm going to actually do
in here is I'm going to tab into this wall
| | 07:31 |
and select it and I'm just going to use
the temporary dimension here to make that
| | 07:34 |
about three foot nine.
That'll pull that wall back slightly and
| | 07:40 |
then I can select this wall.
And reattach, it to the under side of the
| | 07:44 |
roof, and it kind of takes care of the
problem.
| | 07:47 |
If you want to, you could adjust the
overhang of the roof, and so on.
| | 07:50 |
So, there's a couple quick examples of a
few of the opening objects we have.
| | 07:55 |
A shaft opening will cut through any
horizontal slab, or roof that it finds in
| | 07:59 |
its path.
You can adjust the heights in order to
| | 08:03 |
have its effect be more broad.
A dormer opening is a very specific kind
| | 08:06 |
of opening, specifically for cutting
dormers into roof slabs and, I encourage
| | 08:09 |
you to explore some of these other
openings on your own.
| | 08:14 |
We've got simple vertical openings and
wall openings, they'll kind of work the
| | 08:17 |
same way.
They are a void object that intercepts
| | 08:20 |
with a solid object and cuts the form
away.
| | 08:23 |
But the really nice thing about these void
objects is, because they're separate
| | 08:26 |
objects, you can modify them later and
they will reapply themselves automatically
| | 08:30 |
to the surrounding geometry.
| | 08:33 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. StairsWorking with stairs| 00:00 |
In this movie we're going to look at
stairs.
| | 00:02 |
Stairs come in two varieties here.
We have a component based stair and we
| | 00:06 |
have the traditional sketch based stair.
In this movie I'm going to focus on the
| | 00:11 |
traditional sketch based stair.
I'm in a file here called sketch stairs.
| | 00:16 |
And I'm in the level two floor plan.
And I'm going to work down in the lobby in
| | 00:19 |
the lower portion of the plans.
So, I'm going to zoom in right here on
| | 00:23 |
this area of the plan right here.
And it's labeled stair A.
| | 00:27 |
Now, if we go to the Architecture tab,
we'll find the Stair tool, and if you
| | 00:30 |
click the little drop down, you can see
the two types that I mentioned.
| | 00:35 |
Stair by component and Stair by sketch.
So, in this case we're going to choose our
| | 00:39 |
Stair by sketch.
And that will take me into our traditional
| | 00:43 |
sketch mode.
There's a few things we want to do before
| | 00:46 |
we start clicking points in the stair
sketch.
| | 00:48 |
The first thing is, there are a couple
draw modes, like we've had in other sketch modes.
| | 00:52 |
We've got Run, Boundary, and Riser.
Now, Run is by far the easiest mode
| | 00:55 |
because it will actually create all the
pieces that are required in the sketch
| | 00:59 |
with just a few clicks.
So, you typically want to try and use Run
| | 01:03 |
wherever you can.
If you look at the tool tip that's
| | 01:05 |
appeared on my screen there, you can that
the sketch will come in three colors.
| | 01:10 |
You'll have a green color, which
represents the boundary lines, the outline
| | 01:13 |
of the stair and you're going to have an
outline on either side.
| | 01:16 |
You'll have a blue line, which runs down
the middle of the stair, and that just
| | 01:18 |
represents the path of the stair.
And then finally you'll have some black
| | 01:22 |
lines which represent the riser lines.
So, I want to make sure Run is chosen.
| | 01:27 |
Next, I want to look over here on my
Properties pallet and verify that the
| | 01:30 |
settings here are correct and what I
expect.
| | 01:33 |
So, I'm going to start at level two
because I'm in the level two floor plan
| | 01:36 |
and I want this stair to go up to level
three.
| | 01:40 |
So, those two settings are fine.
That will determine for me, how many
| | 01:44 |
risers Revit needs to create.
So, because I'm going, up to those two
| | 01:49 |
floors, it does the math.
It based that math on the maximum riser height.
| | 01:54 |
An you can see that, right here the actual
riser height is just shy of seven inches.
| | 01:59 |
Well, if we were to click Edit Type.
You can see here that the type for the
| | 02:04 |
stairs is seven inch max, 11 inch tread.
If we were to click Edit Type and scroll down.
| | 02:10 |
What you would see here is that under
Risers, the maximum riser height is seven inches.
| | 02:15 |
So, if I cancel out of here it's simply
doing the math and trying to get me as
| | 02:18 |
close to seven inches as it can.
And it came up with a number of risers of
| | 02:23 |
the 18th.
Now, you can actually modify the number if
| | 02:26 |
you needed to.
But you can't modify to a point that makes
| | 02:29 |
the riser taller than seven inches.
If you do it will generate an error message.
| | 02:34 |
Now, we have a width parameter right here
as well, and I'm going to change that to
| | 02:37 |
four feet.
You can change it later, but it's usually
| | 02:40 |
easier if you remember to do it first,
because then the size of the stair is a
| | 02:43 |
little bit easier to control, so I've got
that.
| | 02:47 |
And then I don't try and get my stair in
exactly the right spot first try, what I
| | 02:51 |
usually do is I click nearby.
And just kind of build it nearby and then
| | 02:56 |
I'll move it into place.
I find that a little bit easier.
| | 03:00 |
Now, I'm going to start moving my mouse
down, and I want you to look very
| | 03:04 |
carefully at the little message that
appears directly below my cursor.
| | 03:10 |
So, you can see that the message currently
says nine risers created nine remaining.
| | 03:16 |
You want to pay attention that message
because that's letting you know basically
| | 03:19 |
when you need to click.
So, what I'm going to do right now is
| | 03:22 |
click my mouse.
And that creates the first run of stairs.
| | 03:27 |
Now, you can create as many runs in your
stair as you need.
| | 03:31 |
So, each time you create a Run, what will
happen is, when you create your next Run,
| | 03:34 |
Revit will create a landing automatically
for you.
| | 03:38 |
To join the two runs together.
So, when you're using this tool, you're
| | 03:42 |
just drawing the run.
You do not draw their landings.
| | 03:46 |
Revit takes care of the landings.
Let me show you.
| | 03:48 |
I'm going to move my mouse over here, and
keep it lined up with that one.
| | 03:51 |
Click.
Pull it straight up, until it says zero remaining.
| | 03:57 |
And then I'll click again.
And you'll see here how it created the
| | 04:02 |
landing sketch for me.
So, you just draw the runs, you do that
| | 04:06 |
with a few clicks, and Revit sort of fills
in the details.
| | 04:10 |
Now, once we have that, we can take this
entire sketch, and I'm just going to put a
| | 04:13 |
window around the whole thing.
We can use our standard modification tools
| | 04:17 |
like the Move tool.
And I'm going to move from this endpoint,
| | 04:21 |
and I'm going to snap it right to that
endpoint.
| | 04:24 |
And that gets it positioned at the correct
starting point.
| | 04:28 |
Next what I'm going to do is select only
this half of the stair, because, you see
| | 04:33 |
this nice little gap over here, to the
wall?
| | 04:37 |
I want to match that same amouont over
here.
| | 04:40 |
Now, I could do another move command, but
I'd have to know how far to move it.
| | 04:44 |
and since I eyeballed my clicks, I don't
really know what that is.
| | 04:47 |
But if you recall in a previous movie, we
talked about this really handy tool over
| | 04:51 |
here called Activate Dimensions.
So make sure that just the right hand side
| | 04:55 |
of the stair selected, you click on
Activate Dimensions.
| | 04:59 |
That will give you a series of temporary
dimensions and very useful locations like
| | 05:03 |
this one right here.
And I can simply type in four inches there
| | 05:07 |
and that will move just that run of the
stair over so that it's four inches off of
| | 05:11 |
the inside wall.
If you want to make any additional
| | 05:16 |
modifications like selecting this sketch
line for example and maybe dragging this
| | 05:20 |
witness line grip to here.
And I could say instead of a four foot
| | 05:25 |
landing I want to have a five foot
landing, it's really up to you.
| | 05:29 |
So, the last thing I want to do before I
finish this sketch is over here on the
| | 05:33 |
ribbon, I want to click this Railing
button.
| | 05:37 |
And what this does is Revit creates
railings automatically on the stair for me
| | 05:41 |
on both sides.
Now, if I want to, I can actually change
| | 05:45 |
what railing it's going to use.
So, if I want a particular type of guard
| | 05:49 |
rail or a hand rail or something like
that.
| | 05:52 |
So, in this case, I'm going to just chose
guard rail pipe.
| | 05:56 |
And I'm going to assign it to the
stringers, and then I'm going to click OK.
| | 05:59 |
And then finally I come over here and I
click Finish Edit Mode and that will
| | 06:04 |
complete the stair.
If you look over here we're seeing just a
| | 06:09 |
portion of the stair going up and really
the best way to see the stair is to come
| | 06:13 |
down to the sections.
Open up section one.
| | 06:18 |
Zoom in.
And you can see our stair going up between
| | 06:23 |
levels two and three.
Now, if we look at level one, we obviously
| | 06:28 |
need a stair down there, so I'm going to
scroll over here to my level one floor plan.
| | 06:34 |
And I have a slightly larger lobby in this
location.
| | 06:38 |
So, I might be able to get away with just
a straight run stair over here.
| | 06:42 |
That's a lot simpler to create than a
switch back stair because it's really just
| | 06:45 |
two clicks.
Now, I'm going to do this one also with
| | 06:48 |
the Stair by Sketch.
But I'm just going to point out that you
| | 06:51 |
could easily do this with Stair by
Component as well.
| | 06:54 |
Let's do Stair by Sketch.
I want to verify all my settings again.
| | 06:58 |
You can see that it remembered all the
same settings.
| | 07:00 |
I'll start right about here and iI'll pull
it all the way to the end.
| | 07:04 |
So, the only thing we do differently this
time is that we us up all of the risers in
| | 07:10 |
a single sketch.
Select everything, activate the
| | 07:15 |
dimensions, make that four inches,
deselect, check my railing.
| | 07:20 |
It's still guard rail pipe and I'll click
Finish.
| | 07:23 |
Let's reopen our section.
And there is our result.
| | 07:30 |
You can see that i'm a little off right
there, so I can just move that stair To
| | 07:34 |
make it match up but those are fine tuning
results that you can fiddle with on your own.
| | 07:40 |
So, sketch-based stairs used the same
sketch-based methodology that we've looked
| | 07:44 |
at in other movies like floors and roofs
and so on.
| | 07:48 |
You've sketched the overall runs of the
stairs and then from that sketch Revit
| | 07:51 |
creates the three dimensional stair
| | 07:53 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding railings to stairs| 00:00 |
Railings usually are created automatically
when you create stairs.
| | 00:04 |
So, that's usually the most common way to
work with them, but you can also create
| | 00:08 |
railings yourself.
So I'm here in a file called railings, and
| | 00:12 |
I'm going to zoom in on this area of the
plan right here.
| | 00:16 |
And I have this open to below space, and
the stair comes up to this little balcony
| | 00:20 |
here and walks around.
So, obviously we would need some sort of a
| | 00:24 |
guard rail, over in this general location.
It's pretty easy to do, it's just a simple
| | 00:29 |
sketch based operation.
What we'll do is go to the Architecture
| | 00:34 |
tab and we'll click on the Railing tool.
Now all you have to do is click the
| | 00:38 |
default tool but if you open up the drop
down it's the Sketch Path that we're
| | 00:41 |
going to use here for our guard rail.
And this takes me to sketch mode, and we
| | 00:46 |
can draw railings in really any shape we
want.
| | 00:49 |
But one thing that's a little different
about this sketch then some of the others
| | 00:53 |
that we've seen is, you can even draw and
open or a closed path here.
| | 00:58 |
In this case we want an open path, because
we just need to do an L shaped railing
| | 01:01 |
along this balcony.
But if you were doing an enclosed space
| | 01:05 |
you can do the railing all the way around
as well.
| | 01:08 |
Now we can draw with any of these other
tools, but what I want to show you here is
| | 01:12 |
the Pick Lines option, because this will
make it a lot easier to create our sketch.
| | 01:18 |
So I'm going to choose Pick Lines and I
can pick right on the edges of this balcony.
| | 01:23 |
But I'm going to actually do ti with a
slight offset.
| | 01:26 |
So I'm going to offset that about two
inches away and I'll just click somewhere
| | 01:30 |
here in the plan view to make it the
active view.
| | 01:34 |
And then go ahead and zoom in a little
closer.
| | 01:38 |
Watch what happens when I highlight this
edge.
| | 01:40 |
You see how I can either offset the
railing this way or this way, so I'm
| | 01:44 |
going to offset it this way and then do it
again right here.
| | 01:49 |
Revit will automatically clean up that
intersection.
| | 01:53 |
Let's go to the previous zoom level and
zoom in down here.
| | 01:57 |
I might need to fix this a little, you'll
notice that the line went a little too long.
| | 02:03 |
So click my Modify tool to cancel out of
there.
| | 02:05 |
Select this line, and then just simply
drag the script back.
| | 02:09 |
I could snap it right to the wall if I
want or I can back it up off of there a
| | 02:12 |
little bit.
And I can even use the temporary dimension
| | 02:17 |
to say how much I want that distance to
be.
| | 02:20 |
That's really all there is to it for the
sketch.
| | 02:23 |
Notice that the sketch can be an open
shape like I said.
| | 02:27 |
The only other thing you want to pay
attention to is what kind of railing are
| | 02:29 |
you creating?
There are a few different types here in
| | 02:32 |
the file that are loaded already, so I'm
going to use this guardrail pipe, right there.
| | 02:37 |
I'll click the finish button, we zoom in a
little.
| | 02:41 |
We'll see the railing right there.
There's a variety of ways we could look at this.
| | 02:45 |
We could cut a section or do an interior
elevation, but actually I'm going to come
| | 02:49 |
up here to our 3D View button.
And click the drop down right next to it
| | 02:53 |
and we can make a Camera View.
This is just a perspective view, and you
| | 02:58 |
click where you want to stand.
And then you drag towards where you
| | 03:02 |
want to look.
So I'll kind of look right about there,
| | 03:05 |
and click again.
And, Revit will create a camera that looks
| | 03:09 |
in at that railing that we just created.
So you can see it right there.
| | 03:14 |
Looks pretty good, sitting up here on top
of the floor slab.
| | 03:17 |
So railings get created automatically when
you draw a stair.
| | 03:21 |
And that's probably the most common way
that you'll get a railing in your models.
| | 03:25 |
But you can always draw railings for
things like guardrails or other stand
| | 03:28 |
alone railings by just simply sketching
out their path.
| | 03:32 |
So you just sketch the path in a planned
view.
| | 03:34 |
It can be an open shape or a closed shape
and then you apply a railing style to it.
| | 03:39 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with component-based stairs| 00:00 |
In this movie, we're going to look at the
component-based stair.
| | 00:02 |
Revit has two kinds of stairs, and in the
previous movie we looked at the
| | 00:05 |
sketch-based stair, and this time around
we're going to look at the component-based stair.
| | 00:10 |
Now in someways the component based stairs
is a little bit more robust than the
| | 00:13 |
sketch based stair.
And so I would like to focus on some of
| | 00:17 |
those difference between the two.
I made a file called Component Stairs and
| | 00:21 |
one of the differences that we have
between component and sketch based stair
| | 00:24 |
is a component bases stair can be built in
2D or 3D or you can work in both views simultaneously.
| | 00:31 |
So let me demonstrate here.
I'm currently in a Floor Plan Level 1, but
| | 00:35 |
also in this exercise file, I have a view
here called 3D Stair Section.
| | 00:41 |
going to double click and open that up.
Zoomed in a little too close, there.
| | 00:45 |
Let's zoom it out so you can see.
And this is a cropped view of the lobby
| | 00:49 |
area that we were looking at in the Plan
view.
| | 00:53 |
Now I'll talk about how I created this and
the cut away views in a future chapter.
| | 00:57 |
But for right now we're just going to use
the one that's already here in the
| | 01:00 |
exercise file.
If I go to the View tab, I can tile these
| | 01:03 |
two windows, this 3D view and the plan
view together on the screen at the same time.
| | 01:08 |
And I can do that here with the Window
Tile button, or I can type WT, which is
| | 01:11 |
the keyboard shortcut.
I'm just going to adjust both of these
| | 01:15 |
views so that we can zoom in a little bit
and see what we're doing, and we're
| | 01:18 |
going to build the stair in this general
location.
| | 01:22 |
I like to build the stair kind of, off to
the side first and then move it into position.
| | 01:26 |
I typically find that a little bit easier
to do.
| | 01:29 |
So, we're going to go to the Architecture
tab and here on the Circulation panel,
| | 01:32 |
click the drop down next to stairs.
And make sure you're choosing stair by component.
| | 01:37 |
Now, the component based stair is kind of
similar to the sketch based star.
| | 01:39 |
In that, we go into this mode, and
everything sort of greys out.
| | 01:43 |
But instead of sketching 2-dimensional
sketches, you're now really sketching with
| | 01:46 |
3D components.
So up here on the ribbon, you can see that
| | 01:49 |
we've got a run tool active.
And I'm drawing a straight run.
| | 01:53 |
I'm going to accept both of those options,
but you could do a spiral stair.
| | 01:57 |
You could do winder stairs.
Those are some additional choices.
| | 02:00 |
Over here on the Options bar, you have
several choices for a location line.
| | 02:05 |
And I want to show you what a few of these
look like.
| | 02:07 |
So, you know, Run Center is probably the
most obvious.
| | 02:10 |
Let me just click a point here in the
middle of the lobby and start to move the
| | 02:12 |
mouse, and you can see that that location
line is right down the center.
| | 02:16 |
But if I zoom in just a little bit and
change to either left or right here.
| | 02:20 |
Notice that the location line shifts out
to the outside edge of the run itself.
| | 02:26 |
But it's still inside of the support.
If you go to either left or right support,
| | 02:31 |
then it goes to the outside edge of the
support itself.
| | 02:35 |
So, you could use any one of these
location lines in the stairs you're building.
| | 02:39 |
In this case, I'm going to go with support
left, zoom back out a touch.
| | 02:43 |
And I'm going to accept all the other
defaults here.
| | 02:45 |
Three food wide, automatic landing, and
I'm going to draw about half of the risers
| | 02:49 |
to start with, so it says nine created,
nine remaining, I'll click a point.
| | 02:54 |
Notice that the stair appears immediately
in the 3D view as well as the Plan view.
| | 03:00 |
In addition to that, notice that these two
numbers appear here, one and nine.
| | 03:04 |
Indicating for me that that's riser one,
and that's riser nine.
| | 03:08 |
So we get a bit more visual feedback as
we're working.
| | 03:11 |
Now I'm going to make sure I'm lined up
with the first run click a point.
| | 03:14 |
Draw over here to the left and create the
rest of the run of stairs.
| | 03:18 |
And that'll give me risers 10 through 18.
Now, let's go ahead and finish that, and
| | 03:23 |
see what that gives us.
So I'm going to click the Finish Edit Mode
| | 03:26 |
button here, and we get a warning message
generated from Revit.
| | 03:30 |
Now, the warning messages that appear here
in the lower corner that have this yellow
| | 03:33 |
tint to them, you can actually ignore.
If I were to just click anywhere onscreen,
| | 03:38 |
that message would go away.
But what the message is telling me is, if
| | 03:41 |
I zoom in over here on the 3D view, is it
doesn't like the way this railing is
| | 03:45 |
turning the corner.
The the rail there, I don't know if you
| | 03:49 |
can see.
It's a little disjointed right in that
| | 03:51 |
location there.
So, it's not a continuous railing.
| | 03:55 |
Now, there's a few ways you could
potentially solve that, one would be to
| | 03:58 |
try and modify the railing type itself,
but another would be to modify the stair geometry.
| | 04:03 |
So, in this case, I'm going to actually
modify the landing here on the stair to
| | 04:07 |
give that railing a little bit more room.
So to do that, I'm going to click the
| | 04:12 |
stair, choose the Edit Stairs button, and
that puts me back into the Build mode.
| | 04:17 |
I'm going to select my landing, zoom in a
touch, and you'll notice that there's
| | 04:21 |
these triangle grips that appear around
the perimeter of the landing.
| | 04:26 |
I can take any of those grips and drag
them to reshape the landing.
| | 04:30 |
So I'm going to start dragging this one,
and I want it to go one foot, but you can
| | 04:33 |
see I'm having a tough time getting it to
snap to that.
| | 04:37 |
So that dimension that appears there is
bold, and I can actually start to type and
| | 04:41 |
the number that I type will go right into
that bold dimension.
| | 04:45 |
We call that a Listening Dimension.
So I'm going to just type the number one
| | 04:49 |
Press enter and this extension right here
will be 1 foot.
| | 04:53 |
Now I'm going to do it again down here and
this time I want 1 foot 6 and you see that
| | 04:56 |
it snapping to that on its own so I don't
need to type this time but certainly you
| | 04:59 |
could type it in if you choose to.
So let's go ahead and click finish on that
| | 05:05 |
and see what that gives me.
Now notice that this time the warning was
| | 05:09 |
not generated and if I hold the Shift key
down and drag the wheel here in the 3D,
| | 05:12 |
you can see that I have a nice continuous
railing now.
| | 05:16 |
So, that takes care of that problem.
Now the next thing that I want to look at
| | 05:21 |
is shaping the stairs a little bit more to
my liking.
| | 05:25 |
So, I'm going to select the stair again
and return to the edit stairs.
| | 05:30 |
The first thing that I want to look at is
the distance between the two rungs.
| | 05:34 |
Right now they're somewhat random because
when I placed it, I dnidn't really pay
| | 05:37 |
attention at to how far apart they were.
Now you can select the run and you can
| | 05:41 |
easily move it, but again, I'm still
moving it somewhat randomly.
| | 05:45 |
But notice that the other components all
adjust.
| | 05:48 |
The supports get longer, the landing
adjusts.
| | 05:51 |
Well, I can use the temporary dimensions
that you see on screen here to manipulate
| | 05:55 |
it very precisely, or I can even draw my
own dimension to move it very precisely.
| | 06:01 |
So I'm going to come up here on the ribbon
and choose the Align Dimension button.
| | 06:05 |
The shortcut for that is DI.
And then I'm going to highlight one of the
| | 06:09 |
edges of the run.
Now, I want to look at the tool tip, and
| | 06:12 |
make sure that it says runs.
If I press my Tab key, it switches to Supports.
| | 06:17 |
I don't want Supports.
So if you see Supports on your message,
| | 06:21 |
Press Tab until it says Run.
And then you click, and then the same
| | 06:25 |
thing on the other side.
I want to make sure it says Run, and then
| | 06:28 |
I'm going to click, and then I'll place
the dimension over here somewhere.
| | 06:31 |
Click the Modify tool to cancel out.
Now when I select either of the runs, this
| | 06:36 |
dimension will light up as a temporary
dimension, and I can click in there and
| | 06:40 |
put in a new value.
I'm going to do 0 space 8, or you can type
| | 06:46 |
8 inches.
And that's going to pull those much closer
| | 06:49 |
together to make them eight inches apart.
Now, the other modification that I want is
| | 06:54 |
I want these two runs to be unequal.
Let's look at a couple more grip controls
| | 06:59 |
that we have on the runs themselves.
So, I'm going to select the first run
| | 07:02 |
here, the upper one.
And look here at the very end.
| | 07:06 |
You'll see two small grip points.
There's a triangle shaped one and a round
| | 07:10 |
shaped one.
Now if you drag the round shaped one,
| | 07:13 |
notice that that actually had the effect
of removing risers from the stair, and
| | 07:17 |
this number confirms that by starting now
at number three.
| | 07:23 |
Risers one and two haven't been placed
yet.
| | 07:26 |
And the stair is kind of floating up in
the air, so I'm going to undo that with
| | 07:30 |
control z.
If I click the run again and use the
| | 07:34 |
triangle this time.
If I were to drag to the right you would
| | 07:38 |
see the risers that I'm removing get added
to the other one.
| | 07:43 |
If I were to drag to the left...
You'll see the risers that I'm adding get
| | 07:47 |
taken away from the other run.
So I'm going to drag to left and add two
| | 07:51 |
risers and notice that this run here
shortens as a consequence.
| | 07:57 |
Further more the landing actually had to
come and raise up higher in order to
| | 08:01 |
accomodate that change.
So this is one of the benefits of the
| | 08:05 |
component base stair.
Is that all the parts and pieces are
| | 08:08 |
connected together.
And if you start making manipulations to
| | 08:11 |
one of the pieces it will often have an
impact on the others.
| | 08:15 |
So, let's deselect that, click the Finish
Edit Mode and see what that gives us.
| | 08:19 |
You can now see that I've got a nice long
run here and then a landing and then a
| | 08:23 |
shorter run.
The only thing that I still need to do is
| | 08:26 |
if I zoom out here.
I want to actually enter the stair here
| | 08:30 |
and wrap around here because up here in
the floor plan where I'm going to place
| | 08:33 |
it, the balcony is closer to the wall.
I don't have to build the stair all over again.
| | 08:40 |
It turns out that if you click on it there
is this small little grip right here that
| | 08:43 |
will flip the direction of the stair.
And if i just click that you're going to
| | 08:47 |
see the whole thing reverse and now we're
starting with the short run, going to a
| | 08:51 |
landing and then it goes up the long run,
and notice the landing adjusted
| | 08:54 |
accordingly, so the final step is to put
the stair in location where it needs to be.
| | 09:00 |
To do that I need a guideline over here,
so I'm going to make sure that nothing is selected...
| | 09:06 |
Over here on the Properties Palette, I'm
going to scroll down and turn on the
| | 09:09 |
Underlay for Level Two.
I'm going to use the Reflected Ceiling
| | 09:14 |
Plan orientation and a small gray line
will appear right there.
| | 09:18 |
All I need to do now is select the stair,
go to my move tool, snap to an end point
| | 09:23 |
here And snap to another endpoint right
there.
| | 09:27 |
The stair fits nicely into that location.
Let's take a look at it in both views.
| | 09:32 |
Hold the shift key down and do a little
bit of orbiting here.
| | 09:36 |
And zoom in and take a look at it over
here.
| | 09:39 |
So that completes our component based
stair.
| | 09:42 |
And as you can see, there is a lot of
similarities to the sketch based stair but
| | 09:45 |
there is also a lot of distinct advantages
to the component based stair as well.
| | 09:50 |
Chief among them being that if you
manipulate one of the components all of
| | 09:52 |
the other components will react in kind
and manipulate accordingly.
| | 09:57 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding extensions to railings| 00:00 |
In this movie, we were going to look at
the Railing Extensions feature.
| | 00:04 |
we can take our railing objects and we can
build in top rails and handrails ,and
| | 00:07 |
these top rails and handrails can have
automatically generated extensions.
| | 00:12 |
Those extensions will allow us to build in
code requirements, such as the distance of
| | 00:16 |
an extension that's required by the
building code, or adding a thread depth
| | 00:19 |
and so on, to the extensions of our
railings and have it take place
| | 00:22 |
automatically when we draw them.
So, I am in a file here called railing
| | 00:28 |
extensions and I am going to zoom in down
here at the bottom, and I've got two
| | 00:31 |
different railings here.
And so, to set us up, what I want to do is
| | 00:36 |
actually build two different railing
styles, so that we can do one that does
| | 00:39 |
returning back to the post of the railing
and we'll do another example with the
| | 00:42 |
other one that returns to the wall.
I'm going to select this railing right
| | 00:49 |
here and go to Edit Type, and duplicate it
,and I'll call this one Handrail Pipe, and
| | 00:55 |
I'll just add the word Post at the end.
Click OK, and I'm going to select this
| | 01:02 |
one, go to Edit Type, Duplicate it ,and
I'll add the word wall at the end.
| | 01:10 |
Normally that would be enough, and we
could modify both of these railings and
| | 01:13 |
each one would behave a little
differently.
| | 01:16 |
But if you look at either one of these and
edit the type, they both reference the
| | 01:20 |
same top rail object.
So, right here it says top rail and type,
| | 01:25 |
and it says circular one and a half inch.
And if I select this one, and I go to Edit
| | 01:31 |
Type, it also says circular one and a half
inch.
| | 01:35 |
So, what I want to do is I actually
want to build a copy of that type that I
| | 01:39 |
can use two different sets of settings on.
I'm going to do that on the project browser.
| | 01:45 |
So, if we scroll down here looking under
families.
| | 01:49 |
We're going to expand that, and then under
families we're going to look for the
| | 01:53 |
railings category, and expand that.
And what you'll see here is a hand rail
| | 01:59 |
type and a top rail type.
For these two railings, that's the top
| | 02:04 |
rail that we're talking about and here is
the circular one and a half inch type.
| | 02:09 |
I'm going to right click that and choose
Duplicate, that creates one and a half
| | 02:14 |
inch too.
I'm going to right click that and choose
| | 02:17 |
Rename, and I'm going to rename it Post
Extension.
| | 02:22 |
That's the one that I'm going to use over
here on this railing.
| | 02:25 |
Now, while I'm here I'm going to scroll up
a little bit, and notice that the hand
| | 02:29 |
rail type also has a type called circular
one and a half inch.
| | 02:34 |
This can be a little confusing, because
they both have the same name and you may
| | 02:37 |
get confused as to which one you're
editing.
| | 02:40 |
I'm going to duplicate this one as well,
and right click the duplicate and rename
| | 02:45 |
it, and I'm going to call this wall
extension.
| | 02:50 |
These may not be the best names, but
they'll serve our purposes because it'll
| | 02:52 |
clarify which one we're working on.
If I come over here and I select this
| | 02:57 |
railing, edit it's type again, I can now
change the top rail that's being used here
| | 03:02 |
to use the post extension.
Notice that that's now available on the list.
| | 03:08 |
Let me clarify.
Wall extension is not on the list, because
| | 03:11 |
wall extension is not a top rail, it's a
hand rail.
| | 03:16 |
So, if we added a hand rail to this type,
there's where wall extension would be.
| | 03:22 |
Once I've got that, I'm going to click OK.
And it's an awful lot of set up, but
| | 03:26 |
nothing's actually happened yet.
So, now, we're finally ready to actually
| | 03:30 |
turn on the extension, and it's actually
fairly easy to do.
| | 03:33 |
Let me deselect the thing.
Hover over the top rail of this railing,
| | 03:36 |
press the Tab key and notice that it will
highlight that top rail.
| | 03:42 |
I'm going to click it to select it.
Notice over here, it says that's post
| | 03:46 |
extension, but it's grayed out.
But I have access to the Edit Type button.
| | 03:51 |
So, I'm going to click that.
And now, we can change the settings of the
| | 03:55 |
post extension.
I want to choose what kind of extension
| | 03:58 |
style I want this to have.
I can do a different one at the beginning
| | 04:02 |
or bottom and an other one at the end or
top.
| | 04:06 |
So, here at the beginning or the bottom,
because we are at the bottom of the stair,
| | 04:09 |
I am going to choose a post extension, I
am going to give it a distance, that's not enough.
| | 04:15 |
If i just click Apply on that, nothing
will happen.
| | 04:18 |
Because all I'm telling it is to post an
extension, but I haven't told you how far
| | 04:22 |
to extend.
May be I want to extend by one foot.
| | 04:26 |
So, I am going to click apply, and you
will see it extend out one foot and then
| | 04:30 |
return back to the post, that's what they
mean by a post extension.
| | 04:35 |
If I check this box, then it will project
out even further, because it will add a
| | 04:39 |
thread depth to the extension.
So, it's a thread depth plus one foot, and
| | 04:45 |
then finally it returns back.
If you wanted to, you can even do a floor extension.
| | 04:53 |
And when I click apply, now it will return
down to the floor instead of back to the post.
| | 04:59 |
Now, I am not going to show you the wall
extension here, I will show you that in
| | 05:01 |
the other railing.
Choose which ever you want here, I will go
| | 05:05 |
ahead and set this back to post, click OK,
and that completes that one.
| | 05:09 |
So, now, we want to do something similar
over here, but we have one more bit of set
| | 05:13 |
up to do on this railing.
I am going to do the wall extension with a
| | 05:17 |
hand rail instead of a top rail.
So, I need to edit this type.
| | 05:21 |
Now, remember, we previously renamed it to
handrail pipe wall.
| | 05:25 |
So, I need to edit that type, and let's
move this box over here and make this
| | 05:29 |
slight narrow so, we can see.
Down here for handrail one under the type,
| | 05:35 |
I am going to choose the wall extension,
remember, that's the name we just gave it
| | 05:39 |
down on the project browser, and where do
I want it positioned.
| | 05:44 |
This is important because if you just say
wall extension nothing happens.
| | 05:48 |
Because you've told that what type you
want to use, but you haven't told it where
| | 05:52 |
to put it.
If I open up this list here, we've got a
| | 05:55 |
few choices.
It could be on the left, the right or the center.
| | 05:59 |
I'm a firm believer in the 50-50 rule.
I don't have any idea if it's left or right.
| | 06:04 |
I'm going to take a guess.
Choose left, click Apply.
| | 06:08 |
I got a 50% chance of being correct.
If I'm wrong, I know exactly what it
| | 06:12 |
should be now.
I'll just change it to the other one.
| | 06:15 |
If you don't have 50-50 odds, I might be a
little more scientific about it.
| | 06:19 |
Anyhow, we've got it on the left, it
created it here on the inside.
| | 06:22 |
We're using wall extension.
That's as much we can do in the railing style.
| | 06:28 |
But now I click OK, deselect it, and again
I have to tab in and select the handrail.
| | 06:34 |
Go to Edit Type, that's the wall extension
I'm editing now.
| | 06:39 |
Can see it back there in the background,
and now it's the same settings we did on
| | 06:42 |
the other one over here.
This time I will choose, the Wall option,
| | 06:48 |
put in a number, click Apply.
It extends out one foot and returns back
| | 06:53 |
to the wall.
If I add a tread depth, it just extends
| | 06:57 |
out a little bit longer and returns back
to the wall.
| | 07:02 |
As you can see, the railing extension
feature is a little complex.
| | 07:05 |
But once it's set up, it's a pretty
powerful feature that allows us to build
| | 07:09 |
in the automatic parameters to control
whatever our code requirements tell us we
| | 07:13 |
need for an extension at the bottom of our
railings.
| | 07:18 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Complex WallsCreating a custom basic wall type| 00:00 |
In this movie, we're going to create our
own custom wall type.
| | 00:03 |
Now, let's start by talking about wall
types and wall families in general.
| | 00:06 |
Would you be surprised to learn that all
of the walls that we've used so far
| | 00:09 |
throughout all the movies in this course
have been part of the same family?
| | 00:14 |
All the walls we've used, whether they
were brick walls or stud walls or concrete
| | 00:18 |
walls are part of the basic wall family.
Basic wall family is, a built in family
| | 00:23 |
that Revit calls a system family.
Now, there's lots of different system
| | 00:28 |
families that we'll be using in our
projects.
| | 00:31 |
Walls are system families, floors, roofs,
stairs, these are all system families.
| | 00:36 |
A system family is a family that's built
into the system and cannot be changed by
| | 00:41 |
the end user.
When you say that, sometimes people are a
| | 00:44 |
little surprised because they think well,
I've made modifications to walls or I've
| | 00:47 |
made modifications to floors.
So, what do you mean by that?
| | 00:51 |
Well, we're not actually changing the
family when we modify one of these object types.
| | 00:57 |
What we're actually changing is the type.
So, walls actually have only three wall families.
| | 01:04 |
There's a basic wall family.
There's a curtain wall family.
| | 01:07 |
And there's a stacked wall family.
And we're going to look at each of those
| | 01:10 |
throughout the course of this chapter.
In this movie, we're going to focus on the
| | 01:13 |
basic wall family.
I'm in a project called Basic Walls.
| | 01:18 |
And I'll zoom here on the middle of the
plan.
| | 01:20 |
And I'm going to highlight one of the
walls that already exists in this file out
| | 01:23 |
toward the exterior.
Now, you're going to see a tool tip appear
| | 01:27 |
on-screen, and after a few seconds it will
dissapear.
| | 01:30 |
But if we look down at the status bar we
see that same message appear and it says
| | 01:34 |
walls, which is the category then there's
a colon then it says basic wall, that's
| | 01:37 |
the name of the family.
And then another colon and then it says
| | 01:43 |
exterior brick unmetal stud.
And we'll talk about the last piece the
| | 01:46 |
R54 in just a few moments.
If I hover over a different wall, I'll see
| | 01:51 |
a similar message walls, basic wall and
now it says interior four and seven eights.
| | 01:56 |
So, notice it's basic wall in both cases.
And in fact, if I highlighted over any
| | 02:01 |
wall in this project, they're all going to
be basic walls.
| | 02:05 |
Because all the walls so far in this
project are just using the basic wall family.
| | 02:09 |
But they might have different types.
And so again, that's where we're going to
| | 02:13 |
focus our attention.
So, I'm going to select this wall here
| | 02:16 |
between the two toilet rooms, and you'll
notice that it's a little bit thin right
| | 02:19 |
now and there's probably not enough room
for any of the plumbing in that wall.
| | 02:24 |
And we're going to create a new kind of
wall for that plumbing wall situation.
| | 02:28 |
Now, I'm going to do that by using the
tool here on the Properties pallet.
| | 02:33 |
So, there's the name again, interior floor
seven eights partition on the type
| | 02:36 |
selector and right beneath that is the
Edit Type button.
| | 02:40 |
Now, we've been in this dialogue before
but lets look at it in a little bit more
| | 02:42 |
detail right now.
The first thing is I want to make it a
| | 02:45 |
little bit easier to see what we are
doing.
| | 02:47 |
So, I'm going to click this small Preview
button down here.
| | 02:50 |
Now, the next thing that I want to do is
look at the structure of this wall or how
| | 02:53 |
this wall is construct and I do that by
clicking this Edit button here next to structure.
| | 02:59 |
Now, what I want to caution you on is
don't immediately dive in and start making
| | 03:03 |
changes here.
If I click in the thickness column, for
| | 03:06 |
example, next to one of the layers and put
in another value.
| | 03:10 |
I'm going to put in two feet, I'm going to
click OK.
| | 03:13 |
I might get an error message, I'll click
OK for that and then I'll clickOK one more time.
| | 03:17 |
And naturally what you're going to see is
that the change on screen is probably not
| | 03:21 |
what I had in mind.
Notice that several walls got really thick
| | 03:24 |
and in less I'm going for the medevil
castle look this is probably not what my
| | 03:28 |
intention was.
So, I'm going to come up here and choose
| | 03:31 |
my Undo button.
And return those back to the original size
| | 03:35 |
and lets start again.
I'm going to select that wall.
| | 03:38 |
Click Edit Type, and this time before I go
to edit structure, I'm going to click the
| | 03:42 |
Duplicate button.
So, this is really important that you
| | 03:45 |
always remember to do this.
This way you're creating a new type
| | 03:48 |
instead of modifying the one that's
existing.
| | 03:51 |
Now, most firms will use some sort of a
prefix in front of the name.
| | 03:54 |
Usually the initials of the confirm, on
this case, I'll use RET for Revit
| | 03:57 |
Essential Training, and then I'll just
call this plumbing wall.
| | 04:02 |
Now, when I click Edit, and let's go ahead
and widen this dialogue just to make it a
| | 04:06 |
little easier to read the columns.
Now, when I click Edit and we look at the
| | 04:11 |
different layers that are in here, any
changes that I make, only apply top this
| | 04:15 |
new wall type that I'm creating.
Now, up here on the top, the total
| | 04:19 |
thickness is currently four 4 7/8.
That's the total of the various numbers
| | 04:24 |
you see here.
Now, there are actually three layers that
| | 04:27 |
are actual physical components, we have a
finished layer dry wall here, a stud layer
| | 04:31 |
and then another dry wall here.
And then we have this two non-physical
| | 04:36 |
layers the core boundaries.
Now, you will see here that they have a
| | 04:40 |
thickness of 0 in both cases.
Every basic wall has really three zones,
| | 04:44 |
there's the core, which has all the sort
of structural components of the wall.
| | 04:49 |
And then potentially one or two finishes,
you'll have an exterior finish and an
| | 04:53 |
interior finish.
You are required to have something in the
| | 04:56 |
core, but you're not required to have
something in the finishes.
| | 05:00 |
So, sometimes you'll have a wall that
doesn't have any finish layers but in this
| | 05:03 |
case we layers on all three conditions.
What I'm going to do is select my layer
| | 05:08 |
three, which is my core material in this
case and then come down here and click the
| | 05:12 |
Insert button.
Whatever layer you have selected when you
| | 05:17 |
insert, it will insert it above the one
that's selected.
| | 05:20 |
So, I get a new layer that's set to bi
category and it currently has a 0 thickness.
| | 05:25 |
And I'm going to go ahead and put in a new
thickness here and there's a couple of
| | 05:28 |
different formats you can use here.
If you don't want to have to type any
| | 05:32 |
units, and you're working in imperial.
You can do the feet first, zero, then a space.
| | 05:37 |
Then the number of inches, then another
space.
| | 05:39 |
And then I put any fractional inches next.
So, when I press enter, that will be
| | 05:43 |
interpreted as 0 foot, 3 and 5/8.
Now, you could have also put 3.625 and
| | 05:47 |
then used the inch symbol.
So, any proper format will work here.
| | 05:52 |
So, I now have these two layers and you'll
notice here that they're two different materials.
| | 05:56 |
This one is a metal stud layer but this
one is set to By Category.
| | 05:59 |
So, let's address that next.
If I click in that By Category field, a
| | 06:03 |
small browse button becomes available.
I'll click that.
| | 06:07 |
That opens up the material browser and you
could scroll through the list here looking
| | 06:10 |
for the material you want.
You can also type here in this search
| | 06:14 |
field to try and find a material that's
suitable.
| | 06:17 |
So, I'm just going to type the word stud
in here, and you'll see that that will
| | 06:21 |
locate the metal stud layer, click OK.
And that turns out to be the same material
| | 06:26 |
that we're using for the layer down below.
Now over here in this structural column,
| | 06:31 |
you'll see there's a check mark next the
original layer, which is now layer four.
| | 06:36 |
If I change that to this layer here,
notice that it unchecks the first one.
| | 06:40 |
So, only one layer can be structural at a
time and that's the layer that your
| | 06:43 |
structural engineer is going to be most
concerned with, that he'll run his
| | 06:46 |
calculations on.
Let's go ahead and select layer four,
| | 06:50 |
click Insert again and again because the
new layer goes above the one you have
| | 06:53 |
selected, that new layer goes in between
the two stud layers.
| | 06:59 |
Now, if you accidentally had the wrong
layer selected, you do have an up and down
| | 07:02 |
button here and you can always shuffle
them around.
| | 07:05 |
want to click in here, put in 5.5 inches
that is just another way of typing in inches.
| | 07:11 |
So, both are valid can use which ever
message you prefer, so that's 5 and half
| | 07:15 |
inches click in here browse to a new
material.
| | 07:19 |
I am going to type the word air in the
search field notice I have got an air, air
| | 07:22 |
infiltration barrier even the stud layer
shows up as air, I am going to choose air here.
| | 07:28 |
Click OK and then finally for the function
this air layer isn't really holding any
| | 07:32 |
thing up so making that a structural layer
is probably not the right choice.
| | 07:38 |
So, when you open this drop down list you
see that there are six built-in values here.
| | 07:43 |
The first five have numbers next to them
and those are priority numbers so
| | 07:46 |
structure has the priority number one, its
the most important.
| | 07:51 |
All they way down to finish 2, which has a
priority 5 the least important and this
| | 07:53 |
will come into play when the layers join
up with one another in neighboring
| | 07:56 |
intersecting walls.
So, in this case I'm going to choose a
| | 08:00 |
thermal air layer, which gives it a
priority number 3.
| | 08:03 |
Let's click OK.
Let's click OK again.
| | 08:07 |
And you'll see the wall get thicker in the
floor plan but you won't really see any of
| | 08:10 |
those internal components that we just
created, so let's zoom in a little bit closer.
| | 08:16 |
Come down here to the view control bar,
click this small pop up here and if you
| | 08:20 |
choose either medium or fine that will
display the internal components.
| | 08:26 |
And as you can see now, this existing wall
at the exterior had a metal stud layer
| | 08:30 |
here that joins up and cleans up with the
two new metal studs layers that we created.
| | 08:36 |
And we get a line here separating the air
from the metal stud layer because it's a
| | 08:40 |
lower priority.
So that's where those priorities and
| | 08:43 |
material numbers came into play.
So, if you want it to have a nice clean
| | 08:47 |
intersection like this you have to match
both the priority number and the material
| | 08:51 |
to make that happen.
The last thing is when we were hovering
| | 08:55 |
over the wall earlier and looking at the
tool tip we saw that there was an r value
| | 08:59 |
at the very end.
This wall currently says R74.
| | 09:04 |
This exterior wall says R54.
Where is that coming from?
| | 09:08 |
Well I'm going to select this wall one
more time.
| | 09:10 |
Go back to Edit Type and Edit again.
When you choose materials here they can
| | 09:14 |
automatically assign an R value to that
material.
| | 09:18 |
Now, that's actually handled here in the
material browser over here on the Thermal
| | 09:22 |
tab and it has these thermal properties.
Now, we're using the out of the box
| | 09:27 |
template here and the thermal properties
are already assigned to the materials in
| | 09:32 |
this template.
If you upgrade an old project from a few
| | 09:36 |
releases ago it may or may not have that
information assigned to it.
| | 09:41 |
So, you might have to go in and modify
those materials.
| | 09:44 |
So just keep that in mind.
But if all of your materials have an
| | 09:46 |
R-value assigned to them then Revit will
do the complete calculation.
| | 09:51 |
And then you can use that information
later when you're doing energy analysis.
| | 09:56 |
So, creating your own basic wall is a
fairly easy process that involves simply
| | 09:59 |
editing the type, making a duplicate of
some existing wall, and then establishing
| | 10:02 |
what layers you want that wall to contain.
A basic wall is nothing more than a series
| | 10:08 |
of layered materials that are sandhiwched
together to create an assembly.
| | 10:12 |
And all of the walls that we've used so
far throughout our project have been basic
| | 10:15 |
wall families.
| | 10:16 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding stacked walls| 00:00 |
As we've already discussed, walls are a
system family.
| | 00:03 |
And system family just means that it's
built into the system and it has fixed parameters.
| | 00:08 |
Now there are three wall families.
There's the basic wall, the stacked wall,
| | 00:13 |
and the curtain wall.
We looked at the basic wall in the
| | 00:16 |
previous movie, and as you recall, it's a
basic wall because it has the same
| | 00:19 |
material throughout its construction.
If you look at it horizontally or
| | 00:22 |
vertically, you're going to see the same
set of layers.
| | 00:25 |
A stack wall is slightly more complex
because while it's the same material along
| | 00:29 |
its length, it actually varies along its
height.
| | 00:33 |
Now, all it takes to create a stack wall
is to simply take two or more basic walls
| | 00:37 |
and literally stack them up on top of one
another.
| | 00:41 |
So in this movie we're going to look at
the stacked walls, and we'll address
| | 00:44 |
curtain walls in a later movie.
So I have here a file called Stacked
| | 00:47 |
Walls, and it's just a simple file.
And we're going to use it to demonstrate
| | 00:51 |
how the stacked walls feature works.
Now, most of the work is going to take
| | 00:54 |
place down here on the project browser.
So if I go to the project browser and I
| | 00:58 |
scroll to the bottom, we'll have a
families branch.
| | 01:01 |
going to expand that.
And beneath that branch you'll see all the
| | 01:05 |
various categories in the system.
And I'll go down and I'll locate the walls
| | 01:09 |
cateogry and expand it.
And then finally, I'm going to expand the
| | 01:13 |
basic wall category.
Now, even though we're talking about the
| | 01:17 |
stack wall here in this movie, we're
going to start by looking at three basic
| | 01:20 |
walls that I've created and included in
this file.
| | 01:24 |
Each of them begins with the letters RET
for Revit Essential Training.
| | 01:27 |
And you'll find that that's a pretty
common best practice that firms like to do.
| | 01:31 |
They use their initials or some other
designation at the start of each name of
| | 01:35 |
anything they've customized so that
members of the firm will know where the
| | 01:38 |
customized objects are and which ones they
want to use.
| | 01:43 |
So, it's a pretty typical thing to do.
So, the first one I'm going to show you is
| | 01:46 |
the RET Foundation 14 Inch Concrete.
So, I'm going to right click on that and
| | 01:51 |
choose type properties.
Now that will load up the type property
| | 01:56 |
dialogue that we've seen before and
there's really nothing special about this
| | 01:59 |
wall if we click on the edit structure
button you can see that it's nothing more
| | 02:02 |
than a 14 inch thick layer of concrete.
So this is by far the simpliest of the
| | 02:08 |
three, so I'm going to cancel out of here,
click OK.
| | 02:11 |
And the next one I want to look at is the
one at the top here, RET Exterior Brick on CMU.
| | 02:17 |
I'm going to right-click it and go to its
type properties.
| | 02:21 |
And this time what i want to do is down
here for view we can actually change the
| | 02:25 |
view direction from a floor plan to a
section.
| | 02:29 |
And that will make it a little more
obvious what we're seeing here from this
| | 02:32 |
particular wall type.
I'm going to choose edit structure again,
| | 02:36 |
and we have all our various layers, here's
our brick finish layer, here's our air
| | 02:39 |
gap, here's our rigid insulation, there's
a embrace and then finally the concrete structure.
| | 02:46 |
If you click over here in the preview you
can actually zoom in here, so I'm going to
| | 02:50 |
roll my wheel and there's this additional
component right here...
| | 02:55 |
There's this soldier course brick and
that's actually controlled here under sweeps.
| | 02:58 |
Now we're going to talk about sweeps in a
later movie so I'm not going to get into
| | 03:01 |
the details of it right now.
Let me go ahead and okay out of here two
| | 03:04 |
times without making any changes and then
the final one is the one right here in the middle.
| | 03:09 |
Exterior brick parapet.
Look at its type properties.
| | 03:12 |
We're in the section cut, it also has a
sweep at the top and as you can see it's
| | 03:16 |
got three whites of brick and an air gap
here in the middle, okay?
| | 03:21 |
So what we're going to do now, let me
cancel out of there, is we're going to
| | 03:24 |
come down here to the stacked wall family
beneath walls, expand it.
| | 03:29 |
And every family has to have at least one
type.
| | 03:32 |
So you'll see here that there's already a
type here in this project, this is just
| | 03:35 |
the generic one that comes with the
template.
| | 03:38 |
I want to duplicate this and customize it
so we can build our own stacked wall.
| | 03:42 |
So I'm going to right click on that and
duplicate it.
| | 03:46 |
That's going to create Exterior Brick Over
CMU Metal Stud 2.
| | 03:50 |
So I'm going to select that.
Right click again and rename it.
| | 03:54 |
And I'll do RET for Revit Essential
Training, _ and I'll just call this
| | 03:58 |
Exterior Wall.
And press enter.
| | 04:03 |
I'm going to right click that again, and
go to its type properties.
| | 04:07 |
That takes us to a similar type
properties.
| | 04:10 |
But as you can see, it's a little bit
simpler.
| | 04:12 |
When you click the edit structure button
over here, all you really have to do now
| | 04:15 |
is tell it which walls you want to stack
up.
| | 04:19 |
Now, I'm going to move the dialogue over
here a little bit.
| | 04:21 |
And I'm going to widen it up.
So that I can get a better look at the
| | 04:25 |
names right here.
So I can make adjustment here to these
| | 04:29 |
column widths in order to read the names a
little bit better.
| | 04:33 |
Now, I'm going to start at the bottom,
okay, with my lower most wall here.
| | 04:37 |
And that wall I want to use my RET
foundation 14 inch concrete, so I'm
| | 04:41 |
going to choose that there.
Now it shifts a little bit and let's not
| | 04:46 |
worry about that yet we'll come back and
fix that in a few minutes but I want to
| | 04:49 |
just get the walls established first.
The next one up in the stack is going to
| | 04:55 |
be the RET brick on CMU.
>> And, then, I'm going to click the
| | 05:01 |
insert button.
That will create one above it and, again,
| | 05:04 |
it looks a little weird over here because
it's using the same wall type again.
| | 05:08 |
And I'm going to change that one to the
brick parapet.
| | 05:13 |
And we clearly need to make a few
adjustments.
| | 05:16 |
So let's look at the height column next.
Each component can have its own height.
| | 05:21 |
One of the components will have a variable
height an the others will all have a fixed height.
| | 05:26 |
So we've got a three component wall, that
means two of them have a fixed height.
| | 05:29 |
So I'm going to start with those.
All right, so I'm going to select my
| | 05:32 |
parapet wall at the top and I'm going to
come over here to height column and I'm
| | 05:35 |
just going to make that three feet instead
of what it was defaulting to.
| | 05:39 |
Now, for my component down at the bottom,
I'm going to click there and I'm going to
| | 05:42 |
make that four feet.
Now you'll see the component in the middle
| | 05:45 |
is the variable one, that leaves us having
to deal with these alignment issues.
| | 05:49 |
So if I click over here and I zoom in a
little bit, obviously we've got a problem
| | 05:52 |
there and then when I pan down here, I'm
just using my wheel mouse You can see that
| | 05:56 |
this one shifted a little bit here.
Now I'm going to stay zoomed in on this
| | 06:01 |
one right here.
We have a few different ways we could deal
| | 06:03 |
with this.
We can certainly come in and calculate the
| | 06:06 |
offsets and try and fix it that way by
shifting the walls laterally.
| | 06:10 |
Before you use the offsets its a good idea
to look here at the location line choices.
| | 06:16 |
Whatever you choose here is where these
offsets will be measured from.
| | 06:21 |
So if we can find a better common edge
that we can use, it might save us a little
| | 06:25 |
bit of trouble in calculating the offsets.
And in this case I think the most logical
| | 06:31 |
choice to measure the offsets from is the
exterior face of the core.
| | 06:37 |
When I choose that you're going to see it
shift a little bit right here but notice
| | 06:41 |
that the brick now lines up nicely with
the CMU.
| | 06:45 |
Now I'm going to roll my wheel to zoom
back out and it didn't really solve the
| | 06:49 |
problem down here.
But, at least now I only have to shift the
| | 06:54 |
offset in one of the walls instead of both
of them.
| | 06:57 |
Now, if you do the math and you make the
calculation, it turns out that 6 and 3
| | 07:00 |
8ths of an inch, here for the offset, will
do the trick and it will shift this wall
| | 07:04 |
over and line it up where it needs to go.
You can use a positive number or a
| | 07:11 |
negative number in that offset field.
So we'll just scan everything and make
| | 07:15 |
sure we're satisfied with it.
Zoom back out over here, looks pretty good.
| | 07:19 |
Let's click okay, again, and now all that
remains is to apply that new wall type to
| | 07:24 |
the model.
So I'm going highlight one of my walls,
| | 07:28 |
press the Tab key, and click, that's our
chain selection.
| | 07:32 |
Open up the type selector list here,
scroll down.
| | 07:37 |
And there's my new RET exterior wall, I'll
chose that.
| | 07:42 |
And then I'll deselect so we can see what
we've got, and you can see that it applies
| | 07:46 |
our new stacked wall type to all of the
walls.
| | 07:50 |
So, creating a stacked wall involves
having two or more basic walls that you
| | 07:54 |
want to stack on top of one another.
Either use existing walls that you already
| | 07:59 |
have in your library, or you can create
them from scratch, and then you simply
| | 08:02 |
create a stacked wall, assemble the parts
on top of one another, and fix any offsets
| | 08:05 |
for any lateral shifts that you need to
do, and apply the wall to your model.
| | 08:11 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding curtain walls| 00:00 |
Curtain walls are the third and most
complex form of a wall system family.
| | 00:03 |
Curtain walls can vary in any direction
and even form complex patterns within
| | 00:06 |
their structure using a series of grids,
mullions and panels.
| | 00:11 |
In this movie, I'll get you started with
the essentials of the curtain wall object
| | 00:14 |
and then we'll dig a little deeper into
the specifics of grids and mullions and
| | 00:17 |
panels in the next movie.
So, I'm in a file here called Curtain Wall
| | 00:22 |
on the Architecture tab, we are going to
use the Wall tool again to access the
| | 00:25 |
curtain wall object.
So, remembering that the curtain wall
| | 00:30 |
object is just another wall family then we
actually use the Wall tool to access it
| | 00:34 |
and scroll down.
And you will see the curtain wall object
| | 00:38 |
is listed here as the family, and then the
template that we started with has three types.
| | 00:44 |
Curtain wall exterior glazing, and store
front.
| | 00:46 |
Feel free to explore each one, but in this
movie I'm just going to look at the
| | 00:49 |
Storefront design because of the three
it's the most detailed.
| | 00:54 |
To start off with it, I'm going to draw
outside the building maybe toward the back here.
| | 00:57 |
And I'm just going to draw it at maybe
about 20 feet long.
| | 01:02 |
Now lets start off looking at that in Plan
view.
| | 01:04 |
I'm going to zoom in using my Zoom-In
Region command.
| | 01:08 |
And what you'll see right away is there's
a repetition along the length of the wall.
| | 01:13 |
Now when you move your mouse near the
curtain wall, you'll see a dash line
| | 01:16 |
appear with two little, sort of end caps.
It's sort of like a long eye shape.
| | 01:21 |
That's the curtain wall itself.
But if you press the Tab key it's actually
| | 01:25 |
possible to reach into the curtain wall
and highlight individual parts and pieces.
| | 01:31 |
So we've got mullions in both the
horizontal and the vertical direction,
| | 01:35 |
we've got panels here representing glass
panels in this particular case.
| | 01:40 |
And there's even some gridlines, which we
can see right there as just a small line.
| | 01:46 |
Now, we're going to talk about all these
little parts and pieces as we go along,
| | 01:49 |
but let's take a look at this in another
view.
| | 01:52 |
I'm going to go to our default 3D View
icon, here on the Quick Access tool bar.
| | 01:56 |
That little bird house icon.
And I'll use my view cube to use the back
| | 02:00 |
axon here so I'll just sort of spin the
whole model around.
| | 02:05 |
And then we can actually hold down the
shift key and drag to orbit to a more
| | 02:08 |
favorable view if we like.
And finally, I'll roll the wheel to zoom
| | 02:13 |
in a touch.
Now, what we'll notice in this direction
| | 02:16 |
is that, in addition to the repetition we
were seeing in plan.
| | 02:20 |
There's also some repetition running
vertically, as well.
| | 02:23 |
Now, here, if you highlight the overall
curtain wall.
| | 02:26 |
You get sort of a dashed box that appears
around the entire thing.
| | 02:29 |
And then if you tab, you can still reach
in and see the individual pieces there,
| | 02:33 |
move my mouse away here to kind of reset
and I will move it back again and I'm
| | 02:37 |
going to select the entire curtain wall.
And I'm going to use this little grip here
| | 02:43 |
at the top and just start to drag it up.
Notice that at this point it's just
| | 02:48 |
stretching the top bay but at some point
right about there it'll add a new bay, and
| | 02:52 |
then again if I continue to stretch I'll
get a short bay at the top and so on
| | 02:56 |
contrast that to this behavior.
If I grab this little grip down here at
| | 03:02 |
the bottom and start to drag it this way
and let go, notice that I still get
| | 03:06 |
equally spaced bays.
If I make it shorter, it went to four but
| | 03:12 |
they're still all equally spaced.
If I go longer it went to six in this case
| | 03:17 |
but they're still all equally spaced.
So, let's figure out what's causing that behavior.
| | 03:23 |
Like other walls, if you come over to the
properties palette you have an Edit Type button.
| | 03:27 |
I'm going to click on that and the curtain
wall type is control by a vertical and a
| | 03:31 |
horizontal grid pattern and you can see
the settings right here.
| | 03:36 |
Now in the vertical direction we have a
maximum spacing, so the vertical lines of
| | 03:41 |
this curtain wall are maximum 5 feet
apart.
| | 03:45 |
They can be less that 5 feet but they
can't be more and that's why we are seeing
| | 03:48 |
equally spaced base.
However, in the horizontal direction the
| | 03:52 |
horizontal lines are at a fixed distance
of 8 feet.
| | 03:56 |
And so that's why we're seeing a standard
sized bay, a standard sized bay and then a
| | 03:59 |
shorter one at the top.
So there's a drop down here, and if you
| | 04:03 |
wanted to you could change the behavior to
variety of other choices.
| | 04:07 |
Minimum spacing, maximum spacing and so
on.
| | 04:09 |
So, feel free to experiment with that on
your own.
| | 04:11 |
I do encourage you, if you do experiment
to remember to use the duplicate option
| | 04:15 |
and create a copy of Storefront so that
you can do your variations in a copy and
| | 04:18 |
not change the original.
Now there's a few other settings here I
| | 04:23 |
want to point out to you.
You notice we were getting mullions as we
| | 04:25 |
were building the curtain wall, that's all
controlled down here.
| | 04:28 |
You can see there's actually six settings
for this, so you can control what kind of
| | 04:32 |
mullion you get around the perimeter of
the curtain wall, both left and right
| | 04:35 |
side, both top and bottom side.
And then what kind of mullion you're
| | 04:40 |
going to get on the interior lines, both
horizontally and vertically.
| | 04:43 |
And then finally at the top, I want to
show you this setting next automatically
| | 04:47 |
in bed,you can see here its got a check
mark in there and its easiest to show you
| | 04:50 |
that on screen.
So what I'm going to do to is OK out of
| | 04:55 |
here ,this curtain wall over here I'm
going to delete it and I'm going to return
| | 04:58 |
to level one floor plan and I will zoom in
over here on the stair area.
| | 05:04 |
Now we've got a big, blank wall right over
here.
| | 05:07 |
And I'm going to go back to the Wall
command, make sure Storefront is still
| | 05:10 |
selected, and I'm going to highlight the
center line of the wall.
| | 05:14 |
Revit will do that automatically just by
moving my mouse there.
| | 05:16 |
And I'm going to click right about here
and draw it out to maybe about there 17
| | 05:20 |
foot 6 in this case, but the exact
distance is not terribly important, and
| | 05:24 |
click again.
Notice how the curtain wall actually cut
| | 05:29 |
right into the wall and made a space for
itself, and, if we scroll down here and
| | 05:34 |
look at the North elevation and if I zoom
in, you can see again that it went to the
| | 05:38 |
standard height, but we still have a
curtain wall here.
| | 05:45 |
I can tab in and this time if I change the
height of this curtain wall, you'll see
| | 05:49 |
that it adjusts the hole in the wall, you
can kind of see here if I'm highlighting
| | 05:53 |
the wall how there's a hole going all the
way around.
| | 05:59 |
That's the Automatically Embed feature.
So, that's a pretty handy feature of the
| | 06:02 |
curtain wall, it's kind of nice it makes
the curtain wall behave almost like a door
| | 06:05 |
or a window.
Now, let's say that I did want this height
| | 06:08 |
to be taller, like I've done here, let a
little bit more light in the stairwell.
| | 06:13 |
But it does get a little tight in this
location here.
| | 06:16 |
So I'm going to show you one more feature
that we can do that's actually not limited
| | 06:19 |
to just curtain walls, you can do this
with any kind of wall.
| | 06:22 |
And that is you can highlight and then
click, you can select the curtain wall and
| | 06:26 |
then you can use this Edit Profile feature
right here.
| | 06:31 |
Now when I do that it's actually going to
take me to sketch mode for this curtain wall.
| | 06:35 |
So now what I'm sketching is actually the
vertical shape of the wall.
| | 06:39 |
And I can use any of my standard shapes
over here to make this modification.
| | 06:43 |
Now what I'm going to do is use this pick
lines feature because this is really
| | 06:46 |
handy, this allows you to select existing
geometry and use that as the basis for the
| | 06:49 |
line you drawing.
Now if I just used that it will put the
| | 06:53 |
line right here at the roof, I want to be
parallel to the roof so what I will do
| | 06:56 |
instead is I'll put any the number over
here in this offset field may be about 5
| | 06:59 |
feet how to do the trick.
And now notice that when I highlight the
| | 07:04 |
edge of the roof its actually giving me a
dash line 5 feet away.
| | 07:08 |
I will click, click my Modify tool to
cancel and now all I need to do is clean
| | 07:12 |
it up.
So I just use my Trim command and remember
| | 07:16 |
pick the side you want to keep don't pick
it here because you will get the wrong
| | 07:20 |
thing, click here and in the side I
want to keep, this side and this side.
| | 07:25 |
And that kind of knocks off that angled
corner there and when I click finish,
| | 07:29 |
notice the way the curtain wall adjusts
itself automatically and the mullions
| | 07:33 |
conform to the new shape.
So that's a pretty handy little feature there.
| | 07:37 |
So this is just a quick overview of the
curtain wall.
| | 07:41 |
You can see that curtain walls are more
complex wall objects.
| | 07:44 |
They contain a series of mullions and
grids and panels.
| | 07:48 |
In this case we're looking at glass
panels, and aluminum mullions but we can
| | 07:51 |
actually change that if we want to.
You can customize the shape and behavior
| | 07:55 |
of the curtain wall.
And so in the next movie, we'll take a
| | 07:58 |
look at some of those features that we can
do.
| | 08:01 |
We can manipulate the grid lines and
mullions, and we'll look at all of that.
| | 08:04 |
But using the type-base curtain walls that
we've seen here, you can set up repetitive
| | 08:08 |
spacings so that you just simply draw out
the curtain wall and you get the same
| | 08:11 |
standard spacing along the length and
height of the curtain wall.
| | 08:15 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding curtain grids, mullions, and panels| 00:00 |
In this movie, we're going to look at
manually created curtain walls.
| | 00:03 |
In the previous movie, we looked at the
curtain wall object and we saw how it was
| | 00:06 |
a series of grids and mullions in a
pattern and those were driven by the type.
| | 00:11 |
Here we're going to look at how we can
layout the grid pattern manually, so that
| | 00:14 |
we can have a little bit more freedom and
flexibility with the design.
| | 00:18 |
So, I'm in a file called Grids and
Mullions.
| | 00:20 |
And, I'm going to zoom in here, on the
front entry and you can see I just have a
| | 00:24 |
blank wall here.
So I'm going to go to my wall tool, open
| | 00:28 |
up my type selector and make sure that I'm
choosing the curtain wall type from the
| | 00:32 |
curtain wall family so they both say
curtain wall.
| | 00:36 |
And this is the most generic curtain wall
it doesn't have any mullions or grids in
| | 00:39 |
it what's so ever.
Now like we did in the previous movie I'm
| | 00:43 |
going to highlight, the exterior wall
here, and click my first point.
| | 00:47 |
Now I'm at about one foot off the corner,
and it's kind of important that you back
| | 00:51 |
up off the corner a little bit here
because if you get too close to the corner
| | 00:54 |
Revit will try to snap to the corner.
So if that happens just undo and try
| | 00:59 |
again, so I'm about one foot off the
corner and I'm going to go down here to
| | 01:02 |
about 15 feet, and when it snaps to 15
feet I'm going to click.
| | 01:07 |
And I'll get an error message.
And the reason I'm getting this error
| | 01:10 |
message is if I do edit type, you remember
in the previous movie we talked about this
| | 01:13 |
automatically embed, well here this
particular curtain wall that feature is
| | 01:16 |
turned off.
You'll also see there everything is set to
| | 01:20 |
none here so we are seeing that born out
here in the curtain wall that there are no
| | 01:23 |
grids or mullions.
Then that's what we're going to be
| | 01:26 |
addressing here shortly.
So let's take care of the error message first.
| | 01:30 |
It tells me here I can use the, Cut
geometry command to fix the problem.
| | 01:34 |
So that's right here on the Modify tab.
I choose Cut Geometry.
| | 01:38 |
And then, the first click is the wall that
I want to cut, and then the second click
| | 01:42 |
is what I want to do the cutting with, and
that's going to be my curtain wall.
| | 01:47 |
And now it will embed itself in the wall.
So you can always manually embed.
| | 01:51 |
Two walls in one another, even if that
automatically embed features not turned on.
| | 01:56 |
Alright so lets make sure that we are
cancelled out of there, the next step is
| | 01:59 |
to start laying out the grids, and the
easiest place to do that is going to be in
| | 02:02 |
an elevation view.
So, I'm going to scroll down here in my
| | 02:06 |
project browser and open up the south
Elevation, and zoom in on the front of the building.
| | 02:12 |
And you will see our curtain wall right
there and I might have to tab if I wanted
| | 02:16 |
to actually select it, there it is right
there and its just big empty plain glass.
| | 02:22 |
On the architecture tab we have a curtain
grid tool and we going to start with that.
| | 02:26 |
And the way this works is, if you
highlight the edges of the curtain wall
| | 02:29 |
you can create either vertical or
horizontal grids.
| | 02:33 |
So I am going to create, some vertical and
horizontal grids that are close to the
| | 02:37 |
edges and notice that I am not really
paying too much attention to where I am
| | 02:40 |
placing them.
I am just sort of placing them wherever
| | 02:44 |
and we've done this before in other places
in revit.
| | 02:47 |
Now I'm also going to add three more
running vertically down the middle, and
| | 02:51 |
then I'll cancel out of the command.
So everything's kind of randomly placed.
| | 02:55 |
Now, as we've seen in other places in
Revit, I can easily select a grid,
| | 02:59 |
highlight the temporary dimension, type in
a number like two feet, that I want to use
| | 03:03 |
there, and it will make that modification.
We can certainly do it that way, I could
| | 03:09 |
repeat it up here.
Make this one two feet, but I want to show
| | 03:13 |
you an alternative way that I like to do
that I think is sometimes a little bit
| | 03:16 |
preferable and that is to use a permanent
dimension.
| | 03:20 |
So, up here on the quick access tool bar,
I'm going to go to my align dimension command.
| | 03:26 |
Click that.
So, I'm going to select my grid lines.
| | 03:33 |
And I actually want to include the outside
edge here, and the outside edge here as well.
| | 03:38 |
Sometimes if you start with the outside
edge, it doesn't let you pick the grid.
| | 03:42 |
So, do the internal grids first.
And then go to the outside edges and it
| | 03:45 |
should work pretty well.
(UNKNOWN) pan slightly just to give myself
| | 03:49 |
some room up here at the top, and click to
place the dimension.
| | 03:53 |
Remember, to place the dimension you have
to click in the empty white space.
| | 03:56 |
I'm going to cancel out that command.
Now, the reason I did it that way is
| | 04:00 |
because, if you select one of these grids
now, notice that even though that's a
| | 04:04 |
permanent dimension, the two numbers that
apply to this particular grid Activate as
| | 04:08 |
temporary dimensions.
And, I can put in a value like one and a
| | 04:14 |
half feet.
I can select the next grid over and you
| | 04:18 |
can see both of these activate.
And I can put in my value.
| | 04:22 |
And then I just keep working my way.
From left to right or right to left.
| | 04:26 |
So, it doesn't really matter which way you
start, but just keep going in the same direction.
| | 04:30 |
Remember to select the object that you
want to move.
| | 04:32 |
If I had this one selected and I change it
to 3 feet, then I come over here and I
| | 04:35 |
change this one to three feet this is
going to keep moving the same grid back
| | 04:38 |
and forth.
So, remember that you move one, and then
| | 04:42 |
you change selection to the next one and
then you move it.
| | 04:46 |
And when you're done you should have one
foot six at both ends and you should have
| | 04:49 |
three for all the middle base.
So that's my basic layout, and even a
| | 04:53 |
layout as simple as that, we could not
achieve in the type dialog.
| | 04:58 |
Because in the type dialog, we get one set
of spacings vertically and another set horizontally.
| | 05:03 |
That's it.
So, to do even a simple custom spacing
| | 05:05 |
like this, you need to manually layout the
grids like we've done.
| | 05:09 |
Now, I want to put a doorway here.
Obviously I've got some grids in the way.
| | 05:12 |
So, the way that we deal with that
situation is you select the grid line and
| | 05:15 |
up here on the ribbon we have this feature
that allows us to add and remove segments
| | 05:19 |
of the grid line.
So, I'm going to click on that and then
| | 05:24 |
you just simply touch the part of the grid
line that you want to remove.
| | 05:27 |
And I can do that there and there and when
I deselect you will see that I am left
| | 05:31 |
with just this part of the grid line.
Now, you'll see the rest of it is still
| | 05:35 |
there it is just invisible.
So lets do it again lets select this one,
| | 05:39 |
add remove segments and I will take out
this middle segment here, am going to
| | 05:42 |
deselect that.
Now, what I've got is if I put my mouse
| | 05:46 |
near the grid, it highlights the curtain
grid If I press the Tab key, it'll go out
| | 05:49 |
and it'll highlight the whole curtain
wall.
| | 05:53 |
If I tab one more time, what you'll see
is, it will then highlight the panel.
| | 05:58 |
Now at the moment, this says it's curtain
panel, system panel, glazed.
| | 06:02 |
So it's just a piece of glass, like
everything else.
| | 06:04 |
I'm going to select that piece of glass.
And, over here on the properties pallet I
| | 06:08 |
can change that to something else.
Now, doors and curtain walls are a little
| | 06:13 |
bit special.
You can't just place a door and pick a
| | 06:15 |
curtain wall, it doesn't work.
So, what you have to have instead is a
| | 06:19 |
specially created curtain wall door, and
that curtain wall door is actually a
| | 06:22 |
curtain panel.
And so if I scroll up here, you can see I
| | 06:26 |
have one such door loaded in this project.
This one comes with a software so you
| | 06:31 |
should have it available to you with your
rivet for other projects but its already
| | 06:34 |
loaded here in this project.
And if I click it here, store front double
| | 06:39 |
door, and then let's deselect it so we can
see it better, you can see that it loads a
| | 06:42 |
door in there for me.
Again, it's a little bizare because I
| | 06:47 |
can't just place the door so I have to
have these specially formualted curtain
| | 06:50 |
panel doors.
Now I'm going to put my mouse over here,
| | 06:53 |
tab a few times, until I get the lower
panel.
| | 06:58 |
Right click this time instead of left
click.
| | 07:00 |
The reason is, under select panels on the
right click menu I can select multiple
| | 07:04 |
panels at the same time.
So I could either do on the vertical grid,
| | 07:08 |
the horizontal, or the entire curtain
wall.
| | 07:11 |
I'm going to do along the horizontal grid,
and you'll see it will go across and
| | 07:14 |
highlight all of these.
Now naturally, I've already got the door
| | 07:18 |
the way I wanted.
So I don't want that one to be selected.
| | 07:21 |
Hold down the Shift key, and I'm going to
remove that like so.
| | 07:25 |
With the remaining panel selected, I'll
come up here, to the drop down.
| | 07:29 |
It's currently a system panel glazed, and
I'm going to change that to a system panel solid.
| | 07:36 |
Now, if I deselect, it doesn't look any
different in this view, and that's because
| | 07:39 |
we're in hidden line display right now.
Down at the bottom of the screen on the
| | 07:43 |
view control bar.
I'm going to click the visual style pop up
| | 07:47 |
and change to shaded.
Now, the blue is awfully bright but that
| | 07:51 |
represents glass and then you could see
these gray panels here, that's our
| | 07:55 |
spandrel glass.
That's our solid panels now.
| | 07:59 |
So, you can see clearly there's a
different material there.
| | 08:02 |
Now it might be easier to see this if we
went to 3d.
| | 08:05 |
So let me go to my default 3d view, and
I'll use my Shift key and my wheel, and
| | 08:10 |
spin this around a little bit, so I can
get a better look there and then zoom in,
| | 08:15 |
like so.
And what you'll see is even in hiddenline
| | 08:21 |
in 3d the glass is transparent.
And then of course, if you want to switch
| | 08:26 |
to shading, you will see that the blue is
a little bit less over powering in this field.
| | 08:30 |
So, you can continue to work right here in
3D if you want, you can work in shading or
| | 08:34 |
hidden line, and all that remains for us
to do is to add some mullions.
| | 08:38 |
Now, I am going to click the mullion tool
here in the architecture tab, and I am
| | 08:41 |
just going to work with default mullions
that are here on the list, you can
| | 08:44 |
actually create around.
But the two and a half by five inch
| | 08:48 |
rectangular mullion is what I'm going to
use.
| | 08:50 |
And over here under placement we have a
few different options.
| | 08:53 |
So we can place on the entire grid line,
and I'll do that for some of the verticals here.
| | 09:00 |
We can place on an individual grid line
segment and I'll do that for this one here
| | 09:04 |
above the door and for these guys down
here.
| | 09:08 |
And you could even do the entire grid.
That'll do everything that's left but
| | 09:13 |
that'll place them in places where I don't
want.
| | 09:15 |
So, I'm going to go back to the grid line
feature for that.
| | 09:18 |
And just add them in the locations where I
need them.
| | 09:21 |
Cancel out of there.
If we zoom in slightly, you can kind of
| | 09:25 |
tell that the mullions have a preferred
direction.
| | 09:28 |
You can see that the vertical takes
precedence over the horizontal.
| | 09:31 |
We can control that.
So if I select this mullion right here,
| | 09:34 |
for example, you could see these small
little grips there, now that might not be
| | 09:37 |
easier to see if I go back to hidden line
you could see them right there, okay, and
| | 09:41 |
if I click that, that toggles that joint
condition there.
| | 09:46 |
So we can do that on additional ones if we
want too, but there is actually a faster
| | 09:50 |
way, I'm going to highlight one of these
mullions, Right click again, and just like
| | 09:53 |
we had Select options for the panels, we
have similar ones for the mullions.
| | 09:59 |
And I can say in this case, on grid line
and that will highlight them all the way across.
| | 10:03 |
You can right click a second time to get
to this next command, but it's also right
| | 10:06 |
here on the ribbon.
We can say, make that continuous.
| | 10:10 |
So I'll choose that, and you see it does
it all the way across.
| | 10:14 |
Feel free to continue to fine tune it some
more if you like and make additional adjustments.
| | 10:19 |
But as you can see by manually laying out
a series of grids and mullions, and
| | 10:22 |
swapping in and out different kinds of
panels, you can make a more custom curtain
| | 10:25 |
wall design, then you would be able to
achieve using the type driven curtain wall.
| | 10:32 |
So the both curtain walls give us
interesting possibilities and help us to
| | 10:35 |
create more complexity in our design.
But we've really only scratched the
| | 10:39 |
surface here.
In the advance modeling course, here at
| | 10:42 |
lynda.com, i have covered many other
curtain wall techniques including sloped
| | 10:45 |
clasing and curtain wall systems and the
conceptual modeling environment with
| | 10:49 |
pattern surfaces.
So when you are done with essentials
| | 10:53 |
having curved edge, take a look at that
course and see some additional techniques
| | 10:56 |
over there.
| | 10:58 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating wall sweeps and reveals| 00:00 |
In this movie, we'll look at sweeps and
reveals.
| | 00:02 |
A sweep is material that you add to a
wall, and a reveal is material that you
| | 00:04 |
carve away.
Both use a two dimensional family type
| | 00:07 |
called a profile, which determines the
shape of the material that you're either
| | 00:10 |
adding or removing, and then that material
is pushed along the length and or the
| | 00:13 |
height of the wall.
We can apply sweeps and reveals at either
| | 00:18 |
the type level in which case they would
apply to all instances of that wall type,
| | 00:21 |
or we can actually apply them wall by wall
by selecting the individual walls that we
| | 00:24 |
want to add them to.
So I'm in a file here called Sweeps and
| | 00:29 |
Reveals and let's go ahead and start by
doing a type based sweep that we're
| | 00:33 |
going to apply to this exterior wall type.
So I'm going to select one of the
| | 00:38 |
instances of this interior wall and you
could see that its the basic wall exterior
| | 00:42 |
brick on metal stud type.
And I'm going to choose the Edit Type dialogue.
| | 00:46 |
Next, I'm going to go to the Edit
Structure, like we have done before.
| | 00:50 |
And what I want to get to is Sweep button
down here, but as you can see, its
| | 00:53 |
currently grayed out.
Well, the key to this is right here it
| | 00:57 |
says this is available in Section Preview
only.
| | 01:00 |
So before you are able to use any of these
buttons down here, you have to make sure
| | 01:03 |
that not only is your Preview turned on
which it is over here, but also the View
| | 01:07 |
is set to Section.
And as soon as you do that, you can see
| | 01:11 |
all those buttons laid up and you are now
looking at a section cut through this wall type.
| | 01:17 |
Now, I am going to go ahead and widen this
up just a little bit.
| | 01:20 |
Then I'm going to click the Sweeps button
right here.
| | 01:22 |
And I'll take this Sweeps dialog and I'm
going to move it out of the way slightly
| | 01:25 |
so that I can see the Preview window in
the background.
| | 01:29 |
Now, you get this sort of table here with
lots of options, and it's really important
| | 01:32 |
to see that preview in the background so
you can kind of have some idea of.
| | 01:36 |
How your progress is going as you work.
The first we want to do is click the Add
| | 01:40 |
button right here, and that will add our
first sweep.
| | 01:43 |
Now, the profile is the first thing you
want to consider.
| | 01:46 |
If I click there, that's actually a drop
down list, and you can see that the
| | 01:49 |
template that we use to create this
building from has several sweeps already
| | 01:52 |
built into it.
There's some vinyl base and there's some
| | 01:56 |
parapet caps and so on.
I'm going to scroll down here to the
| | 01:59 |
bottom of the list and choose this wall
sweep, Brick Solider Course 3 bricks.
| | 02:04 |
Now, let's see what that looks like.
Let's click Apply right here.
| | 02:07 |
Now, notice I'll take that sweep and it
will just drop it at the very bottom of
| | 02:10 |
the wall, and it's kind of hanging off the
outside of the wall.
| | 02:13 |
So it's probably not quite what I want to
do.
| | 02:16 |
So let's work our way across the table
here and make some modifications.
| | 02:20 |
Now, the first thing I might want to
consider then is where that sweep is located.
| | 02:25 |
So you could see there's a From column
here and there are two choices Base and Top.
| | 02:30 |
Now, in this case, I want to go ahead and
measure it from the base.
| | 02:34 |
So I'm going to leave that set to base but
I'm going to change this distance right
| | 02:37 |
next to it and I will put in about 6 feet
for that.
| | 02:41 |
Now, if we click Apply on that, you will
see the Soldier Course move up and it's
| | 02:45 |
measured 6 feet off the floor.
If you'd rather measure it from the top of
| | 02:49 |
the wall, you can change the from point to
top and then you probably need to use a
| | 02:52 |
negative number in the distance field.
Now, let's go ahead and assign a material
| | 02:57 |
to to this sweep.
So we are going to click right there and
| | 03:00 |
over here in the Search field, I'm
going to type in soldier.
| | 03:04 |
And that would bring up machinery brick
solder course, I'll will select that.
| | 03:08 |
You could see that it's got this vertical
pattern assigned to it, let's click OK.
| | 03:13 |
And now we've assigned that material to
this, then I'm going to come over here and
| | 03:17 |
look at these other settings here because
we're still kind of hanging off the
| | 03:20 |
outside of the wall.
So I'm going to look at this Offset
| | 03:24 |
feature next.
And a brick is about 2 and 2 3rds inches
| | 03:27 |
or in this case, it might be maybe a
little bit more than that.
| | 03:32 |
but i am going to go ahead and put in 2
and 2 3rds inches for the offset, press
| | 03:35 |
the Enter there.
When I click Apply though, you are
| | 03:39 |
going to see that it actually pushes it
away from he wall.
| | 03:43 |
So it turns out that what i really want to
do is put negative number in front of that
| | 03:47 |
and let's click Apply.
And as you could see, it's a little bit
| | 03:51 |
off, so you want to actually increase this
number perhaps to about 3 inches instead,
| | 03:55 |
you can get it to set in the thickness a
little bit more.
| | 03:59 |
So, you can fine tune that setting a
little bit, if you like.
| | 04:02 |
I'm going to let it cut the wall, and as
you can see here in the preview, that
| | 04:05 |
kind of makes a pocket in the existing
wall to receive the soldier course, that's
| | 04:09 |
what Cuts Wall does.
And if I also make it cuttable, then any
| | 04:14 |
windows or doors that interrupt this
soldier course will actually cut through
| | 04:17 |
the soldier course.
So that seems like a pretty good thing to do.
| | 04:22 |
Let's go ahead and click OK and then OK
two more times to see the result.
| | 04:26 |
And, as you can see the soldier course
added not only to the wall that I had
| | 04:30 |
selected but you can see it here and in
fact, all the way around the building if I
| | 04:34 |
hold my Shift key in and drag with my
wheel and it also appears right here.
| | 04:41 |
Because that wall up there actually is
using the same wall type.
| | 04:44 |
Well, ahead of time, here in the file I
created a copy of that wall type and just
| | 04:48 |
named it No Sweep.
So, that's the easiest way to deal with
| | 04:52 |
that problem is to just reset it back to
an original of that type that doesn't have
| | 04:56 |
the sweep.
So, that's an example of a type based sweep.
| | 05:02 |
We could also add sweeps wall by wall by
using the drop down here on the Wall tool
| | 05:06 |
and choosing Wall Sweep.
Now, notice there's also Wall Reveal.
| | 05:12 |
Reveals are available in both the type
dialogue right here with the Reveal
| | 05:16 |
button, and you can see it's a very
similar dialog, I'll cancel out of there.
| | 05:23 |
And they're also available right here
using the Wall Reveal.
| | 05:26 |
Now, if I wait for the Tool Tip to appear,
you can kind of see what the reveal is
| | 05:29 |
going to do, it's going to carve away the
material of the wall instead of adding to it.
| | 05:35 |
So, I'm going to choose the Reveal.
And, here on the list there's only one choice.
| | 05:40 |
It just says reveal, an it's a simple
rectangular profile.
| | 05:43 |
If you want to change the shape of the
profile you can choose edit type an pick a
| | 05:45 |
different profile, but in this case I'm
just going to accept the default.
| | 05:49 |
And the next thing I want to look at is
how I want to place it.
| | 05:52 |
You can place it horizontally or
vertically.
| | 05:55 |
Now, when you do a reveal or a sweep at
the type level, it only runs horizontally.
| | 05:59 |
But in the case of the individual wall by
wall sweeps and reveals, you can actually
| | 06:03 |
do it vertically as well, and the way it
works is you just simply click where you
| | 06:05 |
want to place that thing.
And notice that you can actually place it
| | 06:10 |
on more than one wall.
Let's go ahead and cancel out of there,
| | 06:14 |
zoom in and take a look at the result.
And you'll see that the reveal has cut
| | 06:19 |
away from the wall.
Now, if I repeat the command and change to
| | 06:23 |
vertical, you can see that we can also run
the reveal in the other direction.
| | 06:29 |
This button right here restart, allows you
to finish that reveal and then add a
| | 06:34 |
second one.
Restart and add another one.
| | 06:38 |
So each time you want to add another one,
you click the Restart button.
| | 06:43 |
Otherwise, it will continue to add to the
existing one.
| | 06:46 |
So, you can add either sweeps or reveals
in the same basic process.
| | 06:50 |
You can add them at the type level in
which they apply to all instances of that
| | 06:54 |
wall type or you can add them wall by wall
by using the tools on the drop down menu.
| | 07:00 |
In both cases, they use a profile family
which just determines the shape of the
| | 07:04 |
sweeper reveal.
And then that shape is pushed along either
| | 07:08 |
the height or the length of the wall to
create architectural detailing in bands
| | 07:11 |
and moldings and so on.
| | 07:14 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Model lines| 00:00 |
In this movie we're going to look at model
lines.
| | 00:02 |
Model lines can be used for a variety of
things, and they really are a very simple object.
| | 00:07 |
They're actually a two dimensional object,
but as their name implies, they are
| | 00:10 |
considered part of the model.
So, even though it's two dimensional line
| | 00:14 |
work, it's going to show in any 3D view
because Revit thinks of it as part of the model.
| | 00:19 |
So, imagine that you're actually painting
lines on the wall and you have a pretty
| | 00:24 |
good idea of what a model line is intended
for.
| | 00:27 |
The example I'm going to show you is using
a model line instead of actually modeling
| | 00:31 |
three dimensional geometry.
In the movie where we looked at sweeps and
| | 00:35 |
reveals, we saw that a reveal could curve
away from form of a wall.
| | 00:39 |
It may be tempting to use reveals for
smaller scale details things like control
| | 00:43 |
joints and very small indentations on the
wall.
| | 00:47 |
And while it seems like a pretty good idea
at the time, on a small project, you might
| | 00:51 |
be able to get away with it, but on a
larger project, the overhead that you
| | 00:54 |
start to introduce to your model can
really become a detriment.
| | 00:59 |
Because every time you create that three
dimensional form in your model, it's
| | 01:03 |
actually increasing the overall size of
the model and therefore having an impact
| | 01:07 |
on the overall performance.
Furthermore, when it comes time to print
| | 01:12 |
something like that.
Let's say I made a really small reveal
| | 01:15 |
that was only about a half an inch in
size.
| | 01:17 |
At an eighth inch scale or even a quarter
inch scale drawing, those two edges of the
| | 01:21 |
reveal are going to be so small, and so
close together that they're going to just
| | 01:23 |
bleed together and appear like one big fat
line.
| | 01:28 |
And so, you probably wouldn't be satisfied
with the graphics either.
| | 01:30 |
So, for those reasons in situations like
control joints and other kinds of small
| | 01:33 |
scale details, you might want to consider
using a model line instead.
| | 01:37 |
And that's what we're going to do here in
this movie.
| | 01:40 |
So, I'm in a file called model lines, and
if I zoom in slightly, you can see that
| | 01:44 |
this is just a brick wall.
Now, the first thing I want to address is
| | 01:49 |
you can see over here that the brick
pattern just sort of starts randomly.
| | 01:54 |
So, I can fix that easily enough with the
Align command.
| | 01:57 |
And I'm just going to pick the edge of the
wall here, and then highlight any line on
| | 02:00 |
the pattern.
And that will shift the entire brick pattern.
| | 02:03 |
So, that will help me get my control
joints placed a little bit more precisely.
| | 02:08 |
So, that shifts my brick pattern.
Now, you can use the same technique to
| | 02:11 |
start shifting the doors and windows, if
you want to, to get them to all fall in a
| | 02:14 |
brick dimension.
I'll leave that up to you.
| | 02:17 |
I'm going to go the Architecture tab, and
look for the Model Line tool right here.
| | 02:21 |
And when I click on it the first thing
that Revit will ask me is for a work plain.
| | 02:25 |
Because I'm working in a non planned view,
it can't assume which plain I want to draw on.
| | 02:30 |
So, it's asking me where do you want to
draw these two dimensional basically model lines.
| | 02:35 |
So, I'm going to use the Pick a Plan
option that it's offering me here.
| | 02:38 |
Click OK.
And I can just pick anywhere on the face
| | 02:40 |
of this wall.
Now, over here we get our Standard Draw
| | 02:44 |
toolbox, you can draw model lines in any
shape you want.
| | 02:47 |
In addition to that, you can assign a line
style.
| | 02:50 |
So, you can make these dash lines or
hidden lines or really thin lines.
| | 02:54 |
Now, this default one just called lines is
actually going to show up in green.
| | 02:58 |
So, I'm going to go with that so that
these become really obvious, and you can
| | 03:01 |
change the line style later if you want
to.
| | 03:03 |
I want to check all my other settings
here.
| | 03:05 |
I actually don't want change in this case,
so, I'm going to turn that off.
| | 03:08 |
And I don't want an offset.
And what I'll do is just find one of my
| | 03:11 |
brick pattern lines here, and click, and
click.
| | 03:16 |
And it's just as simple as that.
Take this temporary dimension, start
| | 03:20 |
dragging it, press the Tab key to
highlight the outside face.
| | 03:24 |
That gives me the dimension right here,
and then maybe I want these control joints
| | 03:27 |
every 20 feet.
So, I can put in 20 feet, that hit the
| | 03:30 |
window, so, let's go with 18 feet.
Now, I can just copy it, pick my start
| | 03:36 |
point, go another 18 feet, and I could
keep going down the face of the building.
| | 03:42 |
Now, as I said, I'm going to leave these
with the green line style right now, but
| | 03:45 |
you can simply select them later and
change the line style if you have a
| | 03:48 |
different style, perhaps you might even
create a line style called Control Joints.
| | 03:54 |
But what I want to show you is if you
switch to another view, those lines still display.
| | 03:59 |
So, that's the advantage of using a model
line, is that it's still considered part
| | 04:03 |
of your 3D model.
However, if we zoom in nice and close,
| | 04:07 |
it's really just a line painted on the
surface of the wall.
| | 04:11 |
It didn't actually change the structure of
the wall in anyway, and so, it tends to be
| | 04:15 |
a little bit lighter on the overhead
department than if you actually use or
| | 04:18 |
reveal or something.
| | 04:20 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Visibility and Graphic ControlsUsing object styles| 00:00 |
As you work through your projects in
Revit, you will find times when you wish
| | 00:03 |
to change the way that various elements
display on screen and in your output.
| | 00:07 |
There are various tools available in the
software to make such changes, both
| | 00:11 |
globally across the entire project, and in
more specific and isolated ways.
| | 00:16 |
Each of the movies in this chapter, we
will explore the topic with progressively
| | 00:19 |
more specificity.
We'll begin here in this movie with the
| | 00:23 |
global project wide settings known as
Object Styles.
| | 00:26 |
So I'm in a file called object styles, and
I'm looking at a section cut through the building.
| | 00:31 |
This is the longitudinal section.
Now I'm going to zoom in over here where
| | 00:38 |
the floor slab meets the exterior wall.
And what you'll see here is this floor
| | 00:45 |
slab is using kind of a light line weight.
And the exterior wall is using a heavier
| | 00:50 |
bolder line weight.
We could go in, in a variety of ways and
| | 00:54 |
start to modify how that line weight is
applied.
| | 00:57 |
But if we opened up a different section,
what we would see is if we would look at a
| | 01:02 |
similar condition we have exactly the same
issue.
| | 01:07 |
So the first place you want to look when
making changes to the graphics on screen
| | 01:11 |
is, is there a way that I can apply the
change.
| | 01:14 |
So that it will apply everywhere and I
won't have to do it over and over again.
| | 01:19 |
And it turns out that your overall
lineweight settings are one of the few
| | 01:22 |
places that we can do globally.
Most settings in Revit are actually view
| | 01:27 |
by view but this particular setting we can
do globally.
| | 01:30 |
So I'm going to go back to my longitudinal
section, go to my Manage tab and we're
| | 01:34 |
looking for the Object Styles command,
find the button right here.
| | 01:40 |
In object styles you get a list of all of
the categories in your Revit project and
| | 01:44 |
they're grouped into a few different tabs.
We have our Model Objects tab and then
| | 01:49 |
several other tabs.
We're going to obviously focus here on
| | 01:52 |
Model Objects and here is all the Model
categories.
| | 01:56 |
Now this is our floor element right here.
You can see that there's a Line Weight
| | 02:00 |
column and that branches into two separate
column, Projection and Cut.
| | 02:04 |
And you can see that for floors we're
using the same Line Weight for both
| | 02:07 |
Projection and Cut, a Line Weight 2.
Line weight 2 is relatively fine, as you
| | 02:12 |
can see.
Line Weight 1 is our smallest Line Weight
| | 02:14 |
and then it goes up to actually line
weight 16, but it's rare that you would
| | 02:17 |
ever go that high.
You can see here that if you scroll this
| | 02:22 |
window that about the thickest Line Weight
that's used is a Pen Weight 5.
| | 02:27 |
So that gives you some idea of how rare it
would be to go to the higher numbers.
| | 02:31 |
Now if I look down here at the wall item,
you can see that in Projection, now
| | 02:35 |
Projection is when you're looking at
something, okay?
| | 02:39 |
And then, you've got cut, that's when
you're actually slicing through it.
| | 02:43 |
Now we're slicing through it here in the
background.
| | 02:46 |
So you can see that in projection, it's a
Pen Weight 2, just like the floor.
| | 02:49 |
But in cut, it's using a much heavier Pen
Weight, a Pen Weight 4, and that's why we
| | 02:53 |
are seeing the bolder line here and we're
still seeing a thin line for the floor.
| | 02:59 |
So all I'm going to do here is scroll back
up to the floor object and just simply
| | 03:03 |
change its Line Weight, to match what
we're doing with the wall.
| | 03:10 |
Now, while I'm here, I'm going to look at
the ceiling object and it really has kind
| | 03:13 |
of the same problem.
In fact, if I look over at this side you
| | 03:16 |
can see that there's a tiny little bold
element there, two little lines that are bold.
| | 03:22 |
That's actually a very small wall, and so
that wall is cutting with a Pen Weight
| | 03:26 |
four, and the ceiling and the floor that
it's attached to Are both using the pen
| | 03:29 |
weight too.
Because if we look at our Ceiling object,
| | 03:33 |
it's got the same settings as the floor.
So why don't we change that one to a Pen
| | 03:37 |
Weight four as well?
Now, when I make both of those changes,
| | 03:40 |
and I click OK.
Suddenly, the outline of the floors and
| | 03:44 |
ceilings looks a lot bolder.
It has a lot more punch.
| | 03:47 |
And it seems to fit in a lot better with
the surrounding geometry.
| | 03:50 |
The nice thing about the object styles
feature is, if I go back to the transverse
| | 03:55 |
section, it's already applied here as
well.
| | 03:58 |
So any time you can get away with doing
something at the object styles level, it's
| | 04:02 |
always preferable.
Because that change gets applied globally
| | 04:06 |
throughout the project in every view.
So everything starts with object styles.
| | 04:11 |
And then we start modifying from there.
And in the next several movies we'll look
| | 04:15 |
at a variety of ways that we can modify
from there.
| | 04:18 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with visibility and graphic overrides| 00:00 |
There are many instances when you'll have
a need to control the way things display onscreen.
| | 00:04 |
In the previous movie we looked at the
Object Styles command, which allowed us to
| | 00:07 |
change Global settings like the Line
Weight.
| | 00:11 |
Or we could change, actually, the color or
the line styles in that dialog as well,
| | 00:14 |
but, surprisingly we can't use that method
to actually hide and show objects.
| | 00:19 |
Now there are plenty of times when you
might actually just want to hide something.
| | 00:23 |
Maybe I need to show a furniture plan and
that's going to show one set of objects.
| | 00:27 |
And then I need to show a separate power
or equipment plan and then it's going to
| | 00:30 |
show some different objects.
So to turn things on and off I actually
| | 00:34 |
have to use a different method.
And so in this movie we're going to look
| | 00:38 |
at the Visibility Graphic Overrides
feature.
| | 00:40 |
And this is a view specific modification
so any changes I make here won't be
| | 00:44 |
global, they'll actually apply only to the
view that I'm in.
| | 00:48 |
And I'm in a file here called Visibility
Graphics and I'm looking at Level 1 Floor Plan.
| | 00:53 |
So when I demonstrate this we'll see that
any of these changes will only apply here,
| | 00:56 |
in Level 1.
Let's take a quick look.
| | 00:59 |
I'm going to come up here on the View tab
and click the Visibility Graphics button.
| | 01:03 |
And you'll see it as the shortcut, VG and
often, people actually refer to this as
| | 01:07 |
the VG dialogue, because it's used so
frequently.
| | 01:10 |
Let's do a really simple example here.
I'm going to kind of move this box out of
| | 01:13 |
the way.
You can kind of see I have a view doors
| | 01:15 |
here in the background.
This box looks a lot like the object styles.
| | 01:19 |
It has the same tabs.
It has the same categories listed here.
| | 01:22 |
Obviously, there's more columns, and we'll
look at some of those.
| | 01:25 |
But the check box over here was not
present in object style.
| | 01:28 |
And this allows us to check and uncheck
the various objects that we want to hide
| | 01:32 |
and show.
So, for example, if I decided to uncheck
| | 01:35 |
the doors, and click the Apply button
right here.
| | 01:39 |
What you'll see is all the doors in the
background there disappeared.
| | 01:42 |
Now, I can't think of too many good
reasons why I'd want to hide the doors in
| | 01:44 |
a floor plan, so that was really more of
an example.
| | 01:47 |
So I'm going to check the box again and
click Apply again to turn them back on.
| | 01:51 |
Maybe I want to do something a little more
practical.
| | 01:54 |
If you look over on this side of the plan
you can see here in the background I have
| | 01:57 |
some furniture and I have some electrical
outlets.
| | 02:01 |
So perhaps I have a need to show the
furniture sometimes, and other times to
| | 02:04 |
show the electrical outlets.
Well, I could hide my Electrical Fixtures
| | 02:08 |
category, print out my drawing.
I could come back, turn those back on again.
| | 02:13 |
Hide my Furniture category, come back,
print the drawing.
| | 02:15 |
That would be kind of an inefficient way
to work.
| | 02:18 |
What we typically do instead is in Revit,
is we typically duplicate the view.
| | 02:23 |
And then set up two different views, two
different ways.
| | 02:26 |
And this is leveraging the feature that I
mentioned to you a moment ago.
| | 02:29 |
That anything we do in visibility
graphics, only affects the current view.
| | 02:32 |
So let me demonstrate, so here's Level 1
Floor Plan.
| | 02:35 |
I'm going to right-click it, right on the
Project browser.
| | 02:38 |
And I'm going to go to Duplicate View, and
we actually have three different ways that
| | 02:41 |
we can do that.
I want to demonstrate the first two, these
| | 02:44 |
are the ones you going to use most
frquently.
| | 02:46 |
If we choose just duplicate we get a
version of the view that removes all the
| | 02:51 |
view specific elements.
All the text, all the dimensions, all the tags.
| | 02:57 |
So you can see here all I see is geometry.
If I go back to Level 1, notice I have the
| | 03:02 |
door tags and the room tags and the
dimensions still.
| | 03:06 |
Right-click it again and I do duplicate
with detailing this time I'll get an exact
| | 03:11 |
copy of this view, including all the
annotation.
| | 03:15 |
Now I'm going to right-click that Copy 2
of Level 1, and I'm going to rename it.
| | 03:20 |
And I'm going to remove the Copy 2
portion, leave it Level 1 and I'm going to
| | 03:24 |
write furniture plan at the end.
So this is my Level 1 furniture plan.
| | 03:30 |
So what I want to do in this particular
plan is I want to configure it to show me
| | 03:34 |
only furniture.
Now you're going to deal with annotation
| | 03:37 |
elements in a view differently than you're
going to deal with the model elements.
| | 03:41 |
We're going to use VG, visibility graphics
to control the model elements and
| | 03:45 |
annotation elements.
You're just going to Delete and Add them
| | 03:48 |
as necessary.
So what I'm going to do here is make a
| | 03:50 |
windows selection around the entire floor
plan.
| | 03:53 |
That highlights everything, go up to my
Filter selection.
| | 03:57 |
I'm going to click check none.
Because you can see I have quite a few
| | 04:00 |
categories selected.
And I'm going to select only the door
| | 04:05 |
tags, the dimensions and the window tags.
So I'm going to select those three
| | 04:11 |
categories, click OK.
You'll notice it only highlights those
| | 04:14 |
elements and I'll just simply Delete
those.
| | 04:17 |
Now I'm getting a message here about a
constraint that's applied to one of my dimensions.
| | 04:21 |
It's offering to either un constrain them
or I could just simply click OK.
| | 04:25 |
I don't actually want to remove the
constraint.
| | 04:27 |
So I'm just simply going to click OK.
Now even though I delete it the dimensions
| | 04:31 |
and the tags from this view if I go back
to level 1 floor plan you will see they
| | 04:34 |
are still here.
Its very important to understand that each
| | 04:39 |
view has its own annotation.
So that takes care the annotation aspect,
| | 04:42 |
but what about the visibility?
As we have said perhaps the furniture plan
| | 04:46 |
doesn't want to see things like these
electrical outlets may be I want to just
| | 04:50 |
limit it to just the furniture.
So to do that, I need to use visibility graphics.
| | 04:56 |
So I'm going to go to VG, just type VG on
my keyboard.
| | 05:00 |
And I need to locate those categories that
I don't want to see here in this Furniture Plan.
| | 05:04 |
So I'm going to uncheck Electrical
Fixtures and let's click Apply.
| | 05:09 |
And you'll see that all of the outlets and
the light switches disappear.
| | 05:13 |
So, that's the effect I was looking for,
I'll click OK.
| | 05:16 |
And that completes my Furniture Plan.
Now, I can take this furniture plan and I
| | 05:21 |
can use it to generate a second copy.
I'm going to duplicate again, again with
| | 05:26 |
detailing, but this time I'm duplicating
from my furniture plan.
| | 05:31 |
So I'll do duplicate with detailing,
select it, and rename it.
| | 05:35 |
This ones going to be Level 1 Power Plan,
click okay.
| | 05:42 |
The difference I want here, is, now I
want to see the electrical fixtures.
| | 05:47 |
And maybe I don't want to see the
furniture.
| | 05:49 |
So I'm going to go to VG.
Turn back on the Electrical Fixtures.
| | 05:53 |
And I can turn off the Furniture.
Now when I do that maybe that's the view
| | 05:58 |
I'm after.
You can see that it's a little bit cleaner there.
| | 06:00 |
Of course going back to level one
everything is still here, so this doesn't
| | 06:03 |
remove things from the model, it just
simply hides them in that view.
| | 06:08 |
Maybe I change my mind in the Power Plan
and I actually want to see the Furniture,
| | 06:11 |
I just don't want it as intense.
So, to show you one more feature here
| | 06:15 |
we've been limiting our discussion here to
the Visibility column.
| | 06:19 |
But there's lots of other columns over
here.
| | 06:21 |
I'm not going to go through every one but
if we look over here at the far right we
| | 06:24 |
have a column here called Halftone.
And so perhaps instead I want to turn the
| | 06:29 |
furniture back on, but I want to Halftone
it instead this will be the effect that
| | 06:33 |
I'll get.
The Furniture will redisplay, but it will
| | 06:37 |
display much lighter, so that its may be
not quiet over powering the Power Plan.
| | 06:42 |
So you have few different ways that you
can decide to set thing up.
| | 06:46 |
But the Visibility Graphics command ,its
very powerful command its going to allow
| | 06:50 |
you to very focused and specialized views
that are specific to the needs at hand.
| | 06:55 |
So, using it I can turn things on and off,
or change the way they graphically
| | 06:58 |
display, keeping in mind that those
changes only apply to the Active view.
| | 07:02 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using view templates| 00:00 |
Visibility graphics gives us a way to
modify what we're seeing on a view by view
| | 00:03 |
basis and as we saw in the previous movie
it can be a very powerful way for us to
| | 00:05 |
manage different kinds of views.
But what do you do in a situation where
| | 00:09 |
you have a project that has lots of views
that are similar to one another.
| | 00:13 |
So maybe you have a ten story building,
and whatever changes you make on your
| | 00:16 |
level one floor plan or furniture plan,
you want to see on the upper levels as well.
| | 00:20 |
In cases like that, we have a feature
called View Templates.
| | 00:23 |
And all a View Template does is capture
all of the settings that you've applied to
| | 00:26 |
a view, saves them under a name, and then
you can apply those settings to other
| | 00:29 |
similar kinds of views.
So let's have a look.
| | 00:33 |
So I'm in a file called View Template.
And I'm in the level one floor plan.
| | 00:36 |
And I'm going to zoom in on some portion
of the floor plan over here.
| | 00:41 |
So as you can see there is this concrete
stipple pattern applied across all the
| | 00:44 |
floor slabs in this view.
Now that may be appropriate to show in
| | 00:48 |
elevation view but typically you wouldn't
want to see that in a floor plan.
| | 00:52 |
Now I can't hide the floor slabs
themselves if I went to visibility
| | 00:56 |
graphics using the keyboard shortcut v g.
And turned off the floor object category.
| | 01:03 |
When you apply that you're going to see
that the stipple disappears but the edges
| | 01:07 |
of the floor slabs disappear as well, and
so out here where had that patio situation
| | 01:11 |
I lose that edge.
So that's really not going to be the best
| | 01:15 |
solution here.
Instead what I want to do is look at some
| | 01:18 |
of these other columns that I have here in
visibility graphics and I could modify the
| | 01:22 |
projection or surface settings or I could
modify the cut settings.
| | 01:27 |
Now in this case its the projectional
surface that I am interested in and
| | 01:30 |
specifically the patterns that I want to
look at so her's my floor category and you
| | 01:33 |
could see that an override button appears
in each of these items, so I am going to
| | 01:36 |
choose the override button in the pattern
column.
| | 01:41 |
And it has it's own visibility check box,
so I'll just simply uncheck that, click OK.
| | 01:46 |
And then when I Apply that, you'll see
that I don't lose the line here, only the
| | 01:50 |
steeple pattern disappears and that's
confirmed with the word hidden right here.
| | 01:56 |
Now let's say that I went through and made
lots of other changes in this dialogue as well.
| | 02:01 |
A single change might not be that hard to
replicate on another floor.
| | 02:04 |
For example if we go up to the second
floor plan you can see that I am still see
| | 02:07 |
that I am still seeing the stiple patterns
here because anything that you do
| | 02:10 |
invisibility graphics only applies to the
current view that you are in.
| | 02:15 |
So I could easily turn off the stipple
again here flowing the same steps but what
| | 02:19 |
if i had gone through and made lots of
changes?
| | 02:22 |
In the visibility graphics.
It might become more tedious to make those
| | 02:25 |
changes, and particularly if I have lots
of other floor plans.
| | 02:28 |
All right, so let me go back to the level
one floor plan, and what I want to do is
| | 02:32 |
capture the settings that I have applied
to this floor plan in a custom View Template.
| | 02:38 |
So I go the view tab, click here on the
View Template's drop down, and create a
| | 02:41 |
view template from the current view.
It will ask me for a name, and I'll call
| | 02:46 |
this (SOUND).
Typical floor plan, click okay.
| | 02:50 |
And that will open up the View Template's
dialogue with that new view template highlighted.
| | 02:54 |
You could see over here on the right, all
of the settings that are being captured in
| | 02:57 |
this View Template.
So you can see there are quite a few
| | 03:00 |
different settings.
And the ones that I changed were here in
| | 03:02 |
visibility graphics for model.
But it's also going to record the scale
| | 03:06 |
and the lighting and the shadows and just
everything that you see here.
| | 03:10 |
So I'm going to click OK.
And now all I have to do is go up to the
| | 03:13 |
Level 2 floor plan and apply the View
Template properties to this view.
| | 03:19 |
I can do that in one of two ways.
The simplest way to do it is to simply go
| | 03:23 |
right back to View Template's drop down
and apply template properties to the
| | 03:28 |
current view.
Now when you do it this way you just
| | 03:32 |
simply select the template that you want,
click okay, and it will apply the settings
| | 03:36 |
one time, this is a one off change.
So this view still maintains its own
| | 03:42 |
settings but it just basically copied the
settings from the first floor.
| | 03:47 |
Now, let's look at an alternative way to
do that.
| | 03:49 |
Maybe, in addition to applying the
template properties to the view, you also
| | 03:53 |
want to make them permanent.
Here's an example.
| | 03:56 |
I'm going to go up here to the level 1
power plan view.
| | 04:00 |
I'm going to zoom in.
And let's say that I want to capture all
| | 04:02 |
the settings that we have in here in
another View Template.
| | 04:05 |
So I'm going to go up to the View Template
dropdown again, create a view template
| | 04:08 |
from the current view, and call this
Typical Power Plant.
| | 04:13 |
Verify all the settings, click OK.
And now, what I want to do is instead of
| | 04:17 |
applying the properties to this or other
views, what I'm going to do is scroll down
| | 04:21 |
here on the properties palette, and you'll
see here that Under identity data there's
| | 04:25 |
a setting and it's currently set to none.
I can click that button and choose my
| | 04:32 |
typical power plan and click Okay and I'm
going to repeat that on level two, none,
| | 04:36 |
typical power plan and click okay.
Now, the first thing we'll see up on the
| | 04:42 |
Level 2 power plan is that one was showing
steeple pattern and that has gone away, so
| | 04:46 |
now you can see that both of these power
plans are using the same settings..
| | 04:51 |
But I look at it and I realize oh, I
wanted to half tone the furniture in my
| | 04:55 |
power plans and I forgot to do that.
So the advantage of setting it the way
| | 05:00 |
that I've just done by actually assigning
it as a property on the property's pallet,
| | 05:04 |
is that now the View Template is in
control of any of the settings the are
| | 05:08 |
applied to these views.
So, to modify it, I go back to View
| | 05:13 |
Templates, and choose the manage view
templates command.
| | 05:17 |
Scroll down, and locate the typical power
plant.
| | 05:21 |
Now here, I can choose the visibility
graphic overrides from model, and click
| | 05:25 |
that edit button.
Locate the furniture category.
| | 05:31 |
And check the halftone button.
Click okay, and okay again.
| | 05:36 |
Now the furniture will halftone here in
the level two power plan.
| | 05:40 |
But notice that if I go back to level one
power plan, it's already halftoned here as well.
| | 05:45 |
Because I've made the modification to the
View Template.
| | 05:49 |
Any view that has that View Template
assigned as a property will get that
| | 05:52 |
change immediately.
So, I can manage that change globally from
| | 05:56 |
one place.
Now, there is a slight downside to working
| | 06:00 |
this way, unlike the way that I did it
with the level two floor plan.
| | 06:06 |
Here, if you decided you needed to change
something either permanently or
| | 06:09 |
temporarily, you can't do it with the View
template assigned.
| | 06:13 |
For example, the scale.
Currently you'll see that all the scale
| | 06:17 |
vales are grayed out.
Or the level of detail.
| | 06:20 |
You'll see that those are grayed out.
Or many of the settings here on the
| | 06:23 |
Properties palette you'll see are also
grayed out.
| | 06:26 |
In fact, anything that was captured in
that View template is now unavailable to
| | 06:30 |
edit directly.
Well, we have this feature over here on
| | 06:35 |
the view control bar called temporary view
properties.
| | 06:39 |
And we can enable it with this little pop
up menu.
| | 06:42 |
And what that will do is it'll put this
purple border around the screen.
| | 06:45 |
And now, for the time being, anything that
I do in this current view.
| | 06:50 |
Is just a temporary override while I"m
working, so maybe I want to move the
| | 06:53 |
furniture around and I find it difficult
to do that with it set to halftones, so I
| | 06:57 |
can go to visibility graphics, vg, and
these were all previously grade out but
| | 07:01 |
they're now available and I can come over
here to the furniture and turn off the
| | 07:05 |
half tone.
A moment ago I showed you that the scale
| | 07:11 |
was grade out and I could change it now...
And it's available, and then I could, you
| | 07:15 |
know, make whatever changes I want to
make.
| | 07:19 |
When you done making those change, if you
come to this pop up and choose restore
| | 07:22 |
view properties, it will throw away any of
those overrides that you have done, and
| | 07:26 |
notice that the furniture goes back o
being I have turned the scale and back to
| | 07:30 |
8th and one inch.
What was not thrown away was the physical
| | 07:36 |
movement I made.
So, I move that furniture group, it is
| | 07:40 |
still moved.
So the only thing that got thrown away
| | 07:43 |
were the graphical settings that got
applied to that furniture, not the
| | 07:47 |
physical location of that furniture.
So if you imagine extending these features
| | 07:52 |
to a multi-story building, you can see how
powerful the viewtemplate feature really is.
| | 07:58 |
And coupling that with the ability to
apply the View template directly to the
| | 08:01 |
properties, and then having the ability to
override when necessary gives you a
| | 08:05 |
solution that allows us to start managing
the settings across multiple views in a
| | 08:09 |
project, and it's really handy as your
project begins to grow in size.
| | 08:15 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Hiding and isolating objects in a model| 00:00 |
As your models become more complex, it can
be difficult to see and edit certain
| | 00:02 |
elements from time to time.
In a previous movie, we saw that we can
| | 00:06 |
use visibility graphic overrides to hide
elements at the category level.
| | 00:11 |
Sometimes, however, you simply need to
hide elements temporarily, or you want to
| | 00:14 |
hide individual particular elements in a
certain view.
| | 00:18 |
So in this movie, we're going to look at
two ways that we can hide stuff.
| | 00:21 |
We can hide things using the Temporary
Hide command, or we can hide things in a
| | 00:24 |
more permanent fashion but we can do them
object by object.
| | 00:29 |
And so again, in our exploration of
Visibility settings, moving our way from
| | 00:32 |
the most global down to the most specific.
We're starting to now hone in on things
| | 00:37 |
that are much more specifically focused on
very particular situations.
| | 00:42 |
So, I'm in a view here called Hide/Isolate
and I'm going to start with the temporary
| | 00:45 |
Hide/Isolate command.
Let's say that I want to do some work down
| | 00:49 |
in the foundation walls.
You can see that if I move my mouse around
| | 00:52 |
here, I can get those walls to highlight.
But it's going to be a little difficult to
| | 00:56 |
work on them.
Because I've got this big site plan in the way.
| | 00:59 |
This is a great job for the Temporary Hide
command.
| | 01:03 |
All I have to do is select this object.
And of course, the entire object selects
| | 01:07 |
because it's a linked Revit model.
And down here on the View Control bar,
| | 01:11 |
there's this little icon looks like
sunglasses.
| | 01:14 |
We have actually looked at this in a few
other movies, and there are several
| | 01:17 |
options here.
I can hide just the element I have
| | 01:20 |
selected and it will do just that.
In this case, it will hide the linked file.
| | 01:25 |
Or I can actually hide the category and I
can show you an example of that in just a
| | 01:28 |
moment, but lets do the hide element
first.
| | 01:31 |
And what you'll see is the object
disappears.
| | 01:35 |
You get this cyan-colored border around
your screen, and it tells you that you're
| | 01:38 |
in Temporary Hide/Isolate mode.
This is a temporary mode, meaning that if
| | 01:43 |
you close the file right now, and reopen
it It will reset all the Temporary Hide/Isolate.
| | 01:49 |
If you were to print out this view or any
other view, the effect would not be
| | 01:52 |
applied; it would restore any hidden
elements.
| | 01:55 |
So, the intention of this mode is simply
for you to be able to go in here, get a
| | 01:59 |
better look at the geometry that you
want to work on.
| | 02:03 |
So that you can select it, make your
modifications.
| | 02:06 |
And then when you're done, you choose
reset Temporary Hide/Isolate and the
| | 02:09 |
objects come back.
Okay, let me just show you a couple of
| | 02:12 |
other quick examples using the other
options on that menu.
| | 02:15 |
Here's a column right here.
If I select it and I go to Hide Element it
| | 02:20 |
only hides the one column.
Let me undo that.
| | 02:24 |
If I use the Hide category instead.
Then it does exactly that.
| | 02:29 |
It hides the entire category.
But again, this is a temporary hide that
| | 02:33 |
I've just done.
It only applies in the current work session.
| | 02:37 |
Let's go to the sunglasses, and reset
that.
| | 02:41 |
Isolate is the opposite.
So, if I had the same column selected, and
| | 02:45 |
I use either isolate element or isolate
category.
| | 02:49 |
Let's do isolate category.
It hides everything that's not a column
| | 02:54 |
,so whatever you have selected is the only
thing it displays and everything else gets
| | 02:57 |
hidden and again its temporary.
So lets reset that ,so those are temporary
| | 03:02 |
hide isolate mode you could do that when
you just need to get a better look.
| | 03:07 |
And you will actually find using that
quiet a bit ,something just in the
| | 03:10 |
sometimes in just need to get some work
done.
| | 03:13 |
So I'm going to close here the Project
browser and go to the Level 1 floor plan.
| | 03:17 |
Open that up and let me show you an
example where you might want to hide
| | 03:20 |
something individually, but you want to do
it on a permanent basis instead of a
| | 03:23 |
temporary basis.
You see how I have several section lines
| | 03:27 |
on the screen.
We could use the visibility graphics
| | 03:30 |
command that we looked at in a previous
movie and we could hide the section lines
| | 03:33 |
if we wanted to.
Easy enough to do, the trouble is they'll
| | 03:37 |
all be hidden.
Well, I've got this one section line here
| | 03:40 |
at the front of the building that I was
using just to build my curtain wall.
| | 03:43 |
And I don't want that to be there in my
drawings, kind of cluttering things up,
| | 03:46 |
and I certainly don't want it to be
printed.
| | 03:49 |
So, I want to hide that but I don't want
to hide the others.
| | 03:52 |
So, this is an example where if you have
an individual object like this section
| | 03:56 |
line, that just for whatever reason needs
to be hidden in this view, you can hide
| | 04:00 |
just it.
And unlike the temporary hide, this will
| | 04:04 |
be a permanent hide.
So, you select the object, and up here on
| | 04:08 |
the Modify tab, there's this little light
bulb icon, and if I choose hide category,
| | 04:12 |
that's just another way to get to VG.
So instead of going to VG and unchecking
| | 04:17 |
the box, this will do it for me, and if I
chose that, you could see all the section
| | 04:20 |
lines go away.
So let me undo that.
| | 04:24 |
What I'm going to do instead is, go to the
light bulb and say I want to hide just
| | 04:27 |
this element.
Now, that element will disappear and all
| | 04:31 |
the other sections remain.
Let me show you another example.
| | 04:34 |
Here's a foundation plan.
Now, I'm looking at this.
| | 04:37 |
It looks okay, but I see that there's this
little thing here in the middle.
| | 04:41 |
I'm not quite sure what that is.
Let me zoom in just a touch here.
| | 04:44 |
What is that?
How did that get there?
| | 04:46 |
Well you know, if I investigate further I
find out that, that is actually this
| | 04:50 |
opening object in the break room and for
whatever reason you know.
| | 04:54 |
Based on some other settings or what have
you it's showing here in the foundation plan.
| | 04:59 |
Now, I've a few ways I could deal with
that.
| | 05:01 |
I could go and investigate that family and
try and figure out why it's showing or
| | 05:04 |
look at some other settings.
But sometimes it's easier to just say that
| | 05:08 |
doesn't need to be here in the Foundation
Plan view, so I am simply going to hide it.
| | 05:13 |
So, I go to the Hide element again, choose
that and just like that it disappears, and
| | 05:17 |
it didn't take a lot of effort to do that.
Now, in either case, the only potential
| | 05:22 |
danger here is, how do you know something
is hidden right?
| | 05:25 |
How do we get back if I want to get back
again?
| | 05:28 |
For whatever reason, I want to get that
opening back or let's say that I changed
| | 05:31 |
my mind here on Level 1.
And I decided that I want to print that
| | 05:35 |
section after all, so down here on the
view control bar right next to the sunglasses.
| | 05:40 |
There is a little tiny light ball and this
is reveal hidden elements.
| | 05:44 |
I am going to click and instead of the
cyan border, this time I get a reddish
| | 05:47 |
color border, it says revel hidden
elements.
| | 05:51 |
And anything that is previously been
hidden will display here in that same
| | 05:54 |
reddish color.
I can select it and up here on the ribbon
| | 05:58 |
I can say I want to unhide that element.
And then either using this button here to
| | 06:03 |
the light bulb again, I can turn off the
reveal mode and the object comes back.
| | 06:08 |
So in both cases, when you do the
Permanent Hide, it's exactly that.
| | 06:13 |
It's a permanent hide.
The object stays hidden until you go to
| | 06:16 |
Reveal mode and bring it back again.
It won't print and if you close the
| | 06:20 |
project it'll come back again.
Contrast that to any of the ones on the
| | 06:24 |
Sunglasses popup.
Those are all temporary.
| | 06:27 |
They only apply in the current work
session.
| | 06:29 |
You typically use those when you just want
to get something out of the way.
| | 06:32 |
So that you can get some work done, and
then you'll turn them back on again.
| | 06:35 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding view range| 00:00 |
Orthographic views in Revit are generated
from the 3D model using a variety of rules
| | 00:03 |
derived from conventional architectural
drafting.
| | 00:07 |
When it comes to plan views, architectural
drafting convention treats a plan as
| | 00:09 |
basically a horizontal section.
Cutting the building at a pre-determined
| | 00:13 |
height above the floor, and looking down
into the model.
| | 00:15 |
Naturally there are many other rules and
abstractions applied to the graphics to
| | 00:18 |
achieve an acceptable floor plan.
However, the concept of the cut plane is
| | 00:22 |
used quite literally in Revit.
In this movie, we're going to look at the
| | 00:26 |
View Range feature which incorporates the
cut plane and a few other settings.
| | 00:29 |
And I'm in a file here called View Range
in order for us to do that.
| | 00:33 |
So I'm looking at the level one floor plan
view, and it has all of the default View
| | 00:37 |
Range settings applied to it.
Now let's start with where we can find the
| | 00:41 |
View Range settings.
So if you look at your P |
|
|
